Jeywin Blog

Syria Uprising of 2011

Friday, December 30th, 2011

In March 2011 Syria’s government, led by Pres. Bashar al-Assad, faced an unprecedented challenge to its authority when pro-democracy protests erupted throughout the country. Protesters demanded an end to the authoritarian practices of the Assad regime, in place since Assad’s father, Ḥafiz al-Assad, became president in 1971. The Syrian government used violence to suppress demonstrations, making extensive use of police, military, and paramilitary forces. Amateur footage and eyewitness accounts, the primary sources of information in a country largely closed to foreign journalists, showed the Syrian security forces beating and killing protesters and firing indiscriminately into crowds. In this special feature, Britannica provides a guide to the uprising and explores the historical and geographic context of the conflict.

Uprising

In March 2011 antigovernment protests broke out in Syria, inspired by a wave of similar demonstrations elsewhere in the Middle East and North Africa that had already ousted the long-serving presidents of Tunisia and Egypt. In the southwestern city of Darā, several people were killed on March 18 when security forces opened fire on protesters who were angered by the arrest of several children for writing antigovernment graffiti. Protests continued, and on March 23 more than 20 people were killed when security forces fired into crowds and raided a mosque where protesters were gathered. Following the crackdown in Darā, Assad’s spokeswoman denied that the government had ordered security forces to shoot protesters. She also announced that the government was considering implementing political reforms, including loosening restrictions on political parties and lifting Syria’s emergency law, which had been in place for 48 years. The announcement was dismissed by Syrian opposition figures. On March 25, following Friday prayers, rallies were held in cities across the country. Although security forces broke up some of the rallies, beating and arresting demonstrators, intense protests continued. In Damascus, to counter the opposition’s protests, large pro-government rallies were held. On March 29 the Syrian government announced the resignation of the cabinet, a gesture that acknowledged protesters’ calls for reform. The following day Assad made his first public appearance since the unrest began, addressing the protests in a speech before the country’s legislature. He claimed that the protests had been instigated by a foreign conspiracy, but he acknowledged the legitimacy of some of the protesters’ concerns. He resisted the opposition’s calls for immediate reform, saying that the government would proceed with its plans to introduce reform gradually. Following the speech, Syrian state media announced that Assad had formed a commission to study the repeal of the emergency law.

As demonstrations occurred sporadically throughout the country, the Syrian government continued to attribute unrest to foreign conspiracies and sectarian tension. The government made a few concessions aimed at Syria’s conservative Muslims and the Kurdish minority. On April 6 the government dealt with two grievances of conservative Muslims, closing Syria’s only casino and reversing a 2010 law prohibiting female teachers from wearing the niqāb, a veil that covers the face. The government also announced that Nōrūz, a New Year festival celebrated by Kurds, would be made a state holiday.

However, as protests intensified and spread to additional cities, there was an escalation in the use of violence by Syrian security forces. On April 8 security forces opened fire on demonstrators in several Syrian cities, killing at least 35 people. Amid reports that the death toll since the first protests in March had exceeded 200, international condemnation of the Syrian government mounted, with human rights organizations and foreign leaders calling for an immediate end to violence.

As security forces continued to use violence against protesters around the country, Assad appointed a new cabinet and pledged to institute political reforms and lift Syria’s emergency law. On April 19 the new cabinet passed measures that repealed the emergency law and dissolved Syria’s Supreme State Security Court, a special court used to try defendants accused of challenging the government. However, the government also took action to retain its power to suppress public protest, passing a new law requiring Syrians to obtain government permission before protesting. The newly appointed minister of the interior urged Syrians not to demonstrate, saying that the authorities would continue to treat demonstrations as a threat to public safety.

Soon after ending the emergency law, the Syrian government escalated its use of violence against protesters. On April 22 security forces fired on protesters who had assembled following Friday prayers, killing about 75. In spite of the international outcry provoked by the killings, the Syrian government launched new operations to silence protests, deploying large numbers of troops equipped with tanks and armoured personnel carriers to the cities of Darā, Bāniyās, and Ḥimṣ, three centres of antigovernment protest. In several areas of the country, the government imposed a communications blackout, shutting down telephone and Internet service. In Darā security forces cut the town’s water and electricity supplies.

As demonstrations continued to spread in Syria, the government increased its efforts to overwhelm protesters with military force, deploying soldiers and tanks to protest sites around the country. By early May the antigovernment protests had reached Damascus. Protests in the city centre were violently suppressed, and Syrian government forces imposed security cordons in several Damascus suburbs in an attempt to restrict the movements of possible demonstrators. The European Union (EU) imposed sanctions that included travel bans and asset freezes targeted against more than a dozen seniorSyrian officials thought to be directing the government’s actions against the protesters. In addition, an EU arms embargo was applied to the entire country. As violence persisted, Syria also became increasingly isolated from its regional allies. In May, Recep Tayyip Erdoğan, the Turkish prime minister, condemned the government’s use of violence against civilians. Weeks later Turkey demonstrated its support for protesters by hosting a conference for members of the Syrian opposition.

On June 6 Syrian official media reported that 120 Syrian soldiers had been ambushed and killed by a band of gunmen in the northern city of Jisr al-Shughūr. Residents of the city disputed the government’s account of the incident, saying that the soldiers had been killed by government forces for refusing to fire on demonstrators. The Syrian army launched a heavy assault on the town in response to the incident, causing thousands of the city’s residents to flee across the Turkish border.

The Assad regime continued to use violence against protesters in July and August, launching military assaults on cities including Ḥamāh and Latakia. The continued bloodshed drew global condemnation and calls for Assad to step down as president.

In early November Syrian officials reportedly agreed to an Arab League initiative calling for the Syrian government to stop violence against protesters, remove tanks and armoured vehicles from cities, and release political prisoners. Many critics saw the Syrian government’s acquiescence as a delaying tactic. This view was seemingly confirmed by a new outbreak of violence in Ḥimṣ days after the announcement.

Syria Facts and Figures

official name: Syrian Arab Republic
area: 71,498 square miles (185,180 square km)
population (2010 est.): 22,198,000
age breakdown (2009): Under age 15, 36.4%; 15–29, 30.7%; 30–44, 18.1%; 45–59, 9.4%; 60–74, 4.1%; 75 and over, 1.3%
form of government: Unitary multiparty republic with one legislative house (People’s Assembly)
capital: Damascus
other major cities: Aleppo, Ḥimṣ, Ḥamāh
official language: Arabic
official religion: None
religious affiliation (2000): Muslim about 86%, of which Sunni about 74%, ʿAlawite (Shīʿite) about 11%; Christian 8%, of which Orthodox about 5%, Roman Catholic about 2%; Druze about 3%; nonreligious/atheist about 3%
unemployment rate (2009): 8.5%
literacy rate (2003-04): Total population age 15 and older, 83.6%; males, 90.0%; females, 77.2%

Key events in Syria: 1946–2011

1946

Syria concludes a treaty with France ending French rule in Syria. French troops are withdrawn.

1947

The Bath party, an Arab nationalist party formed by Ṣalaḥ al-Dīn al-Bīṭār and Michel Aflaq in the early 1940s, holds its first congress in Damascus.

1948

Israel proclaims its independence and is attacked by the surrounding Arab states, including Syria. The large and disorganized Arab armies are defeated, shocking the Syrian public, which had expected a quick victory. Discontent with the government of Pres. Shukri al-Quwatli spreads within the Syrian military.

1949

Husni al-Zaim, the army chief of staff, seizes power in a military coup in March. Zaim quickly alienates his supporters and is deposed by a second military coup in August orchestrated by Sami al-Hinnawi, who designates a new civilian government. Hinnawi is overthrown by a third coup, led by Adib al-Shishakli, in December.

1951

Shishakli launches a second coup, deposing Syria’s civilian government and establishing a military dictatorship.

1954

Shishakli is overthrown by a military coup, and civilian government is restored.

1958

Syria and Egypt merge politically to form the United Arab Republic, with Cairo as the capital and Gamal Abdel Nasser as president. The union, which leads to the economic and political domination of Syria by Egypt, quickly becomes unpopular in Syria.

1961

A military coup reestablishes Syria as an independent country, and a new civilian government is formed.

1963

A coalition of military officers, including Baʿthist and Nasserist officers, seizes power in March. Soon after the coup, the Bathist faction takes control, purging Nasserists in government and suppressing uprisings. Within the Bath party in Syria, a split begins to develop between the party’s original leadership and younger members with a stronger commitment to socialist policies.

1966

Salah al-Jadid, a military officer and a member of the Alawite minority sect, seizes power at the head of a coup by the left-wing faction of the Bath party. Bīṭār and Aflaq are arrested. Ḥafiz al-Assad, another Alawite officer, becomes the minister of defense. The Bath party begins to split into a civilian faction headed by Jadid and a military faction headed by Assad.

1967

Egypt, Jordan, and Syria are defeated in the Six-Day War with Israel. Israel seizes the Golan Heights from Syria.

1970

Assad takes power in a coup, ousting Jadid.

1973

Syria and Egypt launch attacks against Israeli forces in the Golan Heights and the Sinai, respectively. Syria fails to retake the Golan Heights. Hostilities end with a cease-fire agreement.

1976

Syria intervenes in the Lebanese civil war, sending a force of 25,000 soldiers to Lebanon to prevent the defeat of right-wing Christian militias. Syria’s military presence in Lebanon continues for nearly three decades, enabling Syria to exert significant influence on Lebanese politics.

1979

The U.S. State Department designates Syria a state sponsor of terrorism, citing its alleged support for Palestinian militant groups. The designation carries economic sanctions.

1980

Islamist resistance to the Assad regime grows. Islamist and secular opposition groups organize demonstrations and riots around the country. A member of the Muslim Brotherhood attempts to assassinate Assad.

1982

Islamist forces briefly take over the city of Ḥamāh. The Syrian military launches a full-scale assault to put down the rebellion, destroying large areas of the city and killing thousands of civilians.

1990

Syria joins in the U.S.-led coalition against Iraq following the Iraqi invasion of Kuwait.

1994

Ḥafiz al-Assad’s oldest son, Basil, considered likely to succeed him as president, is killed in a car accident. Assad’s second son, Bashar, then studying ophthalmology in London, takes Basil’s place as Assad’s heir apparent.

2000

Ḥafiz al-Assad dies in June. The following day, the People’s Assembly amends the constitution to lower the minimum age of the president to 34, allowing Bashar al-Assad, then 34 years old, to succeed his father in office. He is elected president in a referendum in July. In November, Assad releases 600 political prisoners, a move that is seen by many as a sign of his intention to advance democratic reforms.

2001

Assad initiates a new crackdown on reformist politicians and activists, disappointing hopes that the new president would lead a transition away from authoritarianism in Syria.

2004

The United Nations passes Resolution 1559, calling for the removal of all non-Lebanese military forces from Lebanon. The resolution is aimed at Syria, which still has thousands of troops stationed in Lebanon.

2005

Rafiq al-Hariri, a former Lebanese prime minister and a prominent critic of the Syrian military presence in Lebanon, is assassinated in Beirut in February. His death increases pressure on Syria, suspected by many of ordering the assassination, to withdraw its troops from Lebanon. Syria withdraws its forces in April.

2008

Syria and Lebanon agree to formally establish diplomatic relations for the first time since the two countries became independent.

2010

The Syrian government prohibits teachers from wearing the niqāb, a veil that covers all of the face except the eyes, while teaching.

Uprising in Syria2011

February 2011

Several small demonstrations are held in Syria to call for reform and to show solidarity with pro-democracy protesters in Egypt, Tunisia, and Libya. Syrian security forces are able to contain the demonstrations, making a number of arrests.

March 6, 2011

In the southern city of Darā, Syrian police arrest several children for writing antigovernment graffiti.

March 15, 2011

Antigovernment protests are held in several cities around Syria.

March 19, 2011

Syrian security forces seal off the city of Darā, the site of the heaviest protests, in an attempt to prevent protests from spreading.

March 24, 2011

Dozens of protesters are reportedly killed when security forces open fire on a demonstration in Darā.

March 29, 2011

As protests spread and the number of protesters reported killed rises, President Assad fires his cabinet. Representatives of the president hint that new reforms will be undertaken.

March 30, 2011

In his first speech since protests began, Assad is defiant, blaming the unrest on foreign conspirators seeking to destabilize Syria. He offers no concrete reforms or concessions.

April 6, 2011

In an attempt to appeal to conservative Muslims, the government shuts Syria’s only casino and reverses a law prohibiting teachers from wearing the niqāb, a veil that covers the face.

April 12, 2011

The government begins to use heavy military weaponry against hubs of protest. Soldiers and tanks are deployed to the cities of Bāniyās and Ḥimṣ.

April 16, 2011

Assad gives his second speech since the protests began. He offers some concessions, vowing to lift Syria’s long-standing emergency law, which grants security forces broad authority to investigate and arrest Syrians when national security is deemed to be at risk.

April 19, 2011

Syria’s emergency law is lifted, although the Syrian opposition dismisses the concession as merely cosmetic. The security forces continue to shoot and detain protesters.

April 28, 2011

Dozens of members of the Bath Party resign in protest against the regime’s crackdown. Human rights groups and opposition groups estimate that the death toll exceeds 500.

May 9, 2011

The European Union (EU) imposes an arms embargo and applies travel restrictions and asset freezes to 13 senior Syrian officials. The sanctions do not apply to Assad personally.

May 19, 2011

The United States imposes new sanctions against Syrian officials. The new sanctions, which include asset freezes and travel bans, extend to Assad himself.

May 23, 2011

The EU votes to extend sanctions to include Assad.

May 30, 2011

Protesters are galvanized by newly published images of the mutilated body of Hamza Ali al-Khatib, a 13-year-old boy from Darā who was tortured to death while in police custody. Photos of Khatib are distributed at protests, and the images become a potent symbol of the regime’s brutality.

June 6, 2011

Syrian official media report that 120 soldiers were killed by armed gangs in the northern city of Jisr al-Shughūr, near the Turkish border. Members of the opposition claim that the soldiers were executed for refusing to fire on protesters.

June 10, 2011

Syrian tanks and troops move into Jisr al-Shughūr. Thousands of residents flee across the border into Turkey.

June 20, 2011

Assad gives a third speech in which he continues to blame foreign conspiracies for unrest in Syria. His calls for a national dialogue are dismissed by the opposition.

June 27, 2011

The Syrian government permits some Syrian opposition leaders to hold a rare public meeting in a hotel in Damascus.

July 1, 2011

Large demonstrations are held throughout Syria. In Ḥamāh, tens of thousands reportedly participate in street protests.

July 3, 2011

Syrian tanks and troops are dispatched to Ḥamāh, where security forces raid houses and arrest suspected dissidents.

July 7, 2011

Amid concerns that the Syrian military’s actions in Ḥamāh could lead to a massacre, the U.S. ambassador to Syria shows solidarity with protesters by visiting Ḥamāh. The Syrian government denounces the visit, calling it proof that the United States is involved in fomenting protest in Syria.

July 8, 2011

As massive demonstrations are held in Ḥamāh, the French ambassador to Syria also travels to the city to show support for protesters.

July 11, 2011

Crowds of Assad supporters attack the U.S. embassy and the French embassy in Damascus. Some demonstrators scale the walls of the U.S. embassy and vandalize parts of the building before embassy guards are able to reestablish control. No injuries are reported. At the French embassy, guards hold off crowds by firing into the air. U.S. and French officials accuse the Syrian government of permitting the attacks to take place.

July 25, 2011

The Syrian cabinet approves a draft law allowing for the formation of new political parties in Syria. The law includes provisions that, members of the Syrian opposition argue, could be used by the Assad regime to disqualify any viable party.

August 3, 2011

The UN Security Council condemns the Syrian government for its use of violence against protesters.

August 4, 2011

Assad issues a decree putting the draft law allowing for the formation of new political parties into effect immediately.

August 8, 2011

In a sign of the Assad regime’s increasing diplomatic isolation, Kuwait, Bahrain, and Saudi Arabia recall their ambassadors to Syria.

August 17, 2011

In a telephone conversation with UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-Moon, Assad states that military and police operations in Syria have stopped. However, reports of attacks and civilian casualties continue to emerge.

August 18, 2011

U.S. Pres. Barack Obama, German Chancellor Angela Merkel, French Pres. Nicholas Sarkozy, and British Prime Minister David Cameron issue statements calling for Assad to step down as president.

August 23, 2011

UN human rights officials estimate that more than 2,200 people have been killed by Syrian security forces since mid-March. The UN Human Rights Council votes to open an investigation into possible crimes against humanity.

September 2, 2011

Bolstering sanctions, the EU agrees to a ban on the import of Syrian oil.

September 8, 2011

Iranian Pres. Mahmoud Ahmadinejad calls on Assad to end the violence against protesters. Ahmadinejad’s statement follows several public statements by Iranian officials acknowledging the legitimacy of Syrian protesters’ demands. Previously, Iran, thought to be the closest ally of the Assad regime, had remained publicly supportive of Assad’s response to the protests.

September 15, 2011

Following a four-day conference of Syrian opposition activists in Istanbul, 140 people are selected to form the Syrian National Council, a council claiming to represent the Syrian opposition.

October 2, 2011

The Syrian Nation Council issues a statement calling on the international community to defend protesters in Syria.

October 4, 2011

China and Russia veto a UN Security Council resolution that condemns the Syrian government’s crackdowns and indicates that the continuation of violence against protesters could lead to international sanctions.

October 14, 2011

The United Nations announces that 3,000 people have been killed since the start of protests, including nearly 200 children.

October 29, 2011

The Arab League denounces the Syrian government’s use of violence against protesters.

November 1, 2011

Qatar’s foreign minister announces that Syria has accepted an Arab League plan for dialogue between the Syrian government and the opposition. The plan calls for the Syrian government to cease violence against protesters, allow journalists into the country, and release political prisoners.

<http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/1781371/Syria-Uprising-of-2011>.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

Yemen Uprising of 2011

Friday, December 30th, 2011

In early 2011, a wave of pro-democracy protests swept the Middle East and North Africa, unseating leaders in Tunisia and Egypt and leading to sustained unrest in other countries, including Libya, Syria, and Bahrain. In Yemen pro-democracy activists and members of the opposition staged protests challenging the rule of President Ali Abd Allah Salih, who had held power for more than three decades in spite of Yemen’s economic underdevelopment, shifting political landscape, and fractious tribal society. In this special feature, Britannica provides a guide to recent events in Yemen and explores the historical and geographic context of the conflict.

Uprising

In late January 2011—after a popular uprising in Tunisia, known as the Jasmine Revolution, had forced Pres. Zine al-Abidine Ben Ali from power, inspiring similar protests in Egypt—thousands of protesters gathered in Sanaa and several other Yemeni cities to call on Ṣāliḥ to step down as president. The protesters chanted pro-democracy slogans and condemned poverty and official corruption. Unlike the Egyptian and Tunisian protests, which seemed to have little centralized leadership, protests in Yemen appeared to have been organized and directed by a coalition of Yemeni opposition groups. The Yemeni demonstrations proceeded with little violence between protesters and security forces. In response to the demonstrations, Ṣāliḥ made several economic concessions, including a reduction in income taxes and an increase in the salaries for government employees. In February he promised not to stand for reelection when his current term ended in 2013, and he vowed that his son would not succeed him in office. The move failed to placate protesters, who noted that Ṣāliḥ had reneged on a previous promise not to seek reelection in 2006.

Rejecting Ṣāliḥ’s concessions, protesters held daily rallies, often clashing with Ṣāliḥ supporters who attacked with stones, sticks, and occasionally firearms. On February 20 thousands of Yemeni university students and recent graduates staged a sit-in on the campus of Sanaa University, vowing not to end their protest until Ṣāliḥ stepped down as president. Ṣāliḥ resisted calls for his ouster, saying that his early departure would cause chaos in the country.

Clashes between protesters and police continued in March and led to several more deaths. On March 10 Ṣāliḥ attempted to placate protesters once again by vowing to draft a new constitution that would strengthen the parliament and the judiciary. He said that the draft constitution would be put to a referendum before the end of the year. The opposition immediately rejected the initiative and continued to call for Ṣāliḥ’s immediate departure.

The increasingly violent tactics used by security forces against protesters eroded support for Ṣāliḥ within the Yemeni government, weakening his hold on power. On March 18 Ṣāliḥ loyalists in civilian clothes opened fire on protesters in Sanaa, killing at least 50 people. The episode caused dozens of Yemeni officials, including diplomats, cabinet ministers, and members of parliament, to resign in protest. On March 20 Maj. Gen. Ali Mohsen al-Ahmar, commander of the army’s 1st Armoured Division, announced his support for the opposition and vowed to use his troops to protect the protesters. The defection of Ahmar, considered to be the most powerful military officer in Yemen, was quickly followed by similar announcements from several other senior officers. The defections further heightened tensions in Sanaa, where defected military units and those units still under Ṣāliḥ’s control both deployed tanks and armoured vehicles to key locations around the city.

On March 22 Ṣāliḥ again refused to step down immediately, offering instead to leave office in January 2012, after parliamentary elections. His offer was rejected by the opposition. As pressure to step down increased, Ṣāliḥ entered into negotiations with military officers, political leaders, and tribal representatives to decide the terms of his departure. On March 26 there were reports that an agreement was imminent, and Ṣāliḥ himself furthered the perception that he was preparing to step down, saying in a speech that he would only transfer power to “safe hands” to prevent the country from slipping into chaos. However, on March 28, amid reports that negotiations had stalled, Ṣāliḥ once again appeared defiant, saying that he would no longer make concessions to the opposition.

On April 23 Ṣāliḥ indicated his acceptance of a plan proposed by the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) that would remove him from power and begin the transition to a new government. The plan required that Ṣāliḥ step down 30 days after formally asking the prime minister to form a national unity government that would include members of the opposition, in exchange for a guarantee of immunity from prosecution for Ṣāliḥ and his associates, including family members and formerofficials. Ṣāliḥ’s resignation would be followed 30 days later by presidential elections. The plan was soon approved by the Yemeni opposition, although many protesters were angered by the provision granting Ṣāliḥ immunity. The initiative faltered in early May when Ṣāliḥ withdrew his support at the last minute and refused to sign the agreement. Three weeks later, after some formal changes to the agreement had been made, representatives of Ṣāliḥ announced that he was ready to sign. However, on May 22, Ṣāliḥ once again refused to sign at the last minute, causing the GCC to suspend its efforts at mediation. With chances for a negotiated settlement appearing remote, violent confrontations between loyalist and opposition forces intensified. In the days that followed Ṣāliḥ’s refusal to sign the GCC agreement, heavy fighting broke out in Sanaa between pro-opposition tribal militias and troops loyal to Ṣāliḥ, killing dozens.

On June 3 Ṣāliḥ sustained extensive burns and shrapnel wounds when a bomb planted in the presidential palace in Sanaa exploded. He was transported to Saudi Arabia for medical treatment the next day, leaving his vice president, Abd al-Rab Mansur al-Hadi, to serve as acting president in his absence. Yemeni officials maintained that Ṣāliḥ would quickly return to Yemen and resume his duties, but members of the opposition hailed his absence as an opportunity to negotiate a transition agreement that would formally remove him from power.

Even with Ṣāliḥ out of the country, the opposition’s efforts to negotiate a transfer of power appeared to stall. In September, gun battles once again broke out in Sanaa between the opposition and forces loyal to Ṣāliḥ. Amid rising fears of a civil war, Ṣāliḥ abruptly returned to Yemen on September 23.

Yemen: Facts and figures

official name: Republic of Yemen
area: 203,891 square miles (528,076 square km)
population (2010 est.): 23,494,000
age breakdown (2009): Under age 15, 43.9%; 15–29, 29.8%; 30–44, 14.4%; 45–59, 7.9%; 60–74, 3.2%; 75 and over, 0.8%
form of government: Multiparty republic with two legislative houses (Consultative Council; House of Representatives)
capital: Sanaa
other major cities: Aden, Taizz, Al-Ḥudaydah
official language: Arabic
official religion: Islam
religious affiliation (2005): Muslim, nearly 100%, of which Sunni c. 58%, Shīʿite c. 42%
unemployment rate (2009): 14.6%
literacy rate (2008): Total population age 15 and older, 60.9%; males, 78.9%; females, 42.8%

Key events in Yemen, 1962 – 2011

In 1962, Yemen’s northern and southern regions were governed separately. North Yemen was an independent state ruled since the 1930s by a monarchy, while South Yemen was under British colonial administration.

1962

Yemen remains divided into a northern state ruled by a monarchy and a southern state under British control. In September factions within the armed forces in North Yemen overthrow the monarch, Imam Muḥammad al-Badr, and proclaim the Yemen Arab Republic. Al-Badr evades capture and rallies tribal support, leading to a civil war between republicans and royalists. Egypt and Saudi Arabia intervene in the conflict, on the sides of the republicans and the royalists, respectively.

1963

In South Yemen, a newly formed nationalist group, the National Liberation Front, launches a guerrilla campaign against the British.

1967

Britain withdraws from South Yemen, transferring sovereignty to the National Liberation Front, which founds the People’s Republic of South Yemen. The Six-Day War forces Egypt to withdraw its forces in North Yemen.

1970

The royalists and republicans in North Yemen reach a reconciliation agreement, ending the civil war. South Yemen renames itself the People’s Democratic Republic of Yemen, aligning itself with the Soviet Union and embarking on a program of socialist economic reorganization.

1972

A brief border war breaks out between North and South Yemen. Following the cease-fire, both sides agree to a plan for political unification. The plan is stalled when relations between the two countries deteriorate in the following year.

1978

Following the assassination of two presidents of North Yemen in two years, Alī Abd Allāh Ṣāliḥ becomes president of North Yemen.

1979

Another brief war breaks out between North and South Yemen. Once again, hostilities are ended with a unification agreement that quickly collapses.

1990

After months of negotiations, the Republic of Yemen is proclaimed on May 22, uniting North and South Yemen. The newly united Yemen suffers international isolation and economic losses when it opposes the use of force to expel Iraqi troops from Kuwait following the Iraqi invasion that prompted the Persian Gulf War (1990–91). Led by Saudi Arabia, a number of Arab countries cut off aid to Yemen and expel Yemeni workers.

1994

Civil war breaks out between the Ṣāliḥ regime and a secessionist movement based in the south. The secessionists are defeated, and Ṣāliḥ emerges with greater political and military dominance.

2000

An attack by al-Qaeda suicide bombers against the USS Cole, a U.S. warship harboured in Aden, kills 17 sailors. The incident leads to greater security cooperation between Yemen and the United States.

2004

Government forces launch attacks to suppress a rebellion around the northern town of Ṣadah. The rebels, who are led by members of the al-Hūthī family, a Zaydī Shīite clan, call for the preservation of Zaydī religious identity and condemn the Ṣāliḥ regime as pro-Western. Sporadic outbreaks ofviolence between rebels and government forces persist for several years, resulting in the displacement of hundreds of thousands of civilians in the north.

2005

Ṣāliḥ states that he will not seek another term as president in elections scheduled for 2006.

2006

Reneging on his earlier pledge not to enter elections in 2006, Ṣāliḥ runs for another seven-year term as president and is reelected.

2009

Yemeni and Saudi forces launch a major offensive against the al-Hūthī rebels in areas along the border between Yemen and Saudi Arabia. Although the offensive leads to a cease-fire, it fails to decisively defeat the rebellion.

2010

Ṣaliḥ declares “total war” on al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula, a militant network based in Yemen, after the group is linked to an attempted airline bombing in the United States that took place in late 2009. The Yemeni military launches air strikes and ground assaults in tribal areas of easternYemen, where the group is thought to operate.

Uprising in Yemen2011

Jan. 27, 2011

Inspired by the protests in Tunisia and Egypt, thousands of protesters rally in Sanaa to demand the resignation of Alī Abd Allāh Ṣāliḥ and to call for political and economic reform.

Feb. 2, 2011

As protests intensify, Ṣāliḥ offers concessions, pledging not to run for reelection in 2013 and not to hand power to his son. In spite of Ṣāliḥ’s concessions, protests continue.

March 10, 2011

Ṣāliḥ again offers concessions to protesters, vowing to draft a new constitution strengthening the parliament and the judiciary. Demonstrations continue unabated.

March 18, 2011

At least 50 people are killed when Ṣāliḥ supporters open fire on demonstrators in Sanaa. A number of Yemeni officials resign in protest.

March 20, 2011

Ṣāliḥ fires his cabinet. Sadiq al-Ahmar, head of the powerful Hāshid tribal confederation, calls on Ṣāliḥ to step down.

March 21, 2011

Maj. Gen. Ali Mohsen al-Ahmar, considered to be the most powerful military officer in Yemen, declares his support for the opposition. Loyalist and opposition military units deploy tanks around Sanaa.

April 7, 2011

The Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) proposes a transition plan that calls for Ṣāliḥ to step down as president in exchange for immunity from prosecution. The next day Ṣāliḥ appears to reject the plan, accusing the GCC of interfering in Yemeni affairs.

April 23, 2011

Ṣāliḥ says that he accepts the GCC transition plan, which calls for him to step down after 30 days.

April 25, 2011

The opposition coalition accepts the GCC transition plan.

May 1, 2011

Ṣāliḥ refuses at the last minute to sign the GCC transition agreement. Violent clashes between security forces and protesters continue.

May 18, 2011

Representatives of Ṣāliḥ announce that he is prepared to sign the GCC agreement.

May 22, 2011

Ṣāliḥ once again refuses to sign the GCC agreement, causing the GCC to suspend its attempts at mediation.

May 23, 2011

Heavy fighting breaks out in Sanaa between security forces loyal to Ṣāliḥ and tribal militiamen loyal to Sadiq al-Ahmar.

May 29, 2011

Islamic militants take over the town of Zinjibār, the capital of the Abyan governorate, causing government officials and residents to flee. The takeover stokes fears that chaos in Yemen will ultimately benefit al-Qaeda in the Arabian Peninsula.

June 3, 2011

Ṣāliḥ is injured by a bomb planted in the presidential palace in Sanaa. Hours after the attack, amid rumours that Ṣāliḥ has been gravely injured or killed, an audio message is broadcast in which Ṣāliḥ condemns the attackers and asserts that he is in good health.

June 4, 2011

Ṣāliḥ is taken to Saudi Arabia for medical treatment, sparking celebrations in the streets of Sanaa. Media reports suggest that Ṣāliḥ’s injuries are more severe than Yemeni officials originally indicated, consisting of extensive burns and shrapnel wounds. The Yemeni vice president, Abd al-Rab Mansur al-Hadi, takes over in Ṣāliḥ’s absence but does not formally assume the presidency.

June 6, 2011

In response to reports suggesting that the severity of Ṣāliḥ’s injuries will prevent him from returning to Yemen, Yemeni officials maintain that he is expected to return from Saudi Arabia and resume his duties as president in a matter of days.

June 8, 2011

Media reports indicate that in recent weeks the United States expanded its covert air campaign against Islamic militants in Yemen, launching a number of air strikes against suspected militant leaders.

June 13, 2011

Representatives of the Yemeni opposition meet with Hadi. It remains unclear if Hadi would support a transition agreement that would remove Ṣāliḥ from power.

June 17, 2011

Two weeks after the attack that injured Ṣāliḥ, Yemeni officials deny new Saudi reports that the president will not be able to return to Yemen.

June 22, 2011

Dozens of al-Qaeda militants are reported to have escaped from prison in Al-Mukallā, a city in southern Yemen.

July 7, 2011

A televised address by Ṣāliḥ, his first since being injured in June, is broadcast in Yemen. He appears to speak with difficulty, and his hands are heavily bandaged. Ṣāliḥ says that dialogue will be necessary to resolve the crisis in Yemen.

July 16, 2011

A group of Yemeni opposition leaders announce the formation of a transitional council to prepare for a transition of power. However, the announcement highlights the disorganization and disunity of the opposition, as some of the leaders named to the council claim not to have been informed of their inclusion on the council prior to the announcement. Many protest leaders denounce the council, saying that it was formed without proper deliberation among opposition groups.

August 16, 2011

Ṣāliḥ makes a televised speech to his supporters in Yemen, vowing to return to Sanaa and fiercely denouncing the opposition. Ṣāliḥ’s condition appears to have improved significantly since his televised address in July.

September 16, 2011

Clashes between forces loyal to Ṣāliḥ and forces aligned with the opposition break out in Sanaa. At Sanaa University, security forces attack protesters at a sit-in.

September 20, 2011

After several days of gun battles in Sanaa, officials announce a cease-fire. However, violence soon resumes.

September 23, 2011

As fears of a full-fledged civil war build, Ṣāliḥ returns to Yemen after spending nearly four months in Saudi Arabia recuperating from his injuries.

<http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/1777018/Yemen-Uprising-of-2011>.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Libya Revolt of 2011

Friday, December 30th, 2011

In early 2011, amid a wave of popular protest in countries throughout the Middle East and North Africa, largely peaceful demonstrations against entrenched regimes brought quick transfers of power in Egypt and Tunisia. In Libya, however, an uprising against the four-decade rule of Muammar al-Qaddafi led to civil war and international military intervention. In this special feature, Britannica provides a guide to recent events in Libya and explores the historical and geographic context of the conflict.

Uprising

On February 15, 2011, antigovernment rallies were held in Banghāzī by protesters angered by the arrest of a human rights lawyer, Fethi Tarbel. The protesters called for Qaddafi to step down and for the release of political prisoners. Libyan security forces used water cannons and rubber bullets against the crowds, resulting in a number of injuries. To counter the demonstrations further, a pro-government rally orchestrated by the Libyan authorities was broadcast on state television.

As the protests intensified, with demonstrators taking control of Banghāzī and unrest spreading to Tripoli, the Libyan government began using lethal force against demonstrators. Security forces and squads of mercenaries fired live ammunition into crowds of demonstrators. Demonstrators also were attacked with tanks and artillery and from the air with warplanes and helicopter gunships. The regime restricted communications, blocking the Internet and interrupting telephone service throughout the country. On February 21, 2011 one of Qaddafi’s sons, Sayf al-Islam, gave a defiant address on state television, blaming outside agitators for the unrest and saying that further demonstrations could lead to civil war in the country. He vowed that the regime would fight “to the last bullet.”

The government’s sudden escalation of violence against protesters and other civilians drew international condemnation from foreign leaders and human rights organizations. It also seemed to damage the coherence of the regime, causing a number of high-level officials—including the minister of justice and a number of senior Libyan diplomats, including the Libyan ambassador to the United Nations—to resign in protest or issue statements condemning the regime. A number of Libyan embassies around the world began to fly Libya’s pre-Qaddafi flag, signaling support for the uprising. Support for Qaddafi also seemed to waver in some segments of the military; as the Libyan air force carried out attacks against demonstrators, two Libyan fighter pilots flew their jets to Malta, choosing to defect rather than obey orders to bomb Banghāzī.

On February 22, 2011 Qaddafi delivered an angry, rambling speech on state television, condemning the protesters as traitors and calling on his supporters to fight them. The speech took place in the Bāb al-ʿAzīziyyah compound, Qaddafi’s primary headquarters in Tripoli, in front of a building that still showed extensive damage from a 1986 air strike by the United States. He resisted calls to step down and vowed to remain in Libya. Although he denied having used force against protesters, he repeatedly vowed to use violence to remain in power.

Clashes continued, and Qaddafi’s hold on power weakened as Libyan military units increasingly sided with the opposition against the regime. As demonstrators acquired weapons from government arms depots and joined forces with defected military units, the anti-Qaddafi movement began to take the form of an armed rebellion. The newly armed rebel forces were able to expel most pro-Qaddafi troops from the eastern portion of Libya, including the city of Banghāzī, and many western cities by February 23, 2011. The Libyan-Egyptian border was opened, allowing foreign journalists into the country for the first time since the conflict began. Pro-Qaddafi paramilitary units continued to hold the city of Tripoli, where Qaddafi and members of his family and inner circle remained.

As Qaddafi massed his forces in the Tripoli area to hold off the rebels there, his public statements seemed to indicate that he was becoming increasingly isolated and desperate. Speaking by telephone on Libyan state television on February 24, 2011, Qaddafi once again lashed out at protesters, saying that the young people at the core of the protest movement were acting under the influence of hallucinogenic drugs and that the demonstrations were being controlled by al-Qaeda.

Foreign leaders continued to condemn the violence. However, international efforts to intervene or pressure the regime to end the bloodshed were complicated by the presence of many foreign nationals in Libya still waiting to be evacuated.

The regime continued its efforts to hold the capital, launching attacks around Tripoli, some of which were repelled by rebel forces. On February 25, 2011 pro-Qaddafi gunmen in Tripoli attacked unarmed protesters and others as they emerged from mosques after Friday prayers.

International pressure for Qaddafi to step down increased as violence continued and foreign nationals were evacuated. The UN Security Council unanimously approved a measure that included exacting sanctions against the Qaddafi regime, imposing a travel ban and an arms embargo, and freezing the Qaddafi family’s assets. The measure also referred the situation in Libya to the International Criminal Court (ICC). The United States, the European Union (EU), and a number of other countries also imposed sanctions. On February 28 the United States announced that it had frozen at least $30 billion in Libyan assets.

Amid continuing skirmishes as rebel forces strengthened their positions outside Tripoli, Qaddafi invited a number of Western journalists to the city in an attempt to demonstrate that the situation remained under control in the capital. In interviews he continued to blame al-Qaeda and hallucinogenic drugs for the uprising. He claimed that Western leaders who had called for him to step down had done so out of a desire to colonize Libya, and he insisted that he was still well loved by Libyans.

A rebel leadership council, formed by the merger of local rebel groups, appeared in Banghāzī in early March. Known as the Transitional National Council (TNC), it declared that its aims would be to act as the rebellion’s military leadership and as the representative of the Libyan opposition, provide services in rebel-held areas, and guide the country’s transition to democratic government.

Conditions in Libya worsened as the armed struggle continued, and thousands of people, mostly migrant workers from Egypt and Tunisia, fled toward the borders. Governments and humanitarian organizations began to organize efforts to address worsening shortages of food, fuel, and medical supplies throughout the country.

After the rebels succeeded in taking control of eastern Libya and a number of cities in the west, the conflict appeared to enter a stalemate. The Qaddafi regime still controlled enough soldiers and weapons to hold Tripoli and to stage fresh assaults, which rebel fighters, although poorly equipped, were largely able to repel. Most fighting took place in the towns around Tripoli and in the central coastal region, where rebels and Qaddafi loyalists battled for control of the oil-export terminals on the Gulf of Sidra.

As the fighting continued, forces loyal to Qaddafi seemed to gain momentum, launching successful assaults to retake control in strategic areas around Tripoli and on the coast of the Gulf of Sidra. Attacking with fighter jets, tanks, and artillery, pro-Qaddafi forces had by March 10 driven rebel forces from Al-Zāwiyah, west of Tripoli, and from the oil-export centre of Ras Lanuf. Those gains highlighted the Qaddafi loyalists’ advantages in weaponry, training, and organization.

As Qaddafi appeared to gain the upper hand, the international community continued to debate possible diplomatic and military responses to the rapidly developing conflict. Countries worked to establish contact with the TNC, although only France granted it official recognition, announcing on March 10, 2011 that it would treat the council as Libya’s legitimate government. International condemnation of the Qaddafi regime continued to build, and, at an emergency summit on March 11, the EU unanimously called for Qaddafi to step down. However, the international community remained divided over the possibility of military intervention—most likely by imposing a no-fly zone over Libya, a measure long requested by the rebels to prevent Qaddafi loyalists from launching air attacks. Some countries, including France and the United Kingdom, signaled their support for such an operation, while others, including the United States and Germany, expressed their reservations, emphasizing the need for broad international consensus and warning against possible unforeseen consequences of military intervention. The African Union (AU) rejected any military intervention in Libya, asserting that the crisis should be resolved through negotiations, whereas the Arab League passed a resolution on March 13, 2011 calling on the UN Security Council to impose a no-fly zone over Libya.

On March 15, 2011 Qaddafi loyalists launched a heavy assault on the eastern city of Ajdābiyā, the last large rebel-held city on the route to Banghāzī. On March 17, as Qaddafi loyalists advanced on the remaining rebel positions in Banghāzī and Tobruk in the east and Miṣrātah in the west, the UN Security Council voted 10–0—with abstentions from Russia, China, Germany, India, and Brazil—to authorize military action, including imposition of a no-fly zone to protect Libyan civilians. The Qaddafi regime responded by declaring an immediate cease-fire, although there were reports that pro-Qaddafi forces continued to launch attacks after the announcement and that heavy fighting continued in Banghāzī.

Beginning March 19, 2011, a coalition of U.S. and European forces with warplanes and cruise missiles attacked targets in Libya in an effort to disable Libya’s air force and air defense systems so that the UN-authorized no-fly zone could be imposed. Coalition missiles struck buildings in a compound used by Qaddafi as a command centre, and in eastern Libya warplanes attacked a pro-Qaddafi armoured column positioned outside Banghāzī. Emboldened by the air strikes, rebel forces once again launched an offensive to challenge pro-Qaddafi forces’ hold on the oil centres on the coast. Qaddafi denounced the coalition attacks as an act of aggression against Libya and vowed to continue fighting international forces and the rebels.

Coalition spokesmen announced on March 23, 2011 that the Libyan air force had been completely disabled by coalition air strikes. However, heavy fighting continued on the ground. Pro-Qaddafi units massed around the rebel-held city of Miṣrātah in the west and the contested city of Ajdābiyā in the east, shelling both heavily and causing significant civilian casualties. Attacks by coalition warplanes soon weakened pro-Qaddafi ground forces in eastern Libya, allowing rebels to advance west again.

On March 27, 2011 the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) officially took command of military operations previously directed by the United States, France, and the United Kingdom in Libya. The handover came after several days of debate between NATO countries over the limits of international military intervention; several countries had argued that the coalition’s aggressive targeting of pro-Qaddafi ground forces had exceeded the mandate set by the UN Security Council to protect civilians.

On March 30, 2011 Libyan foreign minister Moussa Koussa defected, fleeing to the United Kingdom. The defection of Koussa, a former head of Libyan intelligence and a longtime member of Qaddafi’s inner circle, was interpreted as a sign that support for Qaddafi among senior Libyan officials was beginning to wane.

As the fighting progressed, it began to appear that, even with NATO attacks on pro-Qaddafi forces, the Libyan rebels—a poorly armed and disorganized force with little military training—would be unable to oust Qaddafi or achieve decisive successes against Qaddafi’s professional troops. Diplomatic efforts to resolve the crisis intensified, with an AU delegation traveling to Tripoli on April 10 to present a cease-fire plan to Qaddafi. AU representatives announced that Qaddafi had accepted the plan, although pro-Qaddafi forces continued to launch attacks on April 11, 2011. The plan was rejected by the rebel leaders on the grounds that it did not provide for Qaddafi’s departure from Libya.

As the stalemate continued, the United Kingdom announced on April 19 that it would send a team of military liaison officers to Libya to advise rebel leaders on military strategy, organization, and logistics. The next day France and Italy announced that they would also send advisers. All three countries specified that their officers would not participate in fighting. The Libyan foreign minister condemned the decision to send military advisers, saying that such aid to the rebels would only prolong the conflict.

NATO attacks continued and targeted a number of sites associated with Qaddafi and members of his inner circle, such as the Bāb al-ʿAzīziyyah compound in Tripoli, drawing protests from Libyan officials who charged that NATO had adopted a strategy of trying to kill Qaddafi. His son Sayf al-Arab and three of Qaddafi’s grandchildren were killed in a NATO air strike in April. In June the ICC issued arrest warrants for Qaddafi, his son Sayf al-Islam, and the Libyan intelligence chief, Abdullah Senussi, for ordering attacks against civilians during the uprising. Some observers expressed concern that the ICC’s proceedings against Qaddafi would discourage him from relinquishing power voluntarily. In spite of pressure from NATO attacks, rebel advances in the eastern and western regions of Libya, and the Qaddafi regime’s international isolation, Qaddafi continued to hold power in Tripoli.

After months of stalemate, the balance of power once again shifted in the rebels’ favour. In August 2011 rebel forces advanced to the outskirts of Tripoli, taking control of strategic areas, including the city of Zāwiyah, the site of one of Libya’s largest oil refineries. Rebels soon advanced into Tripoli, establishing control over some areas of the capital on August 22, 2011. As rebel fighters battled pro-Qaddafi forces for control of Tripoli, Qaddafi’s whereabouts were unknown. The next day rebel forces appeared to gain the upper hand, capturing the Bāb al-Azīziyyah compound, Qaddafi’s headquarters. Rebels raised Libya’s pre-Qaddafi flag over the compound as jubilant crowds destroyed symbols of Qaddafi. Fighting between rebels and loyalists continued in a few areas of Tripoli.

By early September, 2011 rebel forces had solidified their control of Tripoli, and the TNC began to transfer its operations to the capital. Qaddafi, effectively forced from power, remained in hiding, occasionally issuing defiant audio messages. Rebel forces focused their attention on the few remaining cities under loyalist control, attempting to use negotiations to persuade loyalist commanders to surrender peacefully and avoid a bloody ground assault. When negotiations failed, rebel troops began to push into the cities of Surt and Banī Walīd, engaging in heavy fighting with loyalists.

The TNC achieved new international legitimacy on September 15, 2011 when the UN General Assembly voted to recognize it as the representative of the Libyan people in the UN.

On October 20, 2011 Qaddafi was discovered and killed by rebel fighters in his hometown, Surt, as they fought to solidify their control of the city.

Libya facts and figures

official name: The Libyan Republic
area: 686,127 square miles (1,777,060 square km)
population (2010 est.): 6,546,000
age breakdown (2009): Under age 15, 33.0%; 15–29, 28.6%; 30–44, 21.9%; 45–59, 10.1%; 60–74, 4.7%; 75 and over, 1.7%
form of government: Interim government led by Transitional National Council
capital: Tripoli
other major cities: Banghāzī, Miṣrātah
official language: Arabic
official religion: Islam
religious affiliation (2000): Muslim, 96.1%, of which nearly all are Sunni; Orthodox Christian, 1.9%; Roman Catholic, 0.8%; other, 1.2%
unemployment rate (2004): 30%
literacy rate (2007): Total population age 15 and older, 88.1%; males, 93.0%; females, 83.1%

<http://www.britannica.com/EBchecked/topic/1766291/Libya-Revolt-of-2011>.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

****

Mullaperiyar Dam – Two States and a Water Issue

Thursday, December 29th, 2011

Ramaswamy R. Iyer

Reassure the people in Kerala on the safety of Mullaperiyar dam, and persuade the people in Tamil Nadu to accept a safe water-level behind the dam. Bring about an agreement through amicable negotiations.

This article seeks to explain the elements of the raging controversy over the Mullaperiyar dam for the information of the general reader. There are four distinct aspects to this case, and these are elucidated below.

(a) Extraordinary nature of the project: This is a project involving the eastward diversion of the waters of a west-flowing river, which has been celebrated as a gigantic feat of 19th century engineering. It was a major intervention in nature of a kind that is no longer much in favour. Was that feat of engineering necessary? Were there no other possibilities of development — less ambitious, less capital-intensive, less damaging to nature and wildlife, more local, less water-demanding — for the water-short districts in the Vaigai Basin? Such questions were probably not asked at the time. EIAs, the assessment of options, etc., are practices that came up much later. Be that as it may, the project was constructed and Periyar waters have been flowing to Tamil Nadu for over a hundred years.

(b) Sense of grievance in Kerala: Under the 1886 agreement between the former Madras Presidency and the princely State of Travancore, Travancore agreed to the diversion of Periyar waters to Madras Presidency, and to lease a piece of land (8000 acres) in its territory to Madras Presidency for building and operating the project designed for this purpose. The curious fact is that the lease was for 999 years. Whole countries and civilisations could have changed during that period! In Kerala, there is an almost universal feeling (right or wrong) that the 1886 agreement was an unfair one imposed on a reluctant Travancore by a more powerful Madras Presidency with the prestige and power of the British government behind it; and that while Madras (now Tamil Nadu) benefited substantially from the agreement, Travancore (Kerala) got little more than a negligible lease-rent for the land leased to Madras. In 1970, an increase in the lease rent was negotiated by Kerala but there was no radical revision of the totality of the agreement. In any resolution of the Mullaperiyar issue, some assuaging of Kerala’s longstanding grievance will have to be an element.

(c) The dam safety question and the people’s fears: Prima facie, dam safety does not seem a suitable subject for judicial determination. One wishes that the Supreme Court had told the two State governments to resolve the issue by amicable discussions, or to seek the intervention of the Central government. Alternatively, the Supreme Court could have directed the Inter-State Council, a constitutional body, to intervene and bring about an amicable settlement. Instead the learned judges decided to deal with the matter themselves, and appointed an Empowered Committee to examine and report on it. The Empowered Committee includes eminent experts but their opinion, even if the Supreme Court accepts it, may not necessarily be the final word on the subject, particularly if a different opinion is given by other equally distinguished experts outside. Under the circumstances, the sensible course would be for the two State governments, perhaps with the assistance of a joint committee of experts, to reach a reasonable agreement on the subject.

However, no expert can give an absolute guarantee of safety. The dam in this case is 116 years old, and even with all the strengthening measures, one can hardly be wholly confident about its safety under all circumstances. The recent tremors in the area might have been minor but no one can guarantee that a stronger earthquake will not occur, or that if it does the dam will withstand it; or that if there is an exceptionally heavy flood the dam will be safe. These are extreme and perhaps improbable situations but the point is that there can be no absolute unqualified guarantee of safety under all circumstances. That is true of all dams, and particularly so of ageing dams and of dams in seismically active areas.

Moreover, what the experts say may not allay the fears of the people downstream of the dam. To some extent those fears might have been accentuated by the statements of political leaders but they cannot be lightly dismissed as imaginary or paranoid. The people living in the shadow of the dam need to be reassured.

The remote contingency of a risk actually materialising may be acceptable in many cases, but unacceptable in a few. It seems to this writer that the risk in this case falls into the category of ‘unacceptable’.

Having regard to all this, it seems clear that this is a fit case for the application of the Precautionary Principle. This means that the authorities concerned must refrain from putting undue strain on the dam.

A further point is that with strengthening measures, the 116-year-old dam can perhaps be kept going for some more years but it must be presumed to be nearing the end of its useful life. Contingency plans must be prepared for the eventual phasing out of the dam. These must include alternative means of supporting economic activity and prosperity in the project-dependent areas in Tamil Nadu.

The Kerala government wants to replace the old dam by a new dam to be constructed 300 metres downstream. It is not clear that this will enable the continuance of flows to Tamil Nadu. In any case, the old dam itself was a horrendous intervention in nature, but it exists and we have to live with it; but there is no reason why the hubristic engineering of more than a century ago must now be repeated. If Kerala’s objective is to escape from what it considers an unfair agreement, the proper course is to re-negotiate the old agreement, and not build a new dam.

(d) The concerns of people in Tamil Nadu: Whatever views one might hold on the nature of the project, the fact is that the people in the water-short Vaigai Basin areas in Tamil Nadu have been recipients of Periyar waters for over a hundred years, and must be presumed to have acquired some kind of a right of established use. The dispute regarding the safety of the dam has created a sense of uncertainty — in fact an acute anxiety — in the areas concerned in Tamil Nadu about continued flows. Thus, there are two vulnerabilities in this case: the life-security concerns of people in Kerala and the livelihood-security concerns of the people of Tamil Nadu. Both need to be addressed.

Pleas to all

Having regard to the foregoing analysis, this writer respectfully makes the following pleas to all:

To the two State governments or to the one concerned:

  • tone down the rhetoric; don’t take extreme, non-negotiable positions;
  • don’t build a new dam;
  • strengthen the existing dam and operate it safely at a mutually agreed water-level; implement whatever safety measures the experts recommend;
  • negotiate changes in the old agreement to remove the continuing sense of unfairness;
  • reassure the people in Kerala on safety, and persuade the people in Tamil Nadu to accept a safe water-level behind the dam; bring about an agreement on this through amicable negotiations with the assistance of NGOs, eminent persons, etc;
  • recognise that even with strengthening, the 116-year-old dam will not last forever, and plan for its gradual phasing out over a period of time; explore alternative ways of meeting the legitimate water needs of the affected population; minimise their dependence on waters from the Mullaperiyar dam through better water management, changes in cropping patterns, changes to forms of development that need less water, etc. (The Centre should assist Tamil Nadu in such adaptation efforts.)
  • To the people in both States:
  • don’t demonise each other;
  • recognise each other’s vulnerabilities;
  • remember that the history has been one of inter-State cooperation and harmony; don’t endanger that spirit.
  • To intellectuals, eminent persons, NGOs, the media, etc, in both States:
  • educate public opinion;
  • bring the people together; promote understanding and harmony; defuse the current tension.

Courtesy: The Hindu

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

Egypt Uprising of 2011

Thursday, December 29th, 2011

Beginning in December 2010, unprecedented mass demonstrations against poverty, corruption, and political repression broke out in several Arab countries, challenging the authority of some of the most entrenched regimes in the Middle East and North Africa. Such was the case in Egypt, where in 2011 a popular uprising forced one of the region’s longest-serving and most influential leaders, Pres. Ḥosnī Mubārak, from power.

The first demonstrations occurred in Tunisia in December 2010, triggered by the self-immolation of a young man frustrated by Tunisia’s high unemployment rate and rampant police corruption. Rallies calling for Pres. Zine al-Abidine Ben Ali to step down spread throughout the country, with police often resorting to violence to control the crowds. As clashes between police and protesters escalated, Ben Ali announced a series of economic and political reforms in an unsuccessful attempt to end the unrest. Demonstrations continued, forcing Ben Ali to flee the country. The apparent success of the popular uprising in Tunisia, by then dubbed the Jasmine Revolution, inspired similar movements in other countries, including Egypt, Yemen, and Libya.

In Egypt, demonstrations organized by youth groups, largely independent of Egypt’s established opposition parties, took hold in the capital and in cities around the country. Protesters called for Mubārak to step down immediately, clearing the way for free elections and democracy. As the demonstrations gathered strength, the Mubārak regime resorted to increasingly violent tactics against protesters, resulting in hundreds of injuries and deaths. Mubārak’s attempts to placate the protesters with concessions, including a pledge to step down at the end of his term in 2011 and naming Omar Suleiman as vice president—the first person to serve as such in Mubārak’s nearly three-decade presidency—did little to quell the unrest. After almost three weeks of mass protests in Egypt, Mubārak stepped down as president, leaving the Egyptian military in control of the country.

Although protesters in Egypt focused most of their anger on domestic issues such as poverty and government oppression, many observers noted that political change in Egypt could impact the country’s foreign affairs, affecting long-standing policies. Central elements of Egypt’s foreign policy under Mubārak and his predecessor as president, Anwar el-Sādāt, such as Egypt’s political-military alignment with the United States and the 1979 Egypt-Israel peace treaty, embraced by Egypt’s leaders but unpopular with the Egyptian public, could be weakened or rejected under a new regime.

Egypt facts and figures

official name: Arab Republic of Egypt
area: 386,874 square miles (1,002,000 sq km)
population (2010 est.): 84,474,000
age breakdown (2009): Under 15, 31.7%; 15–29, 31.3%; 30–44, 18.5%; 45–59, 12.4%; 60–74, 5.1%; 75 and over, 1%
form of government: Republic with two legislative houses
capital: Cairo
other major cities: Alexandria, Al-Jīzah, Shubrā al-Khaymah, Port Said, Suez
official language: Arabic
official religion: Islam
religious affiliation (2000): Muslim, 84.4%, of which nearly all are Sunni; Christian, 15.1%, of which Orthodox are 13.6%, Protestant 0.8%, Roman Catholic 0.3%, nonreligious 0.5%
unemployment rate (april 2009–march 2010): 9.3%
literacy rate (2007): Total population age 15 and older, 72%; males 83.6% and females 60.7%

Key events in Egypt: 1952 to 2011

1952

Angered by the continuing domination ofEgyptian affairs by former colonial ruler Great Britain and by economic inequalities in Egypt, group ofjunior Egyptian military officers calling themselves the Free Officers stages a coup, forcing King Farouk into exile. Following the coup, Egyptis governed by the Revolutionary Command Council, a newly formed executive body led by a figurehead president, Gen. Muḥammad Naguib. The RCC institutes popular reforms including a land reform law that redistributes land held by Egypt’s elite.

1954

Gamal Abdel Nasser, a leader of the Free Officers, prevails in a power struggle with Naguib and becomes head of Egypt’s military government.

1955

Egypt, eager to modernize its military, purchases Soviet weaponry through Czechoslovakia. The arms deal undermines efforts by Britain and the United States to limit Soviet influence in the Middle East.

1956

The United States, Britain, and the World Bank withdraw support for the construction of the Aswan High Dam, the centerpiece of Nasser’s economic development program. In response, Nasser nationalizes the Suez Canal, previously controlled by British and French interests. Britain, France, and Israel launch an invasion to reestablish control over the Canal Zone but are forced by the United States and the Soviet Union to withdraw. Following nationalization of the Suez Canal, a number of foreign-owned companies in Egypt are nationalized.

1958

The Soviet Union agrees to provide funding and technical assistance for the construction of the Aswan High Dam, ushering in a period of close Egyptian-Soviet cooperation.

1961

A set of decrees issued by Nasser initiates a wave of nationalizations in Egypt that brings most of Egypt’s manufacturing, banking, and service companies into the public sector, causing a massive expansion of the state bureaucracy.

1962

Nasser guarantees all Egyptian university graduates jobs in government service. The ensuing boom in university enrollment means that most graduates are placed in low-paying bureaucratic positions with little chance of advancement, a long-standing source of economic frustration in Egypt.

1967

The June War begins when Israel reacts to an apparent Arab mobilization with preemptive air strikes against Syria, Jordan, and Egypt. Israel quickly wins a decisive victory in the subsequent ground fighting, gaining control of the Sinai Peninsula along with the West Bank and the Golan Heights. The defeat, a national humiliation for Egypt, damages the credibility of the Nasser regime and increases Egypt’s dependence on Soviet military aid.

1970

Nasser dies of a heart attack and is succeeded as president by another member of the Free Officers, Anwar el-Sādāt.

1973

Egypt begins the October War by launching an attack across the Suez Canal in an attempt to establish leverage with Israel by demonstrating military force. The Egyptian attack is coordinated with a Syrian attack on the Golan Heights. The conflict draws in the Soviet Union and the United States, resupplying Egypt and Israel, respectively. The initial Egyptian offensive is a surprising success, but Israel stages a counterattack, and regains the upper hand. Fighting ends with a cease-fire brokered by the United States and the Soviet Union.

1974

Sādāt’s program of economic liberalization, meant to attract foreign investment, is officially announced. Known as infitah (Arabic: “opening”), the effort is hampered by Egypt’s complicated bureaucracy, which makes doing business in Egypt difficult.

1977

A reduction in state subsidies for some basic food products sparks demonstrations throughout Egypt, and Sādāt is forced to reinstate subsidies. Seeing the ongoing Egypt-Israel confrontation as a major contributor to Egypt’s economic difficulties, Sādāt begins to pursue peace with Israel, traveling to Jerusalem to address the Knesset in November.

1978

Israel and Egypt sign the Camp David Accords, leading to a peace treaty between the two countries the following year. Peace with Israel reshapes Egyptian foreign policy, strengthening Egypt’s ties to the United States while isolating Egypt from other Arab countries. Following the agreement, Israel withdraws from the Sinai Peninsula, and Egypt receives increased amounts of economic and military aid from the United States.

1981

While reviewing a military parade, Sādāt is assassinated by attackers with links to an Islamic militant group. Hosni Mabarak, the vice president, succeeds Sādāt. Upon becoming president, Mubārak renews Egypt’s state of emergency, instituted in 1967 and lifted by Sādāt in 1980, restricting political expression while expanding police powers and media censorship. The state of emergency remains in effect for the rest of Mubārak’s presidency.

1992

Egyptian security forces clash with Islamic militants in Egypt. An Islamic insurgency in Egypt continues through much of the 1990s.

1997

Seeking to destabilize the regime by targeting the tourism industry, a major source of revenue, militants kill dozens of tourists in Luxor.

2004

The Egyptian pro-reform organization Kifaya (Arabic: “Enough”) forms. The group decries Mubārak’s seemingly unshakable hold on the presidency, holding rallies to call for free multicandidate presidential elections.

2005

After being elected president in single-candidate referendums in 1987, 1993, and 1999, Mubārak faces challengers in a presidential election for the first time. However, the most popular opposition group in Egypt, the banned Muslim Brotherhood, is barred from entering a candidate. Mubārak wins an overwhelming victory. The runner-up, Ayman Nour, is imprisoned on charges of fraud.

2010

After independent candidates associated with the banned Muslim Brotherhood performed well in legislative elections in 2005, becoming the largest opposition contingent in the People’s Assembly, the ruling National Democratic Party (NDP) wins overwhelmingly in 2010 elections, virtually eliminating the opposition from the People’s Assembly. Opposition parties called for the results of the election to be annulled, claiming widespread vote rigging.

2011

Antigovernment protests erupt in Egypt after a popular uprising in Tunisia forces the Tunisian president, Zine al-Abidine Ben Ali, from power.

Upheaval in Egypt, 2011

Jan. 17, 2011

An Egyptian man sets fire to himself outside the parliament building in Cairo to protest government repression. Several more Egyptians stage similar protests in apparent emulation of Mohammed Bouazizi’s suicide protest in Tunisia.

Jan. 25, 2011

Thousands gather in Cairo and several other Egyptian cities to demonstrate against poverty and political repression. Protesters chanting anti-Mubārak slogans clash with police, who use water cannons and tear gas against the crowds.

Jan. 27, 2011

As clashes continue, Mohamed ElBaradei, former head of the International Atomic Energy Agency and a prominent critic of the Mubārak regime, arrives in Cairo to participate in demonstrations.

Jan. 28, 2011

Antigovernment protests in Egypt intensify when demonstrators clash with police following Friday prayers. Internet and telephone service are disrupted in Egypt in an effort to limit the extent of demonstrations. President Mubārak imposes a curfew and deploys army units in an attempt to control unrest. The national headquarters of the NDP is burned in Cairo. As violence continues into the night, Mubārak appears on state television announcing the dismissal of his government.

Jan. 29, 2011

For the first time in nearly three decades as president of Egypt, Mubārak appoints a vice president, selecting one of his closest advisers, Omar Suleiman, the director of the Egyptian General Intelligence Service. Thousands of protesters remain camped out in Tahrir Square, at the centre of downtown Cairo, clashing sporadically with police.

Feb. 1, 2011

In a televised speech, Mubārak announces that he will not stand for reelection at the end of his term in September 2011.

Feb. 2, 2011

Violence intensifies as antigovernment protesters clash with crowds of Mubārak supporters in Tahrir Square in Cairo. It is widely believed that the groups of Mubārak supporters are plainclothes security officers and members of the NDP waging a coordinated effort to use violence to disperse the protests.

Feb. 6, 2011

The Egyptian government holds talks with members of the opposition. The banned Muslim Brotherhood participates.

Feb. 10, 2011

Amid widespread media reports that Mubārak is preparing to announce his resignation in a televised statement, he instead delivers a defiant address, reaffirming that he intends to remain in power until the end of his term in September.

Feb. 11, 2011

As protests continue, Mubārak leaves Cairo for Sharm al-Shaykh, a resort town on the Sinai Peninsula where he maintains a residence. Hours later Suleiman appears on state television to announce that Mubārak has stepped down as president, leaving the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces, a council of high-ranking military officers headed by the minister of defense, Mohamed Hussein Tantawi, in control.

Feb. 12, 2011

The Supreme Council of the Armed Forces issues a statement saying that the military will hand power to an elected civilian government. A spokesman also states that Egypt will continue to abide by international treaties, implying that the 1979 peace treaty with Israel will not be challenged.

Feb. 13, 2011

The Supreme Council of the Armed Forces suspends the constitution and dissolves Egypt’s two legislative bodies, the People’s Assembly and the Consultative Assembly. A statement by the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces says a commission will be set up to draft a new constitution, to be approved by a referendum, and that the military will remain in power for six months or until new elections can be held.

Feb. 22, 2011

The Supreme Council of the Armed Forces swears in an interim cabinet that includes members of the opposition. However, several key posts are still filled by Mubārak appointees. Demonstrators hold fresh protests calling for the replacement of the remaining Mubārak-era ministers.

March 3, 2011

Prime Minister Ahmed Shafiq, a Mubārak appointee, resigns. He is replaced by Essam Sharaf, a critic of the Mubārak regime.

March 7, 2011

A new interim cabinet, led by Sharaf, is sworn in. The cabinet does not include officials who were close allies of Mubārak.

March 15, 2011

The State Security Investigations (SSI) agency, Egypt’s internal security service, is officially dissolved. The interior ministry announces that the agency, infamous for its operations against political dissidents and its regular use of torture, will be replaced by a new security service that will not violate Egyptians’ rights.

March 19, 2011

Egyptians approve a referendum drafted by the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces proposing constitutional changes to make elections more open, impose term limits for the president, and restrict the use of emergency laws. Although the main youth protest movements oppose the referendum, calling instead for a new constitution to be drafted before elections are held, it is approved with 77 percent of the vote.

March 30, 2011

The Supreme Council of the Armed Forces issues a constitutional declaration intended to serve as an interim constitution in place of the one suspended on February 13. The document outlines the transition to an elected government and the procedure for drafting a new constitution. It incorporates selections from the prior constitution as well as the amendments that were approved by referendum on March 19. However, the constitutional declaration comes amid procedural confusion: prior to the March 19 referendum, it had been widely understood that in the case of a “yes” vote, the suspended constitution would be amended and reinstated.

April 9, 2011

The Egyptian army uses force to clear protesters from Tahrir Square, killing two and injuring dozens. The protesters are calling for the government to investigate the finances of Mubārak and his sons, who are widely suspected of amassing large fortunes concealed in foreign bank accounts during Mubārak’s presidency.

April 13, 2011

Egypt’s public prosecutor orders the detention of Mubārak and his sons Alaa and Gamal for 15 days for questioning. Alaa and Gamal are transported from Sharm al-Shaykh to prison in Cairo. Ḥosnī Mubārak, hospitalized in Sharm al-Shaykh after suffering an apparent heart attack, is placed under formal detention.

April 16, 2011

An Egyptian court dissolves the NDP. The dissolution is seen as a concession to protesters, who remain concerned that elements of the Mubārak government still wield too much power.

April 19, 2011

An Egyptian fact-finding commission charged with investigating clashes between protesters and police during the uprising announces its estimate that 846 people were killed and 6,400 were injured between January 25 and February 11. The commission finds that most of the fatalities were caused by the security services’ deliberate use of lethal force. An earlier official estimate, made by members of the Mubārak government, had put the death toll at 365.

May 4, 2011

A Palestinian reconciliation agreement brokered by Egypt is signed by Hamas and Fatah in Cairo. The interim government’s successful mediation between the two factions suggests that Egypt no longer adheres to Mubārak’s policy of isolating Ḥamās.

May 5, 2011

Egypt’s former minister of the interior, Habib al-Adly, is sentenced to 12 years in prison for financial corruption. Adly, the first Mubārak-era official to be convicted and sentenced since Mubārak left power, still awaits trial for allegedly having ordered security forces to fire on protesters.

May 24, 2011

Egypt’s public prosecutor announces that Mubārak and his sons, Alaa and Gamal, will stand trial for ordering security forces to kill protesters. They also face charges related to corruption and abuse of power.

May 25, 2011

Egypt’s interim foreign minister announces the reopening of the Rafaḥ border crossing between Egypt and Gaza; the crossing had been closed since Ḥamās took control of Gaza in 2007. Under Mubārak, Egypt’s cooperation with Israel in enforcing a blockade against Gaza was highly unpopular with the Egyptian public.

June 1, 2011

Trials for Mubārak and his sons are scheduled for August 3 in a Cairo criminal court. They will be tried for corruption and for ordering violence against protesters.

June 29, 2011

New clashes break out in Cairo between police and protesters who accuse the interim government of continuing many of the authoritarian practices of the Mubārak regime.

July 4, 2011

Seven police officers charged with killing protesters in Suez during the uprising are released from prison on bail. The decision to release the officers angers many protesters, who accuse the interim government of> using delaying tactics to avoid holding former officials and police officers accountable. Clashes break out in Cairo and Suez.

July 5, 2011

Three former government ministers are acquitted on charges of corruption, further stoking popular anger.

July 8, 2011

Tens of thousands of protesters rally in Tahrir Square to demand that the interim government accelerate the pace of reforms.

July 12, 2011

As protests continue, the spokesman for the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces appears on television to deliver a strongly worded statement warning protesters that all necessary measures will be taken to prevent protesters and rioters from disrupting public order or undermining the authority of the government.

July 13, 2011

The interim government announces that nearly 700 senior police officers are being fired over the killing of protesters during the 

July 21, 2011

A new cabinet is sworn in, completing a cabinet reshuffle promised by Prime Minister Sharaf to placate protesters. New ministers are appointed to more than half of the cabinet posts, but the ministers of justice and the interior, two of the main targets of the protesters’ anger, are retained.

July 28, 2011

The interim government announces that Mubārak is healthy enough to stand trial in Cairo in August. For several months, reports indicated that Mubārak was in poor health, driving rumours among protesters that his trial was likely to be canceled or postponed.

August 3, 2011

Mubārak appears in public for the first time as his trial commences in Cairo amid heavy security. After being wheeled into court in a hospital bed, Mubārak denies all charges against him. The televised proceedings sometimes descend into chaos, partly because of the large number of lawyers in court representing the families of slain protesters.

August 15, 2011

Mubārak appears in court again for the second session of his trial. The presiding judge, Ahmed Rifaat, institutes new procedures to rein in disorder in the courtroom and issues a ban on television cameras at future trial sessions, disappointing some protesters.

August 18, 2011

Gunmen attack an Israeli bus traveling in Israel near the Egyptian border, killing eight people. Five Egyptian police officers are then killed by Israeli forces pursuing the gunmen, provoking public outrage in Egypt. Israeli officials attribute the bus attack to Palestinian gunmen who they allege were able to enter Israeli territory through Egypt due to Egypt’s weak security in the Sinai Peninsula.

August 20, 2011

Tension between Egypt and Israel intensifies as Egypt threatens to withdraw its ambassador to Israel and protests are held at the Israeli Embassy in Egypt. The crisis later appears defused when Israel issues a statement of regret for the Egyptians’ deaths and then promises an investigation. However, the diplomatic stand off caused by the attack at the border is seen by many as a sign of worsening relations between Israel and Egypt in the post-Mubārak era.

September 7, 2011

Field Marshal Mohamed Tantawi, the head of the Supreme Council of the Armed Forces and former minister of defense under Mubārak, is called to testify in a closed session of Mubārak’s trial. Mubārak’s former vice president and chief of intelligence, Omar Suleiman, is also called to testify.

September 9, 2011

As popular anger toward Israel builds in Egypt, protesters break into the Israeli embassy in Cairo. Six members of the embassy staff, trapped inside the building, are rescued by Egyptian commandos, and most of Israel’s diplomatic personnel are evacuated from the country. The incident brings swift condemnation from Israeli Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu, who warns that it imperils Israeli-Egyptian relations.

September 27, 2011

The interim government announces that elections for the People’s Assembly will be held on November 28.

October 9, 2011

Thousands of Coptic Christians gather in Cairo to protest the burning of a church in Upper Egypt and what they see as the security forces’ failure to protect Copts. In the worst episode of violence since Mubārak’s departure, 26 people are killed in clashes with security forces.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

Russian Elections 2011 and its aftermath

Wednesday, December 28th, 2011

C. Bhargavi



Description of Russian government structure:

Chief of State: President Dmitry Anatolyevich MEDVEDEV

Head of Government: Premier Vladimir Vladimirovich PUTIN

Assembly: Russia has a bicameral Federal Assembly (Federalnoye Sobraniye) consisting of the Federation Council (Sovet Federatsii) with 178 seats and the State Duma (Gosudarstvennaya Duma) with 450 seats.

Description of Russian electoral system:

The President is elected by absolute majority vote through a two-round system to serve a 6-year term.

The Premier is appointed by the president.

In the Federation Council (Sovet Federatsii) 178 members are appointed by regional governing councils to serve 4-year terms*. In the State Duma (Gosudarstvennaya Duma) 450 members are elected through a closed-list proportional representation system to serve 4-year terms.**

* There are 89 constituencies with a district magnitude of two.

** Seats are allocated using the Hare quota. There is one, nationwide district and a minimum threshold of 7%.

Russian Legislative elections, 2011

Legislative elections were held in Russia on 4 December 2011. At stake were the 450 seats in the State Duma, the lower house of the Federal Assembly of Russia (the legislature). United Russia won the elections with 49.32% of the vote, taking 238 seats or 52.88% of the Duma seats.

This result was down from 64.30% of the vote and 70% of the seats in the 2007 elections. The Communist Party of the Russian Federation received 19.19% of the vote and 92 seats, while A Just Russia received 13.24% and 64 seats, with the Liberal Democratic Party of Russiagetting 56 seats with 11.67% of the vote. Other parties did not cross the 7% election threshold. The list of parties represented in the parliament did not change.

United Russia lost the two-thirds constitutional majority it had held prior to the election, but it still won an absolute majority of seats in the Duma, even though it had less than 50% of the popular vote. The Communist Party, Liberal Democratic Party and A Just Russia all gained new seats compared to the previous 2007 elections.

Electoral irregularities and assessment

During and after the election international media and local independent websites reported serious irregularities during the election, including ballot stuffing, misuse of state resources, media bias and lack of impartiality by the election commission. The Russian state-owned news agency RIA Novosti reported more than 1,100 official complaints filed of election irregularities across the country, including vote fraud, obstruction of observers and illegal campaigning.

Reports by participating parties

Members of the A Just Russia, Yabloko and Communist parties reported that certain voters were shuttled between polling stations, casting several ballots. The Yabloko and Liberal Democratic parties reported that some of their observers had been banned from witnessing the sealing of the ballot boxes and from gathering video footage, and others groundlessly expelled from polling stations. The ruling United Russia party alleged that opposition parties broke campaign law by distributing leaflets and newspapers at polling stations, and that at some polling stations the voters were ordered to vote for the Communist party with threats of violence.

Reports by independent groups and observers

At a number of polling stations throughout the country, observers reported that final results published by the Central Election Commission differed drastically from results recorded by observers, with the “official” numbers sometimes showing the United Russia vote inflated by a factor of two or three.

In Moscow, the opposition activist group Citizen Observer estimated that United Russia had stolen 17% of the popular vote from other parties.

In Saint Petersburg, independent activist group Right to Elect (”Право выбора”) attempted to register all differences between observers’ protocols and the data of the Central Election Commission. They found that comparable shares of differences in votes were in favour not only of the United Russia, but of CPRF and LDPR parties as well (2.68%, 1.49% and 2.67% respectively as of the data on 13th December).

Reports by international observers

International observers from the Organization for Security and Co-operation in Europe (OSCE) documented numerous violations of electoral law They found that whilst the preparations for the elections were technically well administered, they were marked by a “convergence of the State and the governing party” They said they witnessed “undue interference of state authorities”, “partiality of most media” and “lack of independence of the election administration”. Denying registration to some political parties narrowed political competition, according to the OSCE The OCSE concluded that “This…did not provide the necessary conditions for fair electoral competition.” However, international observers from the Commonwealth of Independent States reported that the elections “were held legally and without serious violations.”

Official reaction to the reports on irregularities

According to Vladimir Putin’s Press Secretary, Dmitry Peskov, the known accumulated volume of all reports on falsifications affects no more than 0.5% of total votes, and so this could not be a basis to reconsider the results of the elections

Russia’s President Dmitry Medvedev called for an investigation of all reports on irregularities, but voiced his disagreement with slogans and calls by the protesters on the post-election meetings.

Yury Chaika, the Prosecutor General of Russia, said that the data on falsifications will be analyzed, but said also that violations were local and didn’t affect the overall result, and that therefore there is no reason to cancel the results of the elections.

Vote rigging?

Opinion polling

Opinion polls United Russia Communist Party Liberal Democratic
Party
A Just Russia Yabloko Patriots of
Russia
Right Cause
VCIOM
November 2010
62.9% 11.9% 6.9% 8.9% 3.9% 2.8% 2.6%
Levada
January 2011
57% 20% 9% 6% <1% <1% <1%
Levada
February 2011
60% 16% 11% 4% 1% <1% <1%
Levada
March 2011
57% 18% 10% 7% 1% <1% <1%
Levada
April 2011
55% 18% 12% 6% 2% <1% <1%
VCIOM
April 2011
58.7% 13.6% 9.1% 9.8% 2.7% 1.8% 2.9%
Levada
May 2011
57% 17% 14% 4% 1% <1% <1%
Levada
June 2011
53% 17% 13% 5% 1% 1% 2%
VCIOM
June 2011
58.3% 14.7% 9.8% 7.3% 2.8% 1.9% 4.1%
Levada
July 2011
54% 18% 12% 7% 2% <1% 2%
Levada
August 2011
54% 18% 13% 6% 1% 1% 3%
VCIOM
August 2011
55.0% 16.4% 10.8% 7.1% 2.5% 2.1% 4.9%
Levada
September 2011
57% 16% 12% 6% 3% 1% 2%
Levada]
30 September–
2 October 2011
59% 18% 9% 7% 1% 1% 2%
VCIOM
October 2011
53.8% 17.1% 11.3% 7.9% 3.3% 2.0% 2.1%
Levada
21–24 October 2011
60% 17% 11% 5% 2% <1% 1%
Levada
28 October–
1 November 2011
51% 20% 14% 7% 4% <1% 1%
VCIOM
7 November 2011
53.3% 17.4% 12% 8.3% 3.3% 1.8% 2.2%
Levada
11 November 2011
53% 20% 12% 9% 1% <1% 1%
VCIOM
19–20 November 2011
53.7% 16.7% 11.6% 10% 2.9% 1.6% 1.7%

In the run-up to the election, opposition activists were rounded up by police or detained in Moscow.1 During the elections a wide array of traditional manipulations were used such as ballot box stuffing or pressure on civil servants to vote. Similar to former elections, regional leaders were ordered to return high votes in favor of the incumbent ruling party.2 Thus, Soviet-like high figures were registered in the North Caucasus republics, with a special mention for Chechnya, where allegedly 99.48% of voters backed United Russia, with a turnout of 99.51%, while United Russia support in Dagestan, Ingushetia or Kabardino-Balkaria reached a record high of 90%-91%. These results can be explained – to a great extent – by a system based on authority. North Caucasian leaders rule these republics like their private fiefdoms, especially in Chechnya, where Ramzan Kadyrov has ruled with an iron fist since 2007.

A more modern way to silence the opposition was also employed: cyber attacks on liberal media websites (Kommersant daily, LiveJournal blogs) and on the site of the sole Russian independent election observer, Golos. In the two days following the election, between 6,000 and 15,000 people rallied in Moscow to protest the results and several hundred did the same in other regions.

According to independent rights group Agora, up to 1,000 people were arrested in the capital. In the meantime, opposition Yabloko party head Sergei Mitrokin was briefly detained. On 10 December 2011, at least 25,000 people, the biggest demonstration since 1991, gathered in the center of Moscow to denounce the election outcome. Given all these events, we can consider that Russia has entered a new cycle in its political life.

United Russia’s monopolization of power has ended, as it could not change the Constitution to please the Kremlin again. The next Duma will be more open for debate, especially in serious matters like the federal budget vote. Thus, real parliamentarianism and democracy could emerge in the country, if the three other parties play the role of constructive opponents and take an active part in decision-making. The future of United Russia will depend on its ability to compromise with the other political forces for the sake of the country. Yet, since the early 2000s this party has been used to impose its views on every matter.

Contrary to many analysts’ beliefs, the announcement by Prime Minister Vladimir Putin at United Russia Congress on 24 September 2011 of job swapping with Dmitry Medvedev, in case he returns to the Kremlin in March 2012, deeply shocked many Russians, especially among the emerging urban middle-class, the young and educated people. Those people were attracted by Medvedev’s promises of modernization and the corresponding changes in the economy, society and politics. By preventing President Medvedev from running for a second term, Putin committed a political mistake. Instead, he should have decided to leave as his historical role – the consolidation of the Russian state – has been achieved. The aftermath of Duma elections lays the ground for a more competitive presidential election, on 4 March 2012, which will be closely watched by the Russian voters, as well as by national and foreign observers.

Aftermath of Duma elections – Protests

The parliamentary elections that took place in Russia on 4 December 2011 usher in a new era for the post-Soviet political system in the country. The poor results registered by the Kremlin’s party, United Russia – amid allegations of wide- spread vote-rigging – show that its decade-long domination is over.

Tens of thousands protested December 10, 2011 in Bolotnaya Square, Moscow over allegations of election fraud in parliamentary elections won by United Russia, the ruling political party, led by current Russian Prime Minister Vladimir Putin.

The exact number of protesters present is unknown; estimates for the Moscow protest vary from twenty thousand to one hundred thousand, and rallies on a more minor scale also took place in other Russian cities—including Saint Petersburg. Voice of America(VoA) reported the demonstrations as the largest pro-democracy protests since Vladimir Putin came to power eleven years ago. Other reports describe the demonstrations as the greatest since the dissolution of the Soviet Union. Police estimated that ten thousand people were present at demonstrations in St. Petersburg. Corruption and a rejection of Putin were the most commonly-cited grievances from questioned protesters.

Opposition leader Evgenia Chirikova told VoA the protests were in favour of fresh elections, and the release of political prisoners. During the demonstrations, protesters chanted “[p]olice, part of the people” at the riot police. Echo of Moscow host Alexei Venediktov described the protesters as “the new generation, the Putin generation”. These people “voted, had their votes stolen, and now they want a fair system”, said Venediktov.

Konstantin Kosachyov, a United Russia parliamentarian, dismissed the concept of discussions with the protest organisers. “With all respect for the people who came out to protest, they are not a political party,” he stated. Student Daniil Klubov, a leader of the St. Petersburg rally, told the BBC that he does not “belong to any political movement” and is “just a student who is tired of all these lies”.

In December 2011, Russian police arrested an estimated 1,600 people after street protests. In anticipation of yesterday’s protests, fifty thousand police and riot police were drafted into Moscow. Under one hundred arrests were made across the country during the day of protest.

Television stations operated by the Russian government provided no coverage of protests in Russia from last week’s election, but lifted the blackout one week on, broadcasting images of thousands filling a Moscow park, spilling over a bridge and covering a facing embankment.

On 23.12.2011, Moscow authorities declared an obligatory test for all high school students, scheduling it for the exact time of protests on Saturday; protest leader Alexey Navalny is currently imprisoned by order of a Russian judge. And, a Russian health board warned of respiratory diseases being contracted when being in large crowds. Russian Ground Forces cautioned that they would be observing, looking for instances of draft evasion as protesters walked through metal detectors.

On 24.12.2011, Mikhail Gorbachev, who resigned as Soviet president 20 years ago, has urged Prime Minister Vladimir Putin to follow his example and step down. Gorbachev said if Putin stepped down now he would be remembered for the positive things he did during his 12 years in power

In March 2012, Putin himself will face voters, seeking a new six-year term as Russian President. VoA reported in December 2011 that his presidential bid looked likely to succeed; however, that outcome now seems less predictable.

Election Review Impossible says Putin (Source: edition.cnn.com)

Russian Prime Minister Vladimir Putin on 27.12.2011 discounted calls for a review of the disputed December 4 parliamentary elections that have sparked widespread protests and calls for reform.

“The elections to the State Duma are over,” Putin said. “All parliamentary factions have started to work. The speaker has been elected. The Duma is functioning. Any kind of revision is out of the question,” Putin said.

The only exception, he said, would be if any irregularities were found, “the court will have to look into them and adopt an objective ruling.”

Putin’s ruling United Russia Party received 49.5 percent of the vote, down from 64 percent four years ago, in an election widely viewed as marred by vote rigging and ballot-box stuffing. It kept Putin’s party in power, although in diminished form.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Tragedies across the World, 2011

Wednesday, December 28th, 2011

C. Bhargavi

Tsunami in Japan

An 8.9 magnitude earthquake struck Japan on March 11, 2011 triggering a tsunami alert along Japan’s Pacific Coast to at least 20 countries. The earthquake literally destroyed Japan. Marked a ‘Black Friday: in Japan’s history as this was the worst earthquake ever experienced.

Floods in Pakistan

The onslaught of Monsoon (June – September) rains again took Pakistan in its grip and this time it caused hundreds of casualties and over 200,000 homeless people. Badin was the center of crisis as the flood started in early months but become more severe due to continuous rainfall. The only difference between this event and last year’s tragic flood was that international aid somewhat helped the effected but in 2011 even the aid was scarce and was not provided in time which made the disaster even worse than the last years flood of 2010.

Mumbai Blasts 2011, India

Three near-simultaneous explosions rocked Mumbai on July 13, 2011, killing at least 21 people and injuring 141. The blasts occurred within minutes of each other in the areas of Opera House, Zaveri Bazaar and Dadar, all busy commercial hubs of Mumbai. There was speculation that the pattern of the blasts suggested involvement of Indian Mujahideen. According to the Special cell of the Delhi Police, Indian Mujahideen has been conducting blasts on the 13 or 26 of the month.  Speculation was also rife that the Mumbai underworld could be behind these blasts, in the light of the killing of ‘Mid Day’ Crime journalist Jyotirmoy Dey, as well as the attempted assassination of Dawood Ibrahim’s brother, Iqbal Kaskar on 3 May. 13 July is also observed as Kashmir Martyr’s day, and there could be a possibility that the attacks were carried out by Kashmiri groups. There is also a view that the attacks could have been plotted by those trying to derail the Indo-Pakistani peace process.

Hurricane Irene, U.S.A

The first hurricane of the 2011 Atlantic season left 44 dead and losses of $ 7 billion. It was the first seriously threatened the coast of the United States in three years. President Barack Obama canceled his schedule and declared an emergency. A New York City, where people feared a disaster movie with torrents of water slipping between the skyscrapers, Irene finally failed.

The hurricane passed near the Virgin Islands on August 21 and continued their advance through the Atlantic Ocean. Landfall in Puerto Rico resulted unleashing strong winds and left 800 000 people without power. There he acquired hurricane strength, and August 24, after lashing the southeastern Bahamas, became the first major hurricane (Category 3) of the season. Again touched land in North Carolina on the morning of August 27.

Terrorists Attack Delhi High Court, India

It was a dark Wednesday for Delhi on September 7, 2011 when a powerful bomb exploded outside Delhi high court. At least 13 people were killed and more than 70 hurt . The families of the victims were left with an irreparable loss. The terror attack, from a sophisticated explosive device, had a precursor less than four months ago – on May 25 , 2011- when a low-intensity bomb went off in the same area, though outside a different gate. Questions have been raised in police circles whether that blast was an attempt to gauge the area’s preparedness to ward off terror as well as its vulnerability. The people who had come to the High court for justice became victims of terror.

Sikkim Earthquake, India

The earthquake measuring 6.8 on Richter scale jolted Sikkim and Nepal  on September 18, 2011, leaving scores dead and hurt. The effects of the quake were felt across northeastern India, Nepal, Bhutan, Bangladesh and southern Tibet. This quake has once again raised questions on the safety aspect of multi-storeyed buildings. The quake came just a few days after an earthquake of 4.2 magnitude hit Haryana’s Sonipat district, sending tremors in New Delhi. The earthquake was the fourth significant earthquake in India of September 2011.

Earthquake in Turkey

The Van earthquake was a destructive earthquake measuring 7.2 on the Richter Scale that struck eastern Turkey near the city of Van on Sunday, 23 October 201. It occurred at a shallow depth of 20 kilometres (12 mi), causing heavy shaking across much of eastern Turkey and lighter tremors across neighboring parts of the South Caucasus and Levant. According to Disasters and Emergency Situations Directorate of Turkey, on October 30 2011, the earthquake killed 604 and injured are 4,152. At least 11,232 buildings sustained damage in the region, 6,017 of which were found to be uninhabitable. The uninhabitable homes left as much as 8,321 households with an average household population of around 7.6 homeless in the province; this could mean that at least around 60,000 people were left homeless. The other 5,215 have been damaged but are habitable.

Naxal Attacks, India

Over 500 people including 124 security personnel were killed in 1,476 attacks carried out by Naxals in various states affected by Left wing extremism till November, 2011. During May 2011, Naxalites killed and dismembered ten policemen, including one senior officer in the Gariyaband, Chhattisgarh area on the border with Orissa. In June 2011, the total fatalities of both the police and the paramilitary were 43. On 21 July 2011, Maoist rebels in the central Indian state of Chhattisgarh blew up a bridge, killing four people and wounding five others. The attack happened when the Congress Party Chief of the State, Nandkumar Patel, was returning from a party function.

Kolkata Hospital Fire, India

The worst fire tragedy in any hospital in India occurred on December 8, 2011 at AMRI Hospital in Kolkata. At least 91 people died due to suffocation. This was the second fire tragedy at the AMRI Hospital after 2008. The incident once again raised questions on public safety. Six members of the hospital board, including leading industrialist S K Modi, were arrested on charges of culpable homicide and negligence, Chief Minister Mamata Banerjee, who visited the hospital, announced to the Media on December 10, 2011.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

Occupy Wall Street – the root cause and present scenario

Wednesday, December 28th, 2011

The notion of a privileged 1% has been kicking around for a while. About 1% of the population owns 40% of global wealth. To put it another way, if the 48 poorest nations pooled their resources, they’d still own less than the three richest guys in the world.

Those numbers date back to 2000 — before toxic mortgages, Wall Street implosion, country bankruptcies, and aggrieved Greeks throwing yogurt over austerity programs. In America, the latest census reported that the top 20% had nearly half of all U.S. income. The bottom 20%’s take was about 3.4% — the biggest gap to date and almost double the gap from 1968, when President Lyndon Johnson declared war on poverty.Outrageous bonuses and parachute packages paid to executives of bailed-out or fallen companies have enhanced the sense of imbalance.
Adbusters goes gangbusters

Those calculations riled up Adbusters, a Canadian-based nonprofit magazine. When Tunisia erupted, inspired staffers thought now was good a time as any for America to Occupy Wall Street. One editor explained the concept as combining “the tactic of the Egyptian uprising” and the Spanish intifada, with general assemblies in which people vote “using consensus-based decision making.”

If there’s anything (former) ad people know, it’s how to make a poster, pick a slogan, and publicize it. Adbusters came up with a ballerina dancing atop the Wall Street bull, “We are the 99%,” and all forms of social media to monitor and coordinate developments.

Facing the bull

Protesters took to the streets — including Wall Street — and went online almost immediately. “Occupy Wall Street” buzzed in searches September 16, the day before the first protest, with searchers ages 13 and up, from coast (New York) to coast (Oregon). Some supporters fretted about the lack of media coverage, and some journalists thought the movement’s leaderless concept backfired.

Then again, that was what social networking, alternate media, and live-streaming were all about. Does a viral movement need mainstream buy-in? Through Occupy, would a digital generation show a new way of getting things done? In the 1960s, the antiwar protester chant was, “The whole world is watching.” In 2011, protesters spread their own message and captured their own video. They were occupying two spaces: a physical one and the digital sphere.
Turning point

Coverage came soon enough, as encampments — some functioning as mini villages — spread to more than 65 cities. Occupiers were sometimes characterized as socialists or drum-circle hippies, but the wide-ranging involvement of celebrities, moms, college students, military veterans, and retired police chiefs made the movement difficult to pigeonhole. This diversity would also later make for compromising video footage or tweets, such as the pepper spray incidents involving an 84-year-old woman and UC Davis students.

One California city’s attempt to evict campers turned Occupy Oakland’s ire upon the government. The police shot tear gas canisters and fractured an Iraqi vet’s skull. He recovered and gained instant folk-hero status. A quickly organized general strike and mass day of action brought in thousands of peaceful marchers by day, as well as a handful of masked, so-called anarchists by night. Searchers posed the question, “Why Occupy Oakland?” Whatever the reason, the San Francisco Bay Area city served as the movement’s first really raucous confrontation. Later crackdowns on college campuses and Zuccotti Park spurred media coverage, support, and a pepper spray controversy.

Would you like tea or occupation?

Occupy’s quick rise sparked comparisons with the tea party. The movements shared surface similarities: a gathering of disenfranchised citizens inspired by a media campaign (Adbusters vs. Rick Santenelli of CNBC), coming together to express frustration against institutions — both without a clear platform.
Of course, the differences run deep (and the tea party was adamant in making distinctions clear). One distinction was Occupy’s online appeal: Comparisons between the first weeks of each movement reveal Occupy Wall Street garnered more searches than the tea party in all but the first week.

Time for a plan

Two months into the movement, questions on “what is Occupy Wall Street” and “Occupy Wall Street demands” surged. With winter approaching, it was the Adbusters editors who suggested a drawdown date: December 17, the three-month anniversary.

Some encampments have lingered, but others have packed up for the next stage, whatever that might be. No matter what its future may be, Occupy has accomplished one thing: It has shown how America’s largest generation, with some Gen X-ers and Baby Boomers mixed in, are ready to change the conversation.

Dream Dare Win
www.jeywin.com

******

2011 Royal Wedding of Prince William of England

Wednesday, December 28th, 2011

On April 29, 2011, Prince William of England married Catherine Middleton — and the world was invited to the wedding. The last royal ceremony of this magnitude was 30 years before, when Lady Diana married Prince Charles.

Now the couple was the heir to the British throne, the handsome son of Princess Diana and Prince Charles, and a commoner named Kate. ABC called the stylish pair “the couple of the moment.” Romantics everywhere rejoiced that the royal duo, who after a 10-year courtship, married for love. In the early hours of the morning, people tuned in to the ceremony: Yahoo! received one billion page views for the British event.

Millions tune in

On a beautiful sunny day, more than a million people flocked to the streets of London to watch the royal procession. Romantics put aside Britain’s social and economic troubles for the occasion.

The bride wore a stunning white gown designed by Sarah Burton for Alexander McQueen, a secret Kate managed to keep not just from her beloved, but also from the public. Replicas of the wedding gown were already in the works as Kate walked down the aisle, with designers feverishly working to get copy “Kates” into production for fall brides looking to be a princess for a day.

The two tied the knot in Westminster Abbey, with 1,900 in attendance. The guest list glittered with royalty and celebrity, from the queen herself to David and Victoria Beckham, to heads of state (although no Barack Obama), and to family and friends.

The couple appeared on the same balcony as William’s parents for a postwedding kiss, and then, in a twist all their own, took off from Buckingham Palace in dad’s Aston Martin.

The two did share the spotlight. The world had a close look at William’s dashing younger brother, Harry, and Kate’s younger sister, Pippa Middleton. She memorably attended to her sister’s 9-foot-long train in her own form-fitting McQueen dress. Pippa’s backside caused a social media sensation, and people launched Facebook sites to praise the assets of the still-single sister. Twitter nearly crashed as people speculated about what Harry whispered to Pippa as they followed the newlyweds back down the aisle.

Ordinary domestic bliss

The new Duke and Duchess of Cambridge, titles bestowed by the queen to celebrate their nuptials,  have settled into rather ordinary domestic bliss in Anglesey, North Wales, near a military base. William serves as a search and rescue pilot for the Royal Air Force – and the extraordinary newlyweds will even live apart for a couple of months when William deploys to the Falkland Islands early next year. When in London, the pair enjoys digs in Kensington Palace.

The wedding is a pleasant memory, but now fans await the next big news: a royal pregnancy.

Exam-centric system of Education will go: Kapil Sibal

Tuesday, December 27th, 2011

A paradigm shift in the way children are taught is on the anvil. Learning and education, henceforth, will be child-centric and not exam-centric as it is now, Minister for Human Resource Development Kapil Sibal said on 26.12.2011.

He was speaking at the inaugural ceremony of the Ramanujan 125 year celebrations held at the University Centenary Hall, the University of Madras, Chennai. Expressing his determination to do away with rote learning and the “archaic” examination-oriented system, he said: “We are endeavouring to reform this with emphasis on skill development and unlocking the creative talent within the child.” The Ministry’s decision to do away with examinations at the end of the year, replacing them with a Comprehensive and Continuous Evaluation (CCE) system in a bid to de-stress children, was a step in that direction.

Speaking of “potential Ramanujans” whom the system may not recognise, Mr. Sibal said: “They may well be sitting in this hall.” The Ministry thus sought to build an education system that promotes creativity, freedom, joy and an awareness of cultural heritage. “It will help our children to retain their sense of wonder, to develop a spirit of enquiry and to nurture the joys of learning,” he said.

The Union Minister also highlighted some contemporary challenges in higher education. Pointing to the high degree of inequality in the access to higher education, Mr. Sibal said the Ministry sought to increase the current Gross Enrolment Ratio of 15 per cent among those aged 18 to 24 years to 30 per cent within the decade.

Decline in Rigour

“We see a sharp stepping down of rigour and commitment towards reflection and questioning. A decline of the social sciences and humanities at both the elite and the mass sense of the system is taking place,” he said. The issue was further accentuated by basic changes taking place in the balance of power in India with the unprecedented rise of the corporate sector. Jobs in the State sector had stagnated while those in the corporate and informal sectors had grown exponentially. “One consequence of this has been a drastic alteration of priorities in higher education among the upper sections of Indian society. Prestige and financial returns acquired from participation in the global economy far outstrip most of what the Indian economy can offer. The effect has been to pull educated classes, in large numbers, into the global economy, leaving behind a vacuum whose impact we are still trying to cope with.”

Consequently, there has been a drastic reduction of the elite in areas of mathematics, social sciences and humanities, leading to shrinking or closure of these departments. “We seek to expand and create an egalitarian education system around a clear understanding of our culture, history, needs, endowments and competencies.”

He said the government, academia, business, civil society and citizens needed to work together to focus on education as the key enabler of empowerment, social change and inclusive development.

“But let us not forget that along the way, we need to give space to the unchartered journeys of those who seek to discover, to create and to conquer, much like Ramanujan’s journey. That will be a befitting tribute to a genius whose task remained unfinished.”

Courtesy: The Hindu

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

National Food Security Bill – Effects and Defects

Sunday, December 25th, 2011

Bhargavi Chandrasekharan

What prompted a Food Security Bill?

India’s high economic growth rate in the past decade has not been fully reflected in the health status of its people, with 22 per cent of its population undernourished. According to the National Family Health Survey 2005-06, 40.4% of children under the age of three are underweight, 33 per cent of women in the age group of 15-49 have a body mass index below normal and 78.9 per cent of children in the age group of 6-35 months are anaemic. These are disturbing statistics which point to nutritional deficiencies. The National Advisory Council (NAC) proposal for a National Food Security Bill (NFSB) is perhaps the most important national effort yet to address these deficiencies in India.

Intent of NFSB

The NFSB proposed by the NAC is a potentially revolutionary bill that can have a huge impact on the economy. Well crafted and effectively executed, it can transform the lives of people. The salient features of the NFSB proposed by the NAC are:

  • Legal entitlement to subsidized foodgrains to be extended to at least 75% of the country’s population – 90% in Rural areas and 50% in urban areas
  • The priority households (46% in rural areas and 28% in urban areas) to have a monthly entitlement of 35 Kgs (equivalent to 7 Kgs per person) at a subsidized price of Rs. 1 per Kg for millets, Rs. 2 per Kg for wheat and Rs. 3 per Kg for rice
  • The general households (39% rural and 12% urban in phase 1 and 44% rural and
  • 22% urban in final phase) to have a monthly entitlement of 20Kgs (equivalent to 4 Kgs per person) at a price not exceeding 50% of the current Minimum Support
  • Price for millets, wheat and rice
  • The minimum coverage, entitlement and price to remain unchanged until the end of the XII five year plan
  • Government of India to specify the criteria for categorization of population into priority and general households
  • In the first phase, food entitlement to be extended to 72 per cent of the population. In the final phase, to be completed before March 31, 2014, full coverage of food entitlement (to 75 per cent of the population) to be ensured
  • Legal entitlements for child and maternal nutrition, destitute and other vulnerable groups
  • Reform of the Public Distribution System

Estimates of Foodgrains Required for Implementing the NFSB

Million tonnes

NAC Projections* Scenario 2* Scenario 3*
Scenario 1 Offtake – priority- Offtake-100%
95% ; general-85%
Phase 1 Final Phase Phase 1 Final Phase Phase 1 Final Phase
Priority 34.40 36.42 38.91 39.83 40.96 41.93
Households
General 14.96 19.17
Households 15.13 18.75 17.80 22.05
Sub Total 49.36 55.59 54.04 58.58 58.76 63.98
Other Welfare
Schemes 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00 8.00
Buffer Stock - 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00
Total
Foodgrain 57.36 63.59 64.04 68.58 68.76 73.98

*Population – Scenario 1 – October 2010; Scenario 2 &3 – Phase 1-October 2011; Phase 2- October 2013

Foodgrain Production and Procurement – Trends and Projections

Production and Procurement of Wheat and Rice

Million tonnes

Production Procurement
Wheat Rice Total Wheat + Rice As ratio of
production (%)
2000-01 69.68 84.98 154.66 41.91 27.10
2001-02 72.77 93.34 166.11 41.18 24.79
2002-03 65.76 71.82 137.58 32.22 23.42
2003-04 72.16 88.53 160.69 39.62 24.66
2004-05 68.64 83.13 151.77 39.47 26.01
2005-06 69.35 91.79 161.14 36.88 22.89
2006-07 75.81 93.36 169.17 36.24 21.42
2007-08 78.57 96.69 175.26 51.43 29.34
2008-09 80.68 99.18 179.86 59.07 32.84
2009-10 80.71 89.13 169.84 53.98 31.78
2010-11 82.00 95.41 177.41* 53.22** 30.00
2011-12 83.61 104.21 187.82* 56.35** 30.00
(Phase 1)
2013-14 85.61 106.41 192.02* 57.61** 30.00
(Final Phase )

* Projections as per Department of Agriculture & Cooperation, Govt. of India **Assuming an optimum procurement of 30 per cent of total production

NFSB tabled in Lok Sabha

The much-awaited National Food Security Bill, 2011, which makes cheaper foodgrains a legal entitlement to 63.5 per cent of the country’s population, was tabled in the Lok Sabha on 22.12.2011.

The Bill was introduced by Food Minister K.V. Thomas in the presence of Congress president Sonia Gandhi, who has been keen on ensuring that the law is enacted. It seeks to “provide food and nutritional security by ensuring access to adequate quantity of quality food at affordable prices to people [to enable them] to live a life with dignity.”

The proposed law marks a paradigm shift in addressing the problem of food security — from the existing welfare approach to a right-based approach. Besides expanding the coverage of the Targeted Public Distribution System, it will confer legal rights, enabling eligible beneficiaries to receive foodgrains entitlements at highly subsidised prices.

Also, Section 32 of the bill mentions the States’ responsibilities: they will at their own cost organise the grains’ intra-state transport and deliver them to fair price shops in time for distribution among the beneficiaries. The States must ensure the grains reach the target population. They must set up and maintain storage facilities at the state, district and block levels. If a State fails to supply the entitled quantity of grains (or meals) to a beneficiary, it must pay them a “food security allowance” out of its own pocket.

Benefits of NFSB – Free Meals

The law will also confer legal rights on women, children and other special groups — destitute, the homeless, disaster-and-emergency-affected persons and persons living in starvation — to receive meals free or at an affordable price.

The law will entitle people eligible under the priority category (Below the Poverty Line families) to a monthly allotment of 7 kg of foodgrains, comprising rice, wheat and coarse grains, per person. Rice will be provided at Rs. 3 kg, wheat at Rs. 2 and coarse grains at Re. 1.

The general category will get at least 3 kg of grain at a rate not exceeding 50 per cent of the minimum support price.

The subsidy will be extended to up to 75 per cent of the rural population and up to 50 per cent of the urban population — with not less than 46 per cent of the rural population and 28 per cent of the urban population designated as priority households.

Maternity Benefits

Every pregnant woman and lactating mother will be entitled to meals free of charge during pregnancy and six months after childbirth, through the local anganwadi.

The Bill provides for a maternity benefit of Rs. 1,000 a month for six months. Besides, every child up to the age of 14 shall have entitlement to nutritional needs. For children between six months and six years, appropriate meal would be provided free of charge through the local anganwadi to meet nutritional standards. For children in the 6-14 age group, one mid-day meal would be given free of charge every day, except during holidays, in all schools run by local bodies, and government and government-aided schools up to class VIII.

Effect of Food Security Bills – Tamil Nadu perspective

Under the proposed National Food Security Bill, 2011, no State would be able to provide subsidized food to anyone that the Centre rules out of its beneficiaries’ list

The Bill, tabled in a hurry ahead of the UP polls faces criticism from non-UPA-ruled state governments like Bihar and Tamil Nadu, as it prevents the states from enlarging its ambit to benefit poor that the Centre does not identify.

TN CM Jayalalithaa’s letter to the PM

Chief Minister Jayalalithaa on 20.12.2011 expressed her “strong opposition” to the draft Food Security Bill, 2011 and urged the Centre to exempt Tamil Nadu from the purview of the Bill.

In her letter to Prime Minister Manmohan Singh, she said the proposed Bill was replete with “confusion and inaccuracy.”

The proposed classification of target groups into priority household (PHH) and general household (GHH) for delivery of food entitlements would surely invite sharp criticism and furious opposition from everybody concerned. The very basis of such classification was unscientific and unacceptable.

Similarly, no reason had been adduced for restricting the coverage under Targeted Public Distribution System (TDPS) to 75 per cent of the rural population and 50 per cent of the urban population under the proposed Central Bill.

“The most significant point is that the forced implementation of TPDS, as contemplated under the Central Bill, will entail an additional financial burden of about Rs.1,800 crore per annum with no statutory commitment forthcoming from the government of India,” Ms. Jayalalithaa said, adding that the annual food subsidy for the State was Rs.5,000 crore.

TN’S Loss: The Hindu dt. 24.12.2011

If National Food Security Bill is adopted in its present form, Tamil Nadu stands to lose at least six lakh tonnes of rice from the Central allotment annually if the National Food Security Bill, introduced in Lok Sabha on 22.12.2011, is adopted in its present form.

On an average, the Central government provides the State around 35.6 lakh tonnes of rice annually under three categories – Antyodaya Anna Yojana (AAY), Below Poverty Line (BPL) and Above Poverty Line (APL). It fixes a quota for each category and fixes different prices for the three categories.

As part of the Bill, two categories of people – general households (GHH) and priority households (PHH) – will be covered. Seventy five per cent of rural population and 50 per cent of urban population will be eligible for entitlements. Of them, 48 per cent of the rural population and 28 per cent of the urban population will be designated as PHHs. Adopting these yardsticks, the total allocation will be around 29 lakh tonnes a year.

Measures suggested compensating the deficit

The State government will have to address two major issues to tide over this gap – availability and cost. In the country, major rice millers are available only in three other States – Andhra Pradesh, Punjab and Chhattisgarh. A senior official says that the shortfall of six lakh tonnes cannot be bridged that easily. Even assuming that the price of rice is Rs.20 per kg, the additional cost will be Rs.1,200 crore.

But, the financial burden is going to be higher as the actual requirement of the State is 39.6 lakh tonnes. After the All India Anna Dravida Munnetra Kazhagam government, in June, launched the scheme of supplying 20 kg rice free, the monthly requirement has gone up. During 2010-2011, the monthly average supply of rice was 3.17 lakh tonnes. Now, it is around 3.4 lakh tonnes.

At present, the State government procures the remaining four lakh tonnes through measures such as rice purchase under the Open Market Sale Scheme of the Food Corporation of India. If the Bill becomes a law, it has to shell out additional money to procure this quantity. This will push up the cost. It is for this reason that Chief Minister Jayalalithaa, in her recent letter to Prime Minister Manmohan Singh, pointed out that the State government would have to incur a total expenditure of Rs. 1,800 crore additionally a year, the official explains.

If one were to calculate the requirements on the basis of individual entitlement, as envisaged in the Bill, another five lakh tonnes of rice will be required. In total, the State would have to meet the gap of 15 lakh tonnes a year.

For arriving at the overall additional quantity figure, it has been assumed that apart from meeting the norms envisaged in the Bill [seven kg per person per month for PHHs and three kg per person per month for GHHs], those cardholders who will be excluded from the proposed categories of PHHs and GHHs will be given 20 kg rice per month and GHHs will get one more kg per person per month. As per the State government’s policy, four kg rice is given to every adult a month.

In the Bill, there are other areas of concern to the State government. Given the fact that one half of the State’s population lives in urban areas, the stipulation of the coverage of 50 per cent of urban population means that a quarter of the State’s population – about 1.8 crore – will straightaway be ineligible to receive the Central subsidy.

In principle, the State government is against the Targeted Public Distribution System. So, it follows the Universal PDS and supplying rice free to 1.85 crore families. Moreover, a senior official who has been handling the subject of food wonders that in the absence of data on PHHs and GHHs, how the legislation can be implemented.

Another official says that as the State government gives edible oil and pulses at subsidised rates, the determination of entitlements of beneficiaries should also be made on the basis of calorific value of such condiments, not merely that of rice. This calls for a suitable correction in the quantity of rice to be supplied to the beneficiaries

Opposition for NFSB from other quarters

Uttar Pradesh Chief Minster Maywati has termed the proposed Food Security Bill as impractical and an election stunt of the Congress, the ruling party on 22.11.2011.

The district unit of the Right to Food (RTF) campaign organised a protest on 23.12.2011 against the Centre’s National Food Security Bill, 2011, which was recently introduced in the Lok Sabha. They submitted a memorandum demanding changes in the Bill.

The All India Democratic Women’s Association (AIDWA) has called upon the Parliament to reject the National Food Security Bill introduced in the Lok Sabha on 22.12.2011.

In a statement issued on 23.12.2011, the association said the Bill was a “more dangerous and rehashed version” of the current Targeted Public Distribution System, that proved to be an “utter failure” in view of the manner in which it eroded the food security of the majority of the poor, the dalits, the tribals and women, by excluding them from its ambit.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

2011 Year in Review – Top News Makers of the Year

Saturday, December 24th, 2011

1. Anna Hazare

Anna Hazare

The face behind the Lokpal movement, Kisan Baburao better known as Anna Hazare is considered by many netas and babus as their biggest nemesis and a hindrance to their aspirations. His crusade against corruption has grabbed headlines all over and inspired the common Indian to demand for a Jan Lokpal Bill that would hold politicians accountable for their actions.

Even though his growing popularity surprised many, Anna Hazare has been a social activist for over two decades, relentlessly working towards social and political reforms in the country.

Born in 1937, Anna Hazare joined the army in 1963 and it was during one of his visits to his village of Ralegaon Siddhi that forced him to retire from the army and to dedicate his life to rooting out problems that the villagers were facing.

His biography says Anna Hazare accidently came across a book by Swami Vivekananda and as he began to read it he realised that the ultimate motive of human life should be service to humanity and thus he decided to devote his life to public service.

Always seen in white, Anna Hazare lives in a single room within the village temple compound.

This Gandhian hails the Lokpal movement as India’s second freedom struggle. Leading a frugal life with integrity and honesty, overnight he has become a role model for India’s middle class.

Anna has resorted to many hunger strikes to make his demands heard, a fact that doesn’t augur well with his critics as they have labelled him a blackmailer and an armchair fascist.

2. Mamata Banerjee

Mamata Banerjee

The 34-year-old regime of the Left front finally crumbled to a feisty Mamata Banerjee, making her the first woman chief minister of West Bengal when her party won the assembly elections this year.

Mamata clad in a white sari and rubber slippers managed to do what many in Bengal thought was undoable till a few years back. Her angry denunciations of the Left administration made her an instant hit with the struggling Bengali. She systematically mounted protests against forced land acquisitions in the state by the then Left-ruled government.

During her short stint as the union railway minister she showered Bengal with railway projects which in turn gave Bengalis a glimpse of what she can do for their state if given a chance.

In 2011, Mamata gifted new trains and several new projects to six districts in north Bengal and didn’t let it go unnoticed by adding, “Railways have invested more funds in the six districts than the State has done for development of north Bengal”. A smart move any time of the year.

‘Didi’, or elder sister as she is fondly called, strategised her campaign against the Communists in a manner that depicts the political scenario of India today. She stands against all that is wrong in Bengal- from wrongful land acquisitions, bad infrastructure to corruption and stagnation in the state’s economy- she has gone to the aam junta with these issues and promised to make things right.

Moreover, what has appealed to the voters this time is Mamata’s humble background and her will to succeed and to put Bengal on the world map, just like it was back in the 19th century.

3. Jayalalithaa

jayalalithaa

During the election campaign, she foretold that the AIADMK with her allies would win over 185 seats in the Tamil Nadu assembly and how correct she was. After two consecutive defeats in the Tamil Nadu elections, Jayalalithaa made a spectacular comeback winning 199 of the state’s 234 assembly seats.

The last two defeats had taught Jayalalithaa a few bitter lessons and this time she made sure not to repeat the same mistakes. For this to happen, she had to depart from her usual mode of functioning and come down from her ivory tower and reach out to the people with her agenda.

Often described as the ‘Margaret Thatcher of Tamil Nadu’ by her followers, Jayalalithaa did the unthinkable and surprised political pundits by forging alliances with smaller parties – a move that proved to be a masterstroke.

As soon as the poll results were out, Jayalalithaa said, “Our priority is to rebuild. Over the past five years, Tamil Nadu has been totally ruined. Time and again this has happened. It is not an easy task to rebuild an entire state.”

What she did was to refer to the 2G spectrum scam repeatedly and hold rallies reminding the masses of how corrupt the DMK is and how the state’s economy is ruined by DMK.

Even though the pre-poll alliance played a major role in shaping the party’s victory, AIADMK cadres says that the win is an indication of people’s trust in Jayalalithaa and her vision of a corruption-free state.

4. Mahendra Singh Dhoni

Mahendra Singh Dhoni

Unlike other greats, Dhoni doesn’t have the technical efficiency or elegance or panache that makes cricket folklore but somehow he transcends all boundaries and makes himself a hero to the common man. He seldom makes batting look good but his helicopter shot makes even the connoisseur of the game make an exception and applaud.

Despite all his inadequacies, Dhoni ended India’s 28-year-long wait for a World Cup win and led the team to world’s No. 1 Test status. What makes Dhoni click seems to defy logic but what makes him a hero to millions makes more sense – he hails from a small-town with modest means and unlike other success stories, Dhoni has shown that anyone can make it big with hard work. He gives the small town enthusiasts the belief and confidence to dream big.

This year Time magazine named Dhoni in its list of 100 most influential people in the world. Time’s description of Dhoni was penned by Chetan Bhagat, saying:

“As astonishing as Dhoni’s talent is his background. Indian success stories are usually associated with pedigree, connections and power. Dhoni, from a small-town family of modest means, had none of these, but he’s shown India that you can make it with only one thing: excellence. Dhoni doesn’t just lead a cricket team; he’s also India’s captain of hope. And he didn’t just win India the World Cup; he also taught India how to win.”

So much has been said and written about his captaincy, but his biggest accolade came from teammate Sachin Tendulkar when he said that Dhoni is the best captain he played under.

5. B S Yeddyurappa

B S Yeddyurappa

From being BJP’s first chief minister in south India to becoming Karnataka’s first chief minister to be jailed for corruption, Bookanakere Siddalingappa Yeddyurappa’s journey has been topsy turvy. A staunch Rashtriya Swayamsevak Sangh man, Yeddyurappa once worked as clerk in a rice mill.

Yeddyurappa shot to fame after he took up the cause of landless farmers and bonded labourers in the state and was detained during the emergency period in 1975. A powerful public speaker, Yeddyurappa is largely credited with pulling up the sagging fortunes of BJP in Karnataka.

When Yeddyurappa became chief minister in 2008, BJP hailed the day as opening the doors of south India for the party to rule. It was not a smooth journey for either Yeddyurappa or BJP as there were three rebellions and various scandals.

In January this year, Governor H.R. Bhardwaj shook BJP and Yeddyurappa by granting permission to two Bangalore advocates to launch criminal proceedings against him for illegally freeing government land in and around Bangalore for monetary gains.

The two advocates, Sirajin Basha and N.K. Balaraj filed five cases. Yeddyurappa was jailed in two of the five cases. Besides Yeddyurappa, his two sons, B.Y. Raghavendra and B.Y. Vijayendra, and son-in-law R. Sohan Kumar are also accused in all the five cases.

6. Lal Kishanchand Advani

Lal Kishanchand Advani

Critics say this is veteran BJP leader Lal Kishanchand Advani’s final, desperate gambit to achieve his long-standing ambition to occupy the office of prime minister – his anti-corruption yatra. Supporters say the yatra, which will shortly enter such critical areas as Gujarat, Maharashtra and the south, is an attempt to throw light on rampant corruption and to politicize it is to trivialize the issue.

But is L.K. Advani’s anti-corruption yatra really mobilising people against the United Progressive Alliance or is it just the last hurrah of a veteran campaigner out to prove that he can still be a political game changer?

Calling for a ‘brighter India’ free of corruption, BJP leader L.K. Advani rolled out his sixth road campaign, the Jan Chetna Yatra, that will took him through 100 districts in 38 days. Hopefully this will be enough to push the BJP closer towards power in the next general election.

The man whose Rath first drove a party with just two seats in Parliament straight onto the national stage, clearly believes the yatra is still a journey to political advantage.

Advani’s yatra might have helped the party in crystallising the mood against the UPA in the wake of the 2G spectrum scam, the Commonwealth Games scandal and the cash-for-votes controversy and the government’s failure to contain price rise.

Advani, in his speeches during the yatra was unsparing in his attack on the UPA, describing it as the most corrupt government since independence and Manmohan Singh as the ‘weakest prime minister’. He also accused the UPA of ‘disarray and internal dissension’, ‘policy paralysis’ and spoke of the need for electoral and judicial reforms.

The yatra might have evoked a good response but the ‘litmus test’ will be Uttar Pradesh which will go to the polls next year.

7. Kiran Bedi

Kiran Bedi

Not a stranger to controversy herself, India’s most famous IPS officer, Kiran Bedi, courted notoriety this year with her vociferous support of Anna Hazare’s Jan Lokpal movement, even resorting to gimmickry and over-the-top antics to get her point across.

India’s most decorated public services officer, a Magsaysay awardee, Bedi was quick to heap criticism on the UPA government’s inaction towards Anna’s requests of an ombudsman bill to counter corruption. Alas, after being the most outspoken in Anna’s team, she had to swallow a bitter pill when it came to light that she’d herself inflated several travel bills, a move she was quick to defend. She subsequently paid back the overcharged amount.

Bedi’s was a classic case of people-and-glass-houses.

8. Osama bin Laden

Osama bin Laden

Nearly 10 years after the traumatic Sept 11, 2001 attacks on the World Trade Centre in New York and the Pentagon, the world’s most wanted terrorist leader Osama bin Laden was killed in Pakistan.

The man who wanted to recreate a seventh-century Muslim empire was gunned down by US special forces in a helicopter-borne assault on a closely guarded compound in Abbottabad.

President Obama announced that Osama bin Laden was killed in a firefight saying, “Good evening. Tonight I can report to the American people and to the world that the United States has conducted an operation that killed Osama bin Laden, the leader of al Qaeda, and a terrorist who is responsible for the murder of thousands of innocent men, women and children.”

Osama was found hiding in plain sight, in a well guarded compound in Abbottabad, just about an hour and a half outside of the Pakistan capital Islamabad, which cast a doubt on the Pakistan political-military hierarchy.

9. Sushil Kumar

Sushil Kumar

This 27-year-old from Motihari in Bihar, went from oblivion to fame and wealth in a matter of 13 questions on the fifth season of the quiz show ‘Kaun Banega Crorepati’.

Sushil Kumar, a computer operator who works on contract with a government department for a monthly salary of Rs 6,000, won the biggest prize of all – Rs 5 crore, after successfully locking 13 questions posed by the Big B.

With two lifelines left, Amitabh Bachchan started reading out the final question. Sushil had to answer which foreign colonial power exited from India after selling off the Nicobar island to the British in 1868.

Sushil answered Denmark and the Big B exulted – ‘Paanch crore!’

“Our house has almost broken down and we have a lot of loans that have to be repaid,” Sushil said. “If it hadn’t been for this money, I would have gotten old before I sorted out my life.”

“I’ve been getting a lot of suggestions about what to do with the money, but right now I can only think about my dream of getting through the civil services exam,” he said.

“What a sensational day in the studios of KBC! A young man from the interiors of Bihar, earning a meagre salary of just Rs 6,000 per month, coming from the most humblest of backgrounds, reaches the hot seat and cracks the ultimate prize – Rs 5 crore! An incredible feat!” Amitabh Bachchan blogged.

10. Irom Sharmila Chanu

Irom Sharmila Chanu - the Iron Lady

Even though she doesn’t strictly fulfil the newsmaker category, this iron-willed lady of Manipur has waged a long and lonely battle against an apathetic government the only way she can. Thanks to Anna Hazare’s fast, Irom received some media attention this year, starved that she was of it for the last 11 years.

Irom Sharmila Chanu has been fasting for 11 years to seek the removal of the Armed Forces Special Powers Act or AFSPA from her state, Manipur.  She has the grit to try and persuade the government to repeal a law that empowers the security forces to arrest without a warrant, and shoot anyone at sight.

Dubbed as the Iron Lady of Manipur, Irom began her fast in 2000 after she witnessed the killing of 10 people by Assam Rifles jawans at a bus stop. For the past 10 years, she has not eaten a single morsel, resulting in her being force-fed by a tube through her nose.

Irom hopes one day the Indian government will recognise her and her fight against human rights violations in the north east. She has also urged Anna Hazare to visit Manipur and see what is happening there.

Although she has won international awards, Irom’s cause has never managed to strike a chord with the otherwise vocal middle class. Very few know or care about what is happening in Manipur, and how people in the state are being constantly bullied by the armed forces.

Irom’s heroic protest and her voice for a better homeland are still being ignored. Next time you attend a candlelight vigil, say a silent prayer and light a candle for this extraordinary woman.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

2011 Year in Review – 10 Most Fond Farewells

Saturday, December 24th, 2011

1. Sathya Sai Baba

Sathya Sai Baba

When Sathya Sai Baba, the Godman from Puttparthi died on April 6th earlier this year, he left behind an empire estimated at Rs 40,000 crore, and no will. This was wealth accumulated from a lifetime being a self-proclaimed Godman and the largesse of rich benefactors.

Sai Baba had millions of followers all over the world. His devotees included some of the popular celebrities and powerful politicians like Sachin Tendulkar, Amitabh Bachchan and former Prime Minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee.

He was worshipped as an incarnation of another saint, Shirdi Sai Baba, and believed to have God-like qualities. But he had his detractors, who claimed that all the miracles he performed, like pulling watches out of thin air, were merely cheap magic tricks. Rumors of child and sexual abuse at his ashram were also rampant, so much so that the US government had issued a warning about him to American citizens traveling to India. There was even an attempt on his life in June 6th, 1993 in his ashram; the attack left six dead, and Puttaparthi rattled. Sai Baba dismissed the idea that the attack was an attempt on his life.

But his legacy will live past these minor negative incidents. Perhaps the biggest contribution of the seer was his philanthropic activities. He has provided many villages with clean drinking water through his organization Sri Satya Village Integrated Programme (SSVIP). He set up the Sri Sathya Sai University, which delivers high-quality education with three colleges under its belt.  His setting up of Sri Sathya Sai Baba’s Super Speciality Hospital has been very well received, where thousands of patients have been treated free of cost.

What will be important to follow would be the ability of his Trust to continue with his philanthropic activities long after he’s gone.

2. Shammi Kapoor

Shammi Kapoor

Shamsher Raj Kapoor, born on October 21, 1931, to Prithviraj Kapoor and Ramsharni Kapoor, was their middle son, and brother to Raj and Shashi Kapoor. He spent his childhood years in Kolkatta and Mumbai, and began his career with his father’s theatre company, Prithvi Theatres. Four years later he left to pursue a career in film. He shortened his name to Shammi Kapoor and made his debut with Jeevan Jyoti, but he was met without a blip at the box office. The next three years saw 20 films that crashed and burned. Deciding to change things around, Kapoor shaved off his pencil moustache, cut his hair and donned an Elvis Presley swagger. With films like Dil Deke Dekho and Tumsa Nahin Dekha, Kapoor cemented his image as the boyishly goodlooking playboy and stylish youth icon. His cry “Yahoo” in the film Jungleeencapsulated his image as a rebel, and the exclamation came to always be associated with him.  With successful films opposite stars like Asha Parekh, Saira Banu, and Sharmila Tagore, and his trademark dance moves, there was no looking back for Kapoor; he won his first Filmfare award in 1968 for Bramhachari.

Kapoor went through a difficult period when his wife Geeta Bali, mother to his two children Aditya Raj and Kanchan, died of small pox.  It was eight years before he remarried, this time to Neela Devi Gohil.  He soon retired from playing leading roles, taking instead to character pieces, and moving behind the camera as director. In 1995 he was given the Filmfare lifetime achievement award. Coming out of retirement for his cameo in the film Rockstarwith his nephew Ranbir Kapoor, Shammi Kapoor worked while simultaneously dealing with kidney dialysis. He eventually passed away from chronic renal failure on 14 August 2011 at Breach Candy Hospital in Mumbai. The entire Kapoor family and many of Bollywood’s biggest names came together to pay their last respects at the funeral of an actor whose legacy remains in Indian cinema.

3. Maqbool Fida Hussain

Maqbool Fida Hussain

Maqbool Fida Hussain, better known to the world as MF Hussain, died on June 9th 2011, at the age of 95. Hailed as India’s Picasso, he played a significant role in putting Indian art on the world map. Known for his use of vibrant colour and depictions of dynamic movement, frequently featuring women and horses, Husain was the first living Indian artist to command a price of $1million for his work.

Husain was born in Maharashtra on September 17th, 1915, to an accountant father, and a mother who died when he was barely 18 months old. At the age of 19, Husain came to Mumbai and found work as a painter of Hindi film posters.  As his popularity grew, Husain also found himself increasingly in the eye of the storm with his series on Hindu divinity, portraying the goddesses Durga and Saraswati in the nude. Criminal charges that were filed against him for hurting religious sentiments were eventually quashed, but the death threats from Hindu extremists continued. In the face of such harassment, Husain was forced moved to Dubai, and the state of Qatar offered him citizenship.

The barefoot but flamboyant artist who created over 60,000 pieces of art died in exile in a hospital in London. Prime Minister Manmohan Singh called his death a “national loss,” and India’s President Pratibha Patil said his death left a void in the world of art.

4. Bhupen Hazarika

Bhupen Hazarika

Bhupen Hazarika, one of north-east India’s most important cultural figures, was a singer, lyricist, filmmaker, author and political activist, in a career that spanned 70 years. By the age of 10 he was composing music, and a year later performed for the first time on All India Radio. In 1939 at the age of 12, he catapulted into stardom after singing in the second Assamese film to be produced, Indramalati. He attributes his musical ability to his mother Shantipriya, “”Although listening to the rhythms of tribal music growing up developed my love for singing, I inherited my voice from my mother, who regularly sang lullabies to me as a child.” Hazarika was the eldest of 10 children, and his father imbibed him with a deep respect for education. Later, as he was drawn into India’s freedom movement, he would realise the connection between education and freedom, and this idea was clearly voiced in his music and writing at the time.

Hazarika schooled in Guwahati, and majored in political science at the Banaras Hindu University. He completed his PhD in mass communication at Columbia University, New York.  In New York he met singer Paul Robeson who became a great influence on his music and his politic; he joined him on many civil rights rallies, and the famous ‘Bistirno Parore’ is an Assamese version of ‘Old Man River.’

Hazarika worked for a brief while as producer for All India Radio, and even taught at Gauhati University after returning from New York before he became involved with Assamese cinema. His popularity was unmatched at the time, as his music addressed important social issues and connected with his listeners. In 1992 he was awarded the Dada Saheb Phalke for his prolific contribution to film. He was also awarded the Padmashree in 1977 and Padma Bhushan in 2001. On November 5th 2011, he passed away after being admitted into the ICU for multi-organ failure. He is survived by his companion of many years, filmmaker Kalpana Lajmi, “I have lost my father, my brother, my lover, my husband, my friend, my mentor and guide. I had a relationship with him for 29 years, and he is gone now.”

5. Mansoor Ali Khan Pataudi

Mansoor Ali Khan Pataudi

What if MAK Pataudi had the use of both his eyes? That question will dog cricket aficionados for years to come.

Blessed with immaculate talent and unparalleled leadership qualities, the Naawab of Patuadi was handed the captaincy at the tender age of 21, when the then captain Nari Contractor got injured.

“Tiger” Patuadi scored 2793 runs in Test Cricket at an average of 34.91, he was the son of a famous father, who had played for England before the Second World War and then captained India in England in 1946. He went on to Captian India in 40 Tests, and even though India won only nine of those, his greatest contribution was to ensure that the Indian team became a tight unit under him. This was acknowledged by Bishan Singh Bedi, who captained India after Pataudi did.

Devoid of fast bowling options, he helped put together India’s famous spin quartet, Bishan Singh Bedi, Bhagwat Chandrasekhar, Erapalli Prasanna, and Srinivas Venkataraghvan.

Being a fantastic fielder himself, he laid a lot emphasis on fielding.

After he retired in 1975, Pataudi dabbled in media and also as an administrator, but both of these stints dint last for long.

6. Jagjit Singh

Jagjit Singh

By the time he died at age 70, Jagjit Singh, India’s ghazal king had already recorded 50 albums in his 46-year career. When Singh started his career, because of its classical form the ghazal had a niche audience. One of Singh’s biggest contributions was to simplify the ghazal, and make it accessible to a global audience by using western instruments like the saxophone and guitar, along with Indian instruments like the sitar and tablaa.

This helped transform the Ghazal, a poetic form consisting of rhyming couplets and a refrain, whose origins go back to the 12th century. Singh’s efforts ensured that he became famous not only in India but the world over.

But that was not always the case; he struggled through most of his early days as a singer, eking out a meager living belting out jingles for advertisements.

Singh’s life changed after he met the singer Chitra Dutta, whom he married in 1969, and had a son with, Vivek. The singing duo at first had only low-level success because ghazal music was a niche genre dominated by mainly Muslim artists, and Bollywood ruled the musical mainstream. Success soon came along after the release of their first studio album and they never looked back.

Singh’s personal life was punctuated with loss, grief and depression. None more painful than the passing away of his only son Vivek, who died tragically at the age of 19, this prompted his wife Chitra to shun singing in public forever.

7. Steve Jobs

Steve Jobs

Steve Jobs, tech visionary extraordinaire and co-founder of Apple is reminiscent of Howard Roark, the protagonist of Ayn Rand’s eponymous novel ‘The Fountainhead.’ Roark’s character in the novel spends most of his life fighting the system and being uncompromising when it comes to putting the self above the collective. Jobs must have felt just like Roark after his few attempts to upend a fledgling personal computer industry.

Apple had already garnered a cult following after it introduced Apple II, the first popular mass-produced micro-computers computer in 1997 and the Macintosh, the first PC to use a mouse and a graphical user interface. First he saw bitter rivals Microsoft win the PC game with their software play. Then he faced the ignominy of being forced out of his own company by John Sculley (hired by Jobs after he fell for the famous line, “Do you want to sell sugar water for the rest of your life, or do you want to come with me and change the world?”) and the board.

Thus began his second journey and a renaissance that transformed Jobs and eventually Apple. Ousted out of his own company Jobs formed two companies: NeXt and Pixar. In an ironic twist of fate Apple bought NeXt, and Jobs’ second innings at Apple began. Pixar, meanwhile had produced the world’s first animated feature film and notched up quite a few successes with movies like ‘Finding Nemo’ and ‘Toy Story’.

Jobs’ real genius came together 4 years after he came back to Apple 2001 and he unveiled the iPod. Post which he never really looked back, and with the success of the iPhone and the iPad, he transformed a company which was on the verge of bankruptcy to the most valuable tech company in the world. Jobs might be criticized for being too autocratic and a control freak. But the legacy he has left behind will take a long time to be forgotten.

8. Dennis Ritchie

Dennis Ritchie

Some might say. No Dennis Ritchie. No Apple. The OS used by the world’s biggest technology company has UNIX under its hood because Jobs was a huge advocate of the programming language.

One of the tech pioneers who helped ‘shape the digital era’ Ritchie was instrumental in creating the C programming language and co-creating the UNIX operating system with his colleague Ken Thompson. Linux, the free, open variant of Unix powers servers at tech titans like Amazon and Google.

Not before he had almost every major honor in the computer science bestowed on him including the Turing Award from the ACM in 1983, the Hamming Medal from the IEEE in 1990 and the National Medal of Technology from President Clinton in 1999.

Ritchie started his career in Bell Labs, the same revered company that his father Alistair worked for earlier; his mother Jean McGee Ritchie, was a homemaker. Most of his early work was done with his colleague Thompson that paved the way for the software and tools that power most of modern computing from mobile phones to the internet.

Ritchie retired in 2007 as the head of Lucent Technologies System Software Research Department. After suffering from heart disease and prostrate cancer for some time, he passed away on October 13th.

9. Amy Winehouse

Amy Winehouse

Amy Jade Winehouse was born on September 14th, 1983 in Southgate London to Jewish parents. Her father, Mitchell, a taxi driver, was a jazz enthusiast who often sang to Amy in her growing-up years.  Her parents divorced when she was nine, and she continued to live with her mother, although she remained close to her father.

At the young age of eight, Amy began attending stage school, including the Sylvia Young theatre school, and the Brit school in Croydon. Although she was expelled from one of them for “not applying herself,” Amy continued to write songs and sing with jazz bands and the National Youth Jazz Orchestra.  Her boyfriend of the time passed on a recording of her to a record company, who were so impressed with her sound that she landed her first contract at the age of 17.

A musical assistant who toured with Amy described her, “She has enormous talent and deep roots in jazz and blues; she didn’t suffer from the ‘lead singer syndrome’ and unlike most she knew her sharps and flats. And she knew exactly who she was and how she wanted to sound – which some singers only know when they’ve got 40 grand’s worth of equipment, but which Amy knew by standing on top of a piano in a pub.”

Her debut album ‘Frank’ released in 2003 and won her critical recognition and nominations for the Mercury Prize, going triple platinum in the UK. But it was her second album ‘Back to Black’ that propelled Amy into international stardom. Winning her accolades at the Grammy’s and the Brit Awards, the album went eight times platinum in the UK and double platinum in the US. But tragically, her rise to stardom also saw her steady decline into alcohol and drugs. Her tempestuous relationship with Blake Fielder-Civil added depression to the mix, and Amy found herself in and out of rehab, and in trouble with the law. Ironically it was her song ‘Rehab’ about her refusal to attend an alcohol rehabilitation centre that stuck the deepest chord with her fans.

Amy was found dead in her London flat on 23rd July, at the age of 27, joining the troupe of talented but notoriously self-destructive artists who also died at that age. Her death was believed to be caused by a suspected drug overdose. She is survived by her parents, and her brother Alex.

10. Elizabeth Rosemond Taylor

Elizabeth Taylor

Elizabeth Rosemond Taylor was born in Hampstead on February 27th 1932, to parents Sara Sothern, a stage actress, and Francis Taylor, an art dealer. Trained in ballet from the time she could walk, she had already performed for the British royal family at the age of 3. Her parents moved to Hollywood in 1939, and young Elizabeth Taylor’s striking beauty and violet eyes began to get noticed in those early days at her father’s gallery. She did her first film at the age of ten, with ‘Lassie Come Home,’ but it was ‘National Velvet’ that really put her on the map.

From there on, her career moved forward in leaps and bounds. From ‘Giant’ with Hudson and James Dean, to ’Cat on a Hot Tin Roof,’ ‘Who’s Afraid of Virginia Woolf?’ and ‘Cleopatra,’ Taylor’s performances earned her several nominations and three Oscars, one of which was in special recognition of her humanitarian work. Besides her work as an actress, she was also known for her astonishing beauty and grace, her many failed romances, her famous friendships, and her long love affair with jewelry. With eight high-profile marriages and divorces (two to Richard Burton, a rollercoaster relationship that was covered extensively by the media), the spotlight moved to her personal life rather than her work in the industry.  As one obit put it, she was a “star at age 12, a bride and a divorcee at 18, a superstar at 19 and a widow at 26.”

Taylor was also a fiercely loyal friend, defending gays in Hollywood at a time when they were ostracized by the industry, and standing by Michael Jackson as he faced charges of misdemeanor with minors.  She fought ill health through most of her career, beginning with a fall from horseback on ‘National Velvet.’ She went through 20 major surgeries, had replacement surgery for both hip joints, and was treated for drug and alcohol abuse.

Taylor was awarded the Legion of Honor, and titled Dame Elizabeth Taylor for her extensive charitable work, including her deep support on AIDS research, and for her work in the entertainment industry.  In her later years she worked on several books, and kept in touch with her fans through Twitter. On March 23rd, she died of congestive heart failure at the age of 79. She is survived by her four children, ten grandchildren and four great-grandchildren.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

Lokpal Bill – Controversies and the present scenario

Saturday, December 24th, 2011

Anand B.A., B.L

Introduction

The word Lokpal was coined in 1963 by L.M.Singhvi, a Member of Parliament during a debate in Parliament about grievance redressal mechanisms. His son Dr. Abhishek Singhvi is now the head of the Parliamentary Standing Committee reviewing the bill. The prefix Jan (translation: citizens) was added to signify the fact that these improvements include input provided by “ordinary citizens” through an activist-driven, non-governmental public consultation.

The Lokpal bill was first introduced by Shanti Bhushan in 1968 and passed the 4th Lok Sabha in 1969. But before it could be passed by Rajya Sabha, Lok Sabha was dissolved and the bill lapsed. The Subsequent versions were re-introduced in 1971, 1977, 1985, 1989, 1996, 1998, 2001, 2005 and in 2008, but none of them passed. The bill was inspired by the Hong Kong Independent Commission against Corruption (ICAC).

Timeline and Lokpal bill cost

  • 1968 – Rs 3 lakh (300,000)
  • 1971 – Rs 20 lakh (2 million)
  • 1977 – Rs 25 lakh (2.5 million)
  • 1985 – Rs 25 lakh
  • 1989 – Rs 35 lakh (3.5 million) – PM under lokpal
  • 1996 – Rs 1 crore (10 million) – PM under lokpal
  • 2001 – Rs 1.5 crore (15 million) – PM under lokpal
  • 2011 – Rs 1700 crore (17 billion)

The first version of the Lokpal Bill drafted by the Government of India in 2010 was considered ineffective by anti-corruption activists from the civil society. These activists, under the banner of India against Corruption, came together to draft a citizen’s version of the Lokpal Bill later called the Jan Lokpal. Public awareness drives and protest marches were carried out to campaign for the bill. However, public support for the Jan Lokpal Bill draft started gathering steam after Anna Hazare, a noted Gandhian announced that he would hold an indefinite fast from 5 April 2011 for the passing of the Lokpal/Jan Lokpal bill. The government has however accepted it.

To dissuade Hazare from going on an indefinite hunger strike, the Prime Minister’s Office directed the ministries of personnel and law to examine how the views of society activists can be included in the Lokpal Bill. On 5 April, 2011 the National Advisory Council rejected the Lokpal bill drafted by the government. Union Human Resource Development Minister Kapil Sibal then met social activists Swami Agnivesh and Arvind Kejriwal on 7 April, 2011 to find ways to bridge differences over the bill. However, no consensus could be reached on 7 April owing to several differences of opinion between the social activists and the Government.

The Jan Lokpal Bill (Citizen’s ombudsman Bill) is a draft anti-corruption bill drawn up by prominent civil society activists seeking the appointment of a Jan Lokpal, an independent body that would investigate corruption cases, complete the investigation within a year and envisages trial in the case getting over in the next one year. Drafted by Justice Santosh Hegde (former Supreme Court Judge and former Lokayukta of Karnataka), Prashant Bhushan (Supreme Court Lawyer) and Arvind Kejriwal (RTI activist), the draft Bill envisages a system where a corrupt person found guilty would go to jail within two years of the complaint being made and his ill-gotten wealth being confiscated. It also seeks power to the Jan Lokpal to prosecute politicians and bureaucrats without government permission. Retired IPS officer Kiran Bedi and other known people like Swami Agnivesh, Sri Sri Ravi Shankar, Anna Hazare and Mallika Sarabhai are also part of the movement, called India Against Corruption. Its website describes the movement as “an expression of collective anger of people of India against corruption. We have all come together to force/request/persuade/pressurize the Government to enact the Jan Lokpal Bill. We feel that if this Bill were enacted it would create an effective deterrence against corruption.”Anna Hazare, anti-corruption crusader, went on a fast-unto-death in April, demanding that this Bill, drafted by the civil society, be adopted. Four days into his fast, the government agreed to set up a joint committee with an equal number of members from the government and civil society side to draft the Lokpal Bill together. The two sides met several times but could not agree on fundamental elements like including the PM under the purview of the Lokpal. Eventually, both sides drafted their own version of the Bill. The government has introduced its version in Parliament in this session. Team Anna is up in arms and calls the government version the “Joke Pal Bill.” Anna Hazare declared that he would begin another fast in Delhi on August 16. Hours before he was to begin his hunger strike, the Delhi Police detained and later arrested him. There are widespread protests all over the country against his arrest. The website of the India Against Corruption movement calls the Lokpal Bill of the government an “eyewash” and has on it a critique of that government Bill.

Features of Jan Lokpal Bill

  1. An institution called LOKPAL at the centre and LOKAYUKTA in each state will be set up
  2. Like Supreme Court and Election Commission, they will be completely independent of the governments. No minister or bureaucrat will be able to influence their investigations.
  3. Cases against corrupt people will not linger on for years anymore: Investigations in any case will have to be completed in one year. Trial should be completed in next one year so that the corrupt politician, officer or judge is sent to jail within two years.
  4. The loss that a corrupt person caused to the government will be recovered at the time of conviction.
  5. How will it help a common citizen: If any work of any citizen is not done in prescribed time in any government office, Lokpal will impose financial penalty on guilty officers, which will be given as compensation to the complainant.
  6. So, you could approach Lokpal if your ration card or passport or voter card is not being made or if police is not registering your case or any other work is not being done in prescribed time. Lokpal will have to get it done in a month’s time. You could also report any case of corruption to Lokpal like ration being siphoned off, poor quality roads been constructed or panchayat funds being siphoned off. Lokpal will have to complete its investigations in a year, trial will be over in next one year and the guilty will go to jail within two years.
  7. But won’t the government appoint corrupt and weak people as Lokpal members? That won’t be possible because its members will be selected by judges, citizens and constitutional authorities and not by politicians, through a completely transparent and participatory process.
  8. What if some officer in Lokpal becomes corrupt? The entire functioning of Lokpal/ Lokayukta will be completely transparent. Any complaint against any officer of Lokpal shall be investigated and the officer dismissed within two months.
  9. What will happen to existing anti-corruption agencies? CVC, departmental vigilance and anti-corruption branch of CBI will be merged into Lokpal. Lokpal will have complete powers and machinery to independently investigate and prosecute any officer, judge or politician.
  10. It will be the duty of the Lokpal to provide protection to those who are being victimized for raising their voice against corruption.

Drafting committee on Jan Lokpal bill

The drafting committee was officially formed on 8 April 2011. It consisted of the following ten members, including five from the government and five drawn from the civil society.

Member Qualifications and status
Pranab Mukherjee Finance Minister, Co-Chairman
Shanti Bhushan Former Minister of Law and Justice, Co-Chairman
P. Chidambaram Minister of Home Affairs
Veerappa Moily Minister of Corporate Affairs
Kapil Sibal Minister for human resource & devlopement
Salman Khursid Minister of Law
Anna Hazare Social Activist
Prashant Bhushan Lawyer
N. Santosh Hegde Former Lokayukta (Karnataka) and Supreme Court Justice
Arvind Kejriwal RTI Activist.

The Government’s handling of the formation of the draft committee, involving the civil society in preparation of the draft Lokpal bill, was criticised by various political parties including BJP, BJD, TDP, AIADMK, CPI-M, RJD, JD(U) and Samajwadi Party

The committee failed to agree on the terms of a compromise bill and the government introduced its own version of the bill in the parliament in August 2011.

Difference between Jan Lokpal Bill and Draft Bill 2010
Jan Lokpal Bill (Citizen’s Ombudsman Bill) Draft Lokpal Bill (2010)
Lokpal will have powers to initiate suo motu action or receive complaints of corruption from the general public. Lokpal will have no power to initiate suo motu action or receive complaints of corruption from the general public. It can only probe complaints forwarded by the Speaker of the Lok Sabha or the Chairman of the Rajya Sabha.
Lokpal will have the power to initiate prosecution of anyone found guilty. Lokpal will only be an Advisory Body with a role limited to forwarding reports to a “Competent Authority”.
Lokpal will have police powers as well as the ability to register FIRs. Lokpal will have no police powers and no ability to register an FIR or proceed with criminal investigations.
Lokpal and the anti corruption wing of the CBI will be one independent body. The CBI and Lokpal will be unconnected.
Punishments will be a minimum of 10 years and a maximum of up to life imprisonment. Punishment for corruption will be a minimum of 6 months and a maximum of up to 7 years.

Details

The following table details differences between the Government and activist backed versions.

Issue The Jan Lokpal Bill Government’s Lokpal Bill
Prime Minister PM can be investigated with permission of seven member Lokpal bench. PM can be investigated by Lokpal after she/he vacates office.
Judiciary Can be investigated, though high level members may be investigated only with permission of a seven member Lokpal bench. Judiciary is exempt and will be covered by a separate “judicial accountability bill”.
Conduct of MPs Can be investigated with permission of seven member Lokpal bench. Can be investigated, but their conduct within Parliament, such as voting, cannot be investigated.
Lower bureaucracy All public servants would be included. Only senior officers (Group A) will be covered.
Anti-corruption wing of the Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI) The Anti-corruption wing of the CBI will be merged into the Lokpal. The Anti-corruption wing of the CBI cannot be merged into the Lokpal.
Removal of Lokpal members and Chair Any person can bring a complaint to the Supreme Court, who can then recommend removal of any member to the President. Any “aggrieved party” can raise a complaint to the President, who will refer the matter to the CJI.
Removal of Lokpal staff and officers Complaints against Lokpal staff will be handled by independent boards set-up in each state, composed of retired bureaucrats, judges, and civil society members. Lokpal will conduct inquiries into its own behaviour.
Lokayukta Lokayukta and other local/state anti-corruption agency would remain in place. All state anti-corruption agencies would be closed and responsibilities taken over by centralised Lokpal.
Whistleblower protection Whistleblowers are protected by Lokpal. No protection granted to whistleblowers by Lokpal Mahima.
Punishment for corruption Lokpal can either directly impose penalties, or refer the matter to the courts. Penalties can include removal from office, imprisonment, and recovery of assets from those who benefited from the corruption. Lokpal can only refer matters to the courts, not take any direct punitive actions. Penalties remain equivalent to those in current law.
Investigatory powers Lokpal can obtain wiretaps ( to make a connection to a telegraph or telephone wire in order to obtain information secretly), issue rogatory letters, and recruit investigating officers. Cannot issue contempt orders. Lokpal can issue contempt orders, and has the ability to punish those in contempt. No authority to obtain wiretaps, issue rogatory letters, or recruit investigating officers.
False, frivolous and vexatious complaints Lokpal can issue fines for frivolous complaints (including frivolous complaints against Lokpal itself), with a maximum penalty of Rs 100,000. Court system will handle matters of frivolous complaints. Courts can give 2–5 years imprisonment and fines of Rs 25,000 to 200,000.
NGOs NGOs not within the scope due to their role in exposing corruption. NGOs are within the scope and can be investigated.

One step forward, two steps back (Editorial: The Hindu dt 24.12.2011)

Hopelessly ineffectual and constitutionally suspect, the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Bill, 2011 is nothing less than a betrayal of national trust. It is inexcusable that a Bill, substantially weaker than the August 2011 version that was forced to be withdrawn on the widespread belief that it would be fortified in key areas, has been tabled in the Lok Sabha. The whole purpose of the exercise is supposed to be the creation of a strong, effective, and credible mechanism to go after corruption, especially political corruption, which has assumed monstrous proportions in India. The key provisions of the new Bill relating to the selection of the nine-member Lokpal, its anti-corruption functions and powers, and administrative control over India’s premier criminal investigation agency mock that purpose.

In the first place, Section 4 of the Bill, which provides for a five-member Selection Committee to choose the chairman and eight other members of the Lokpal, gives the government political control over this process. Secondly, the separation of the power to enquire, investigate, and prosecute set out in the Bill is much worse than the scheme contained in the earlier Lokpal Bill, Section 20 of which gave the Lokpal its own investigation wing. In allowing the Lokpal only an Inquiry Wing headed by a Director of Inquiry “for the purpose of conducting preliminary inquiry into any offence alleged to have been committed by a public servant punishable under the Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988” and denying it its own investigation wing, the new Bill neuters the anti-corruption watchdog. Allowing the Lokpal “a Prosecution Wing headed by the Director of Prosecution for the purpose of prosecution of public servants in relation to any complaint by the Lokpal under this Act” may look like a step forward. But this cannot possibly make up for the failure to provide for a clean process of independent investigation that is safeguarded from executive interference. At a time when the Lokayukta in a State such as Karnataka has its own investigation wing – something it has used to very good effect – it is retrogressive to withhold this instrument from the Lokpal.

At the same time, the new Bill has sought to keep the Central Bureau of Investigation out of the Lokpal’s purview ostensibly on the ground that it should have autonomy over its investigations. Given the agency’s record of bowing to the diktats of its political masters, there is no reason to believe that investigations, even those that are Lokpal-referred and Lokpal-monitored, will be free of political interference. The Centre, which has retained administrative control (read: promotions, transfers, etc.) of the CBI via the Ministry of Personnel, knows better than most that he who pays the piper calls the tune. While the proposal that a new panel (comprising the Prime Minister, the Leader of the Opposition, and the Chief Justice of India or his nominee) selects the Director of the CBI will go some way in enhancing the credibility of the agency, the opportunity to confer on it genuine independence is being lost.

Just as problematic is the constitutional validity of some basic provisions of the Bill. The inclusion of minorities among the groups given reservation in the nine-member body is bound to be challenged on the ground that it amounts to a quota being given on grounds of religion. While this issue has little bearing on tackling corruption, the deep and seemingly irreconcilable political divisions it has created, reflected in the manner in which it dominated the parliamentary debate on the Bill, is bound to have a bearing on its passage. Is this a ploy to let anti-corruption legislation fall victim to a wholly extraneous issue – reservation? Will it be allowed to degenerate, as in the case of the women’s reservation bill, into a legislative exercise that everyone claims to support but few really want?

There have also been serious concerns on another constitutional front – federalism. While it is hard to fault the principle of having comparable mechanisms and instruments to go after corruption at the central and State levels, the legislative procedure adopted is open to question. Rather than mandating the creation of a Lokpal-like structure in every State, would it not have been in keeping with India’s federal structure and regional sensitivities for the central legislation to have model or enabling provisions for constituting effective Lokayuktas in States? Given the strong national public mood against corruption, it is unlikely that State governments would risk going against it.

Unfortunately, the improvements in the new Bill have been overshadowed by the slew of regressive alterations. The inclusion of the Prime Minister under the Lokpal with certain exceptions is a step up from the earlier stipulation that permitted any inquiry only after he or she demitted office. The new Bill brings both Group ‘A’ and ‘B’ officers under the Lokpal’s ambit. While this is short of Team Anna’s demand that Group ‘C’ and ‘D’ officials be covered as well, it is an improvement on earlier drafts, under which the Lokpal’s purview was limited to Group ‘A’ officers. Further, while the ‘C’ and ‘D’ categories will be covered by the Central Vigilance Commission, cases relating to them will be reviewed by the Lokpal. The idea of granting constitutional status to the office of the Lokpal would have had traction had the Bill vested the body with the strength and self-sufficiency to make a serious impact on corruption. Unfortunately, a mixture of bad faith and a reluctance to loosen the grip on the handle of power have contributed to the making of a Bill that has caused deep divisions in Parliament and enough disenchantment to fuel a new round of Team Anna-led protests against the Centre. The country is no closer to a consensus on the Lokpal Bill than it was many months ago.

CBI’s autonomy seriously compromised?

A day after the introduction of the anti-graft Lokpal and Lokayukta Bill, 2011, in the Lok Sabha, sources in the Central Bureau of Investigation on 23.12.2011 felt that the agency’s autonomy of investigation had been “seriously compromised”. CBI sources said the Bill did not seem to confer greater autonomy to the investigative agency—one of the focal points of the civil society’s agitation for bringing about a strong, effective and credible Lokpal to tackle corruption in high places.

“The dependence of CBI on the government in financial and administrative matters is the main cause for the public perception that it can be influenced by the government and that its investigations are not immune to the government’s interference and pressure.

They said the CBI Director should be given administrative and financial powers on the lines of the Secretaries in the Union Government. “CBI Director should be empowered to induct officers up to the rank of Joint Director. He should also have powers for engaging special counsels and specialists of different disciplines,” sources in the agency said. The sources also said that Section 6A of the Delhi Special Police Establishment (DSPE) Act, which calls for obtaining sanction before proceeding against government officials of the rank of Joint Secretary and above, should be repealed. “The DSPE Act needs to be amended to repeal this provision, as this is one of the major impediments in pursuing investigations against public servants of the rank of Joint Secretary and above,” they said.

The sources said that Section 23 (1) of the Lokpal Bill, which provides for functional autonomy for registration and initiation of prosecution, was applicable only for cases referred by the Lokpal.

The sources said the Bill envisaged reporting by the CBI to the Lokpal, the Central Vigilance Commission, the Department of Personnel and Training, and the Ministries of Law and Home. “Instead of gaining any functional autonomy, CBI would now have too many superior authorities to which it should report. This multiplicity of reporting would be a grave impediment to effective and efficient discharge of duties by the CBI. This multiplicity of supervision can be taken care of only by providing more financial, administrative and legal autonomy to the CBI.

They said Section 20 (7) of the Lokpal Bill provided for the extending of police powers to persons who are not police officers, who would be authorised to take a final decision after investigation and filing of police report in the competent court. “This is against the provisions of Section 173 of the Cr PC. In any case, the provisions of Section 173 of the Cr. PC should not be dispensed with. The investigation agencies, including the CBI, must continue to exercise full powers to take a final decision and file a police report before the competent court. The process of investigation, right from registration of FIR till filing of police report, is one single continuous process and a prerogative of only the police, and the integrity of which needs to be protected at all times to ensure quality and fair investigation,” the sources said. Citing a judgement of the Supreme Court in 1968, the sources said the police, and no other authority, should be entitled to forming the final decision in an investigation. The sources said the investigation agency could give a status report to the Lokpal/CVC on the outcome of investigation in respect of Lokpal/CVC-referred matters, as was being done currently in cases referred to the CBI by the courts. Further, they said, a provision could be incorporated to the effect that no court shall take cognisance of any charge sheet against a public servant in a case referred by the Lokpal/CVC, except with the previous sanction of the Lokpal/CVC.

Legal experts term Lokpal quota politically motivated

Some legal experts reckon that reservation in the Lokpal is not in conformity with provisions of the Constitution, and is politically motivated. The former Attorney-General, Soli Sorabjee, and jurist Rajeev Dhavan maintain that it will go against the very principle of reservation, besides leading to litigation, putting a question mark over the efficacy of the legislation. The former Chief Justice of India, V.N. Khare, who welcomed broader representation reflecting the plurality of Indian society, wondered how far reservation in the Lokpal would stand legal scrutiny. Mr. Sorabjee said reservation was meant to empower disadvantaged sections and create a level playing field in employment and education. On the other hand, the Lokpal was meant to check corruption, and reservation in it would not serve any purpose. Such a provision was constitutionally questionable. He maintained that the manner in which the government had provided reservation for the minorities suggested that it was an “election gimmick.” Mr. Dhavan said the inclusion of the minorities was unconstitutional and in a violation of Article 14 of the Constitution, which says there shall be no discrimination on grounds of religion. “It is a political concession, without [any] constitutional basis, motivated by a political class that is unable to cope with stresses and strains of the system. The measure makes no sense from the standpoint of the Constitution or common sense. It is unprecedented and should not have been made.” Justice Khare, who supported the idea, felt that the manner in which the government had phrased it raised doubts about the provision’s ability to stand legal scrutiny. “I can’t say what would happen if it is challenged. At the same time, I believe that the minorities do deserve a place in bodies like the Lokpal on the criteria of economic, educational and social backwardness.” He maintained that the wording in the Bill should have merely said there would be representation to the backward classes, irrespective of their religion, as provided in the subordinate legislation or rule.

Lokpal Bill passed, Constitution Amendment Bill defeated

The Lok Sabha on 27.12.2011 night passed a historic Lokpal and Lokayuktas Bill, 2011, but defeated a parallel Constitution (116th Amendment) Bill, which would have given the Lokpal constitutional status.

In a major embarrassment to the UPA government, Leader of the House Pranab Mukherjee admitted that the government did not have the requisite two-thirds majority to get the Constitution Amendment adopted. “It is a sad day for democracy,” he said.

Rahul upset

After three clauses of the Constitution Amendment Bill were defeated, Speaker Meira Kumar announced that it had fallen and had become “infructuous.” Congress general secretary and MP Rahul Gandhi, who had first proposed that the Lokpal be given constitutional status on the lines of the Election Commission, appeared visibly upset. His idea was also favoured by the report of the Parliamentary Standing Committee on the Lokpal.

The Whistle-blowers Bill (Protection to Persons Making the Disclosures Bill, 2010) was also passed by the Lok Sabha, which literally burnt the midnight oil to complete the legislative business.

After a marathon debate, lasting for over 10 hours, the Lok Sabha passed by voice vote the Bill for creation of the Lokpal.

Fate in Upper House

In the next step, the Bill will have to get the nod from the Rajya Sabha before it goes to the President for her assent. The UPA government does not have a majority in the Upper House and so the fate of the anti-graft Bill will be at the mercy of the Opposition.

The Lokpal and Lokayuktas Bill also saw a number of amendments, moved by the government. One of the key amendments accepted was keeping the defence forces and coast guard personnel out of the purview of the anti-graft ombudsman and increasing the exemption time of former MPs from five to seven years.

SP, BSP walk out

A number of amendments moved by the Opposition, which sought to bring corporates and the media under the Lokpal, were defeated. The Samajwadi Party and the Bahujan Samaj Party staged a walkout, saying their demands were not being met.

In an intervention, Prime Minister Manmohan Singh said a “holistic” approach was needed to deal with the “cancer” of corruption but rejected demands for bringing the CBI within the purview of the Lokpal. No entity should be created inconsistent with the constitutional framework, he cautioned.

Watch! More to come………

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

French breast implant fears spread around world

Friday, December 23rd, 2011

Fears over the safety of breast implants made by a now defunct French firm spread to Australia, South America and across Europe on 22.12.2011 as French officials prepared to decide if thousands of women should have their implants surgically removed.

The silicone gel implants, made by a company called Poly Implant Prothese (PIP) that was shut down in 2010, appear to have an unusually high rupture rate and have sparked an investigation in France into possible links to cancer.

About 300,000 PIP implants, used in cosmetic surgery to enhance breast size or replace lost breast tissue, were sold worldwide before PIP went bust last year.

An investigation into PIP found it was using a type of silicone not approved by health authorities but about 10 times cheaper. The industrial-grade silicone PIP is accused of using is an ingredient in anything from computers to cookware.

“It’s not just France that’s concerned. We’re looking at 300,000 to 400,000 potential victims in the world,” said Alexandra Blachere, leader of a French PIP implant patient group.

She said women from Italy and Spain were in touch with her with worries about their implants and she had seen reports of problems in Venezuela, Brazil and elsewhere.

No one linked to the defunct company was immediately available to comment.

Britain’s Medicines and Healthcare products Regulatory Agency (MHRA) said there was no reason for patients to be alarmed and there was, as yet, no scientific evidence to suggest increased health risks.

MHRA officials said they had talked to other health or regulatory experts from France, the Netherlands, Portugal, Italy, Ireland, Hungary, Austria, Denmark and Malta.

“They all agreed that there was no evidence of any increase in incidents of cancer associated with PIP breast implants and no evidence of any disproportionate rupture rates other than in France,” it said in a statement.

Rupture

Founded in 1991, Poly Implant Prothese was based in southern France and for a while ranked as the world’s number three maker of implants, supplying about 100,000 a year.

About 80 percent were exported abroad. Health authorities around the world said they were watching closely for the results on Friday of an inquiry by France’s National Cancer Institute into whether the implants might be linked to cancer.

France’s Health Ministry is expected to make an announcement on Friday about the institute’s findings.

France has had reports of eight cases of cancer in women with breast implants made by PIP. Britain’s MHRA said there were also French reports of a woman with PIP implants who died from anaplastic large cell lymphoma, or ALCL, a rare form of cancer that affects cells from the immune system.

France’s drug and medical device regulator, AFSSAPS, ruled last year that the state would pay for the removal of all PIP implants but only fund replacements for victims of breast cancer, not women who used them for aesthetic purposes.

A French victims’ association is pushing for the state to pay for replacements for all women with PIP implants.

Australia’s healthcare watchdog, the Therapeutic Goods Administration (TGA), said about 8,900 of the PIP implants were used in Australian women, some of whom had complained about the devices splitting and leaking.

“The TGA has received 45 reports relating to PIP implants, 39 of which relate to rupture,” it said in a statement. It has had no reports of ALCL in Australian women with the implants.

Both the TGA and Britain’s MHRA said they would be looking carefully at the French safety statement on Friday.

Alfred Fitoussi, spokesman for the breast and cancer section of the French Association of Plastic Surgery, told Reuters he expected the report to say there was no cancer risk from the PIP implants. But he noted what he described as an “enormously” high rupture rate of about 10 percent.

“All kinds of tests have been done during many years and never showed any kind of cancer risk from silicone,” he said. “It’s obvious there is a problem with the quality.”

He said the normal rupture rate for breast implants was about 4 or 5 percent.

The MHRA said, based on reports it had so far, about 1 percent of women in Britain with PIP implants have suffered ruptures.

PIP was placed into liquidation in March 2010 with losses of 9 million euros after AFSSAPS recalled its implants when surgeons reported abnormally high rupture rates.

In Argentina, Colombia and Brazil, long a magnet for medical tourists looking for more affordable cosmetic surgery, imports of the implants were banned in April 2010, officials said.

“We know a high percentage of surgeons in Colombia and the rest of South America have used these implants,” said Celso Bohorquez, a spokesman for Colombia’s association of plastic, aesthetic and reconstructive surgery.

Brazil’s Anvisa health inspection agency said 25,000 PIP implants had been used but no complaints had been received so far. In neighboring Argentina, Roberto Lede from the state-run ANMAT drugs regulator said the evidence was “pretty weak” but advised concerned women to consult a doctor.

Legal Limits

Douglas McGeorge, a consultant cosmetic and plastic surgeon and former president of the British Association of Aesthetic Plastic Surgeons, said he expected many patients would want to act sooner rather than wait and risk possible health problems.

A solicitor acting for at least 250 British women taking legal action over their PIP implants said the liquidation of the French company had limited the scope for lawsuits.

“We’re suing about half a dozen clinics that have been involved in implanting the PIP breast implants,” Mark Harvey, a partner at legal firm Hugh James, told Reuters.

“We would have preferred to sue PIP, obviously, but they are bankrupt so they have no money and no assets.”

Amanda Harrison, one of the British women seeking compensation, told Reuters she was disgusted by PIP’s actions.

“It’s sick that they could even think about putting this stuff into a human.” she said. “You wouldn’t even put it in an animal.”

By Kate Kelland

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Japan earthquake and tsunami of 2011

Friday, December 23rd, 2011

Japan earthquake and tsunami of 2011, also called Great Sendai Earthquake or Great Tōhoku Earthquake,   severe earthquake that occurred on March 11, 2011, off the northeastern coast of Honshu, Japan’s main island, causing widespread damage on land and initiating a tsunami that devastated many coastal areas of the country, most notably in the Tōhoku region (northeastern Honshu). The tsunami also instigated a major nuclear accident at a power station along the coast.

The earthquake and tsunami


The magnitude-9.0 earthquake struck at 2:46 pm. (The early estimate of magnitude 8.9 was later revised upward.) The epicentre was located some 80 miles (130 km) east of the city of Sendai, Miyagi prefecture, and the focus occurred at a depth of 18.6 miles (about 30 km) below the floor of the western Pacific Ocean. The earthquake was caused by the rupture of a stretch of the subduction zone associated with the Japan Trench, which separates the Eurasian Plate from the subducting Pacific Plate. (Some geologists argue that this portion of the Eurasian Plate is actually a fragment of the North American Plate called the Okhotsk microplate.) A part of the subduction zone measuring approximately 190 miles (300 km) long by 95 miles (150 km) wide lurched about 65 feet (20 metres) to the southeast and thrusted upward by about 100–130 feet (30–40 metres). The March 11 temblor was felt as far away as Petropavlovsk-Kamchatsky, Russia; Kao-hsiung, Taiwan; and Beijing, China. It was preceded by several foreshocks, including a magnitude-7.2 event centred approximately 25 miles (40 km) away from the epicentre of the main quake. Hundreds of aftershocks, dozens of magnitude 6.0 or greater and two of magnitude 7.0 or greater, followed in the days and weeks after the main quake. The March 11 earthquake was the strongest to strike the region since the beginning of record keeping in the late 19th century, and it is considered to be one of the most powerful earthquakes ever recorded.

The sudden horizontal and vertical thrusting of the Pacific Plate, which has been slowly advancing under the Eurasian Plate near Japan, displaced the water above and spawned a series of highly destructive tsunami waves. A wave measuring some 33 feet (10 metres) high inundated the coast and flooded parts of the city of Sendai, including its airport and the surrounding countryside. According to some reports, one wave penetrated some 6 miles (10 km) inland after causing the Natori River, which separates Sendai from the city of Natori to the south, to overflow. Damaging tsunami waves struck the coasts of Iwate prefecture, just north of Miyagi prefecture, and Fukushima, Ibaraki, and Chiba, the prefectures extending along the Pacific coast south of Miyagi. In addition to Sendai, other communities hard hit by the tsunami included Kamaishi and Miyako in Iwate; Ishinomaki, Kesennuma, and Shiogama in Miyagi; and Kitaibaraki and Hitachinaka in Ibaraki. As the floodwaters retreated back to the sea, they carried with them enormous quantities of debris, as well as thousands of victims caught in the deluge. Large stretches of land also were left submerged under seawater, particularly in lower-lying areas.

The earthquake triggered tsunami warnings throughout the Pacific basin. The tsunami raced outward from the epicentre at speeds that approached about 500 miles (800 km) per hour. It generated waves 11 to 12 feet (3.3 to 3.6 metres) high along the coasts of Kauai and Hawaii in the Hawaiian Islands chain and 5-foot (1.5-metre) waves along the island of Shemya in the Aleutian Islands chain. Several hours later 9-foot (2.7-metre) tsunami waves struck the coasts of California and Oregon in North America. Finally, some 18 hours after the quake, waves roughly 1 foot (0.3 metre) high reached the coast of Antarctica and caused a portion of the Sulzberger Ice Shelf to break off its outer edge.

Aftermath of the disaster

Casualties and property damage

Initial reports of casualties following the tsunami put the death toll in the hundreds, with hundreds more missing. That number in both categories increased dramatically in the following days as the extent of the devastation—especially in coastal areas—became known and rescue operations got under way. Within two weeks of the disaster, the official count of deaths had exceeded 10,000; more than one and a half times that number were still listed as missing and presumed dead. By then it was evident that the earthquake and tsunami had produced one of the deadliest natural disasters in Japanese history, rivaling the major earthquake and tsunami that had occurred off the coast of Iwate prefecture in June 1896. As the search for victims continued, the official count of those confirmed dead or still missing rose to about 28,500. However, as more people thought to be missing were found to be alive, that figure began to drop; by autumn it had been reduced to fewer than 20,000.

Most of those killed were victims of the tsunami waves. Coastal cities and towns as well as vast areas of farmland in the tsunami’s path were inundated by swirling waters that swept enormous quantities of houses, boats, cars, trucks, and other debris along with them. As the extent of the destruction became known, it became clear how many thousands of people were missing—including, in some cases, half or more of a locality’s population. Among those who initially were unaccounted for were people on a ship that was washed away by the tsunami and passengers on several trains reported as missing in Iwate and Miyagi prefectures. The ship was later found (and the people on board rescued), and all trains were located as well.

Although much of the destruction was caused by the tsunami waves along Japan’s Pacific coastline, the earthquake was responsible for considerable damage over a wide area. Notable were fires in several cities, including a petrochemical plant in Sendai, a portion of the city of Kesennuma in Miyagi prefecture, northeast of Sendai, and an oil refinery at Ichihara in Chiba prefecture, near Tokyo. In Fukushima, Ibaraki, and Chiba prefectures thousands of homes were completely or partially destroyed by the temblor and aftershocks. Infrastructure also was heavily affected throughout eastern Tōhoku, as roads and rail lines were damaged, electric power was knocked out, and water and sewerage systems were disrupted. In Fukushima a dam burst close to the prefectural capital of Fukushima city.

Northern Japan’s nuclear emergency

Of significant concern following the main shock and tsunami was the status of several nuclear power stations in the Tōhoku region. The reactors at the three nuclear power plants closest to the quake’s epicentre were shut down automatically following the temblor, which also cut the main power to those plants and their cooling systems. However, inundation by the tsunami waves damaged the backup generators at some of those plants, most notably at the Fukushima Daiichi (“Number One”) plant, situated along the Pacific coast in northeastern Fukushima prefecture about 60 miles (100 km) south of Sendai. With power gone, the cooling systems failed in three reactors within the first few days of the disaster, and their cores subsequently overheated, leading to partial meltdowns of the fuel rods. Melted material fell to the bottom of the containment vessels in reactors 1 and 2 and burned sizable holes through the floor of each vessel, which partially exposed the nuclear material in the cores. Explosions resulting from the buildup of pressurized hydrogen gas in the outer containment buildings enclosing reactors 1, 2, and 3, along with a fire touched off by rising temperatures in spent fuel rods stored in reactor 4, led to the release of significant levels of radiation from the facility in the days and weeks following the earthquake. Workers sought to cool and stabilize the damaged reactors by pumping seawater and boric acid into them.

Because of concerns over possible radiation exposure, Japanese officials established an 18-mile (30-km) no-fly zone around the facility, and an area of 12.5 miles (20 km) around the plant was evacuated. The evacuation zone was later extended to the 18-mile no-fly radius, within which residents were asked to leave or remain indoors. The appearance of increased levels of radiation in some local food and water supplies prompted officials in Japan and overseas to issue warnings about their consumption. At the end of March, seawater near the Daiichi facility was discovered to have been contaminated with high levels of radioactive iodine-131. The contamination stemmed from the exposure of pumped-in seawater to radiation inside the facility; this water later leaked into the ocean through cracks in water-filled trenches and tunnels between the facility and the ocean.

In mid-April Japanese nuclear regulators elevated the severity level of the nuclear emergency at the Fukushima Daiichi facility from 5 to 7—the highest level on the scale created by the International Atomic Energy Agency—placing the Fukushima accident in the same category as the Chernobyl accident, which had occurred in the Soviet Union in 1986. Several months after the Fukushima disaster, radiation levels remained high in the evacuation zone, and government officials remarked that the area may be uninhabitable for decades. However, they also announced that radiation levels had declined in five towns located just beyond the original 12.5-mile evacuation zone; these levels had become low enough that government officials felt comfortable allowing residents to return to their homes.

Relief efforts

In the first hours after the earthquake, Japanese Prime Minister Kan Naoto moved to set up an emergency command centre in Tokyo, and a large number of rescue workers and some 100,000 members of the Japanese Self-Defense Force were rapidly mobilized to deal with the crisis. In addition, the Japanese government requested that U.S. military personnel stationed in the country be available to help in relief efforts, and a U.S. Navy aircraft carrier was dispatched to the area. Several countries, including Australia, China, India, New Zealand, South Korea, and the United States, sent search-and-rescue teams, and dozens of other countries and major international relief organizations such as theRed Cross and Red Crescent pledged financial and material support to Japan. In addition, a large number of private and nongovernmental organizations within Japan and worldwide soon established relief funds to aid victims and assist with rescue and recovery efforts.

The rescue work itself was hampered initially by the difficulty in getting personnel and supplies to the devastation zone; compounding the difficulty were periods of inclement weather that curtailed air operations. Workers in the disaster zones then faced widespread seas of destruction: vast areas, even whole towns and cities, had been washed away or covered by great piles of mud and debris. Although some people were rescued from the rubble in the first several days following the main shock and tsunami, most of the relief work involved the recovery of bodies, including hundreds that began washing ashore in several areas after having been swept out to sea.

In the immediate aftermath of the disaster, several hundred thousand people were in shelters, often with limited or negligible supplies of food or water, and tens of thousands more remained stranded and isolated in the worst-hit areas as rescuers worked to reach them. Within days the number of displaced people in the Fukushima area grew as the situation with the nuclear reactors on the coast deteriorated and people left the quarantined area. Gradually many people were able to find other places to stay in the Tōhoku area, or they relocated to other parts of the country; some quarter million people were still in hundreds of shelters in the region two weeks after the quake, but in the ensuing months after the disaster that number gradually was reduced by more than two-thirds. Tens of thousands of these displaced residents were living in some 50,000 prefabricated temporary housing units that had been set up in Sendai and other tsunami-damaged locations.

In the weeks following the disaster, much of northern Honshu’s transportation and services infrastructure was at least partially restored, and repairs continued until train lines and major highways were again fully operational. However, the region’s power supply continued to be affected by the ongoing situation at the Fukushima plant, resulting in temporary power outages and rolling blackouts. The loss of businesses and factories from earthquake and tsunami damage, as well as the uncertainties surrounding the power supply, severely reduced the region’s post-disaster manufacturing output. Industries most affected included those producing semiconductors and other high-technology items and automobiles.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

Steve Jobs to get Grammy for revolutionizing Music

Friday, December 23rd, 2011

Steve Jobs

The accolades for Steve Jobs, who died Oct 5, are still pouring in. The Recording Academy said on 21.12.2011 it is giving the co-founder of Apple a special “Trustees Award” Grammy. The Grammys, of course, are the top honors in the U.S. music industry.

“As former CEO and co-founder of Apple, Steve Jobs helped create products and technology that transformed the way we consume music, TV, movies, and books,” the Recording Academy said in a statement.

“A creative visionary, Jobs’ innovations such as the iPod and its counterpart, the online iTunes store, revolutionized the industry and how music was distributed and purchased,” the statement added.

A formal acknowledgment of his award will be made during annual Grammy Awards ceremony on February 12 in Los Angeles.

In 2002, Apple was a recipient of a technical Grammy award for contributions of outstanding technical significance to the recording field.

Steve Jobs

Steve Jobs, in full Steven Paul Jobs (born February 24, 1955, San Francisco, California, U.S.—died October 5, 2011, Palo Alto, California), cofounder of Apple Computer, Inc. (now Apple Inc.), and a charismatic pioneer of the personal computer era.

Founding of Apple

Jobs was raised by adoptive parents in Cupertino, Calif., located in what is now known as Silicon Valley. Though he was interested in engineering, his passions of youth varied. He dropped out of Reed College, in Portland, Ore., took a job at Atari Corporation as a video game designer in early 1974, and saved enough money for a pilgrimage to India to experience Buddhism.

Back in Silicon Valley in the autumn of 1974, Jobs reconnected with Stephen Wozniak, a former high school friend who was working for the Hewlett-Packard Company. When Wozniak told Jobs of his progress in designing his own computer logic board, Jobs suggested that they go into business together, which they did after Hewlett-Packard formally turned down Wozniak’s design in 1976. The Apple I, as they called the logic board, was built in the Jobses’ family garage with money they obtained by selling Jobs’s Volkswagen minibus and Wozniak’s programmable calculator.

Jobs was one of the first entrepreneurs to understand that the personal computer would appeal to a broad audience, at least if it did not appear to belong in a junior high school science fair. With Jobs’s encouragement, Wozniak designed an improved model, the Apple II, complete with a keyboard, and they arranged to have a sleek, molded plastic case manufactured to enclose the unit.

Though Jobs had long, unkempt hair and eschewed business garb, he managed to obtain financing, distribution, and publicity for the company, Apple Computer, incorporated in 1977—the same year that the Apple II was completed. The machine was an immediate success, becoming synonymous with the boom in personal computers. In 1981 the company had a record-setting public stock offering and, in 1983, made the quickest entrance (to that time) into the Fortune 500 list of America’s top companies. In 1983 the company recruited PepsiCo, Inc., president John Sculley to be its chief executive officer (CEO) and, implicitly, Jobs’s mentor in the fine points of running a large corporation. Jobs had convinced Sculley to accept the position by challenging him: “Do you want to sell sugar water for the rest of your life?” The line was shrewdly effective, but it also revealed Jobs’s own near-messianic belief in the computer revolution.

Insanely Great

During that same period, Jobs was heading the most important project in the company’s history. In 1979 he led a small group of Apple engineers to a technology demonstration at the Xerox Corporation’s Palo Alto Research Center (PARC) to see how the graphical user interface could make computers easier to use and more efficient. Soon afterward, Jobs left the engineering team that was designing Lisa, a business computer, to head a smaller group building a lower-cost computer. Both computers were redesigned to exploit and refine the PARC ideas, but Jobs was explicit in favouring the Macintosh, or Mac, as the new computer became known. Jobs coddled his engineers and referred to them as artists, but his style was uncompromising; at one point he demanded a redesign of an internal circuit board simply because he considered it unattractive. He would later be renowned for his insistence that the Macintosh be not merely great but “insanely great.” In January 1984 Jobs himself introduced the Macintosh in a brilliantly choreographed demonstration that was the centrepiece of an extraordinary publicity campaign. It would later be pointed to as the archetype of “event marketing.”

However, the first Macs were underpowered and expensive, and they had few software applications—all of which resulted in disappointing sales. Apple steadily improved the machine, so that it eventually became the company’s lifeblood as well as the model for all subsequent computer interfaces. But Jobs’s apparent failure to correct the problem quickly led to tensions in the company, and in 1985 Sculley convinced Apple’s board of directors to remove the company’s famous cofounder.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Large Hadron Collider (LHC)

Thursday, December 22nd, 2011

Large Hadron Collider (LHC), is the world’s most powerful particle accelerator. The LHC was constructed by the European Organization for Nuclear Research (CERN) in the same 27-km (17-mile) tunnel that housed its Large Electron-Positron Collider (LEP). The tunnel is circular and is located 50–175 metres (165–575 feet) below ground, on the border between France and Switzerland. The LHC ran its first test operation on Sept. 10, 2008. An electrical problem in a cooling system on September 18 resulted in a temperature increase of about 100 °C (180 °F) in the magnets, which are meant to operate at temperatures near absolute zero (−273.15 °C, or −459.67 °F). Early estimates that the LHC would be quickly fixed soon turned out to be overly optimistic; it restarted on Nov. 20, 2009. Shortly thereafter, on Nov. 30, 2009, it supplanted the Fermi National Accelerator Laboratory’s Tevatron as the most powerful particle accelerator, when it boosted protons to energies of 1.18 teraelectron volts (TeV; 1 × 1012 electron volts). In March 2010 scientists at CERN announced that a problem with the design of superconducting wire in the LHC required that the collider could only run at half-energy (7 TeV) until the end of 2011. The LHC is scheduled to be shut down in 2012 to fix the problem and is expected to run at its full energy of 14 TeV in 2013.

The heart of the LHC is a ring that runs through the circumference of the LEP tunnel; the ring is only a few centimetres in diameter, evacuated to a higher degree than deep space and cooled to within two degrees of absolute zero. In this ring, two counter-rotating beams of heavy ions or protons are accelerated to speeds within one millionth of a percent of the speed of light. (Protons belong to a category of heavy subatomic particles known as hadrons, which accounts for the name of this particle accelerator.) At four points on the ring, the beams can intersect and a small proportion of particles crash into each other. At maximum power, collisions between protons will take place at a combined energy of up to 14 TeV, about seven times greater than has been achieved previously. At each collision point are huge magnets weighing tens of thousands of tons and banks of detectors to collect the particles produced by the collisions.

The project took a quarter of a century to realize; planning began in 1984, and the final go-ahead was granted in 1994. Thousands of scientists and engineers from dozens of countries were involved in designing, planning, and building the LHC, and the cost for materials and manpower was nearly $5 billion; this does not include the cost of running experiments and computers.

One goal of the LHC project is to understand the fundamental structure of matter by recreating the extreme conditions that occurred in the first few moments of the universe according to the big bang model. For decades physicists have used the so-called standard model for fundamental particles, which has worked well but has weaknesses. First, and most important, it does not explain why some particles have mass. In the 1960s British physicist Peter Higgs postulated a particle that had interacted with other particles at the beginning of time to provide them with their mass. The Higgs particle has never been observed—it should be produced only by collisions in an energy range not available for experiments before the LHC. Second, the standard model requires some arbitrary assumptions, which some physicists have suggested may be resolved by postulating a further class of supersymmetric particles—these might be produced by the extreme energies of the LHC. Finally, examination of asymmetries between particles and their antiparticles may provide a clue to another mystery: the imbalance between matter and antimatter in the universe.

As with all groundbreaking experiments, the most exciting results may well be unexpected ones. As British physicist Stephen Hawking said, “It is more exciting if we don’t find the Higgs. That will show that something is wrong and we need to think again.”

By David G.C. Jones

Large Hadron Collider finds new variant of particle – 24.12.2011

The Large Hadron Collider (LHC), famously engaged in the quest for the Higgs boson, has turned up a heavier variant of a sub-atomic particle first discovered a quarter-century ago, scientists reported on 23.12.2011.

Newcomer

The newcomer is called Chi-b(3P), which was uncovered in the debris from colliding protons, according to research published in the open-access online journal arxiv. Like the elusive Higgs and the photon, it is a boson, meaning it is a particle that carries force. But while the Higgs is not believed to be made of smaller particles, the Chi-b(3) comprises two relatively heavy particles, the beauty quark and its anti-quark. They are bonded by the so-called “strong” force which also causes the atomic nucleus to stick together. The Chi-b(3P) is a heavier version of a particle that was first observed around 25 years ago. “The Chi-b(3P) is a particle that was predicted by many theorists, but was not observed at previous experiments,” said James Walder, a British physicist quoted by the University of Birmingham in a press release. Described by some as the world’s largest machine, the LHC is located in a 27-km ring-shaped tunnel near Geneva that straddles the Franco-Swiss border up to 580 feet below ground. Streams of protons are fired in opposite, but parallel, directions in the tunnel.

Powerful magnets

The beams are then bent by powerful magnets so that some of the protons collide in four giant labs, which are lined with detectors to record the sub-atomic debris that results. On December 13, physicists at the European Organisation for Nuclear Research (CERN) said they had narrowed the search for the Higgs — the so-called “God particle” that may confer mass. The theory behind the Higgs is that mass does not derive from particles themselves. Instead, it comes from a boson that interacts strongly with some particles but less, if at all, with others. Finding the Chi-b(3P) is a further test of the powers of the LHC, which became the world’s biggest particle collider when it was completed in 2008. “Our new measurements are a great way to test theoretical calculations of the forces that act on fundamental particles, and will move us a step closer to understanding how the Universe is held together,” said Miram Watson, a British research fellow working on the CHi-b(3) investigation.

Holy grail of particle physics – The Hindu Editorial dt 24.12.2011

Physicists like to describe nature in the simplest and most elegant theoretical framework. A significant development towards such a description of the sub-atomic world during the 1970s was the unification of disparate forces of nature (excluding gravity) in a single theoretical framework. But this unification came at a price. The elegant mathematical symmetry that made it possible required all elementary particles to be massless, which is not the real world we know. So the underlying universal symmetry had to be ‘broken’ to some degree for particles to have a range of masses and forces to have different strengths, and yet described by a single theory. This was achieved through the introduction of a hypothetical particle called Higgs — after Peter Higgs who proposed it — and an associated force. One can imagine Higgs as an all-pervasive ether-like force-field, which endows particles with mass (or inertia) because of the drag that the field exerts as particles move through space. This model of the universe, called the Standard Model (SM), seems to be along the right lines; this is so particularly after the discovery during the 1980s of particles W and Z — the carriers of the weak nuclear force just as the massless photon carries the electromagnetic force — with masses exactly as predicted by SM (about 100 times the mass of the proton). Since then the model has held up superbly in experimental tests. But Higgs itself has remained elusive and is the only missing piece in this otherwise enormously successful theory. The model itself does not predict a mass for the Higgs. So, for the last three decades physicists have been combing the entire energy ranges available to particle accelerators for signatures of Higgs in the decays of particles produced in these high-energy particle collisions. With the advent in 2009 of the highest energy accelerator, the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) at CERN, Geneva, which opened up a new energy domain, hopes of discovering Higgs have been high.

A discovery in particle physics is a long, painstaking process. It requires sifting through data related to trillions of collisions and picking out a statistically significant signal that stands out as an excess over the background of events from other processes that mimic a decaying Higgs. Two entirely independent experiments at CERN, ATLAS and CMS, have seen an excess of events that are attributable to Higgs. By summer, these experiments had excluded vast regions of mass where Higgs could exist, leaving just a narrow window. The latest results, announced on December 13, have squeezed the window further to around 125 times the mass of a proton. Since two independent experiments have arrived at the same conclusions, these are tantalising signals — but not good enough to be called a discovery. At present there is just about one per cent chance of the excess being due to fluctuations in the background. The golden rule for discovery in particle physics is that such a chance should be less than one in a million. A definitive statement on the existence or non-existence of Higgs requires more LHC data running through 2012. If Higgs does not show up even then, there will be an upheaval in the current understanding of the sub-atomic world, with the crucial question on the origin of mass remaining unanswered. But that, as we have seen before in the history of physics, is only likely to throw up even more revolutionary ideas.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Medical exams need to be as rigorous as in U.K

Thursday, December 22nd, 2011

Dr. Jane Dacre, Consultant Physician and Rheumatologist, Professor of Medical Education and Director of the UCL Medical School, London, was in Chennai recently in connection with the examination of candidates seeking MRCP certification. In an interview to Education Plus, The Hindu that was moderated by Dr. Georgi Abraham, Professor of Medicine, Pondicherry Institute of Medical Sciences and Governing Council Member – International Society of Nephrology, she highlighted some aspects of medical education that need reform in India. Excerpts.

What are the issues in medical education today, with particular reference to evaluation of students through examinations?

Some of the issues are actually about using the best available evidence in medical education and assessment practice. There is a body of evidence about medical education and exams now — the scientific underpinning of medical education has become much more professional, and we now have statistical data that show how good or bad an individual exam question is, and how good or bad a whole exam is. We have taken this into account in the design of the MRCP examination.

There is strong evidence, for example that the viva examination is unreliable. The evidence shows that if the examiner likes the look of a candidate when they come in for a viva, they think that candidate is marvellous, however well he answers the questions, and if the examiner doesn’t like the candidate, whatever the quality of his answer, the examiner is less impressed.

The way to make things fairer would be to make viva questions more standardised, and to sample a bigger proportion of the candidate’s knowledge. Also, we no longer use vivas in the MRCP clinical examination (PACES).

The practice of medicine is slightly different even though we follow the British system in India. How will that influence the new system of examination, of teaching and impact of that on patient care?

The adoption of best policy in medical education has allowed us to provide an overall structure for the examination, and the specific medical content has to be provided locally. The content of the questions, and (decisions on) what questions are appropriate for your community, are very different from ours. We were looking today at snakebites and rabies in India, while in London, we don’t get any snake bites or rabies. But the principles of asking candidates to describe what they would do in a situation, getting them to demonstrate it in a simulated situation, are common to both health systems. The scenarios we use in the examination can be very locality specific.

We do not use such scenarios in the medical examination system in India. You are directly asked, for example, what do you hear, what murmur do you hear in a patient? How big is the murmur? Some may say it is a short murmur, others may say it is a long murmur. It depends on the fancy of the examiner to decide what the murmur is and judge the candidate on that. What you said is totally different. You need to understand the student, what he knows, and ask him questions on what he knows, not on what he does not know in the common practice of medicine. Is that right?

The examiner wants the students to demonstrate their skills. Not just to tell the examiner what they know. Candidates may be very knowledgeable, and I think the trainees here do know an enormous amount, but they cannot always demonstrate that they are able to put their knowledge into practice. In our MRCP clinical exam, we observe the candidates putting their clinical examination skills into practice. Knowing how to work out what the causes of the particular condition could be, is not enough. Candidates need to be able to examine a patient correctly, identify the physical signs and diagnose the conditions. They also need to know the most common causes, and be able to discuss what to do about it. This includes how the condition should be investigated and treated, and how the doctor should communicate the diagnosis to the patient.

But that is not the system that exists here…

Yes. It is not what some of the local candidates expect, it resembles what they do in their clinical practice rather than what they expect in an examination.

As an examiner, while assessing, you should look into the local practices, conditions, and diseases that exist in that community, the investigations relevant to that, and the treatments?

Yes. Although there is less leeway for a good examiner in the MRCP PACES examination than there currently is in the traditional clinical examinations that you have in India. The good examiner, however, should have a clear idea about local practices, about what is appropriate for candidates to know, and what isn’t because that information has been given beforehand.

On admissions to medical school, what are your views?

In the U.K. now, we have highly standardised and fair methods of assessment to go into medical school and postgraduate medical courses. The old-fashioned patronage cannot happen. If my son wanted to be a doctor and had missed the grade, I would not be able to get him into medical school. It is absolutely based on merit.

Why do you need 10 examiners to assess a candidate, why can’t you have only two or three or four at the most, as in our country?

Because, if you have an examiner who either knows a candidate or likes a candidate for a particular reason, then he is more likely to favour that candidate. But if you have a number of different assessors looking at the candidate using a more objective marking schedule, then you make it fairer and minimise bias.

In our examination system we don’t have a timeline. The examiner can ask questions as long as he wants and the student must sit there according to the fancy and direction of the examiner. You have established a system, where there is a time limit and you cannot go beyond that. Which is the better system?

There is an intrinsic unfairness in allowing any variability in the time allowed per candidate. Depending on what you think of the candidate, you may take a longer or shorter time to assess them. This means the candidate will have more or less time to demonstrate what they know. The PACES exam (the MRCP Part 2 clinical examination) structure is standardised so that it gives every candidate the same opportunity to demonstrate their knowledge and skills. Certainly in the U.K., and in the U.S. and lots of places internationally, that is thought to be a more appropriate system. The downside of it is that if you have a really fantastic candidate who is a just a pleasure to be with, the enjoyment for the examiner is less. We had to remind examiners when we introduced the PACES that this exam is for the candidate, and for our patients, and the enjoyment of the examiner takes a back seat.

What would you think about when you see different countries in the world, different candidates, cultures and practices? Is your system of assessment uniform? How does one avoid discrimination based on ethnic and cultural aspects?

It is a difficult question. We do have evidence that candidates overseas who take the examination in the U.K. do less well in our assessment, but we do not know why.

What we do know is that the MRCP assessment system is robust. What perhaps would be best in the long term is to introduce more locally specific conditions for candidates to be tested on. The MRCP is a U.K.-based exam, and therefore our rules are currently based on the U.K. health system. It is astounding to me how well overseas graduates do considering that they are taking an exam that wasn’t designed for their country.

At the undergraduate level, I think it would be appropriate to introduce the examination rigour that we have in the U.K., but also to make the examination locally specific to your own candidates, An exam needs to reflect the curriculum which has been taught. I assume you have your curriculum written down and therefore, you need to turn your curriculum into a blueprint which is a sampling grid of the areas where you expect your candidates to perform in. The examination could be based on that sampling grid.

Candidates taking the MRCP examination in India examine the local patients, and candidates in Britain may be seeing patients from Britain who may not be Indians or Asians for that matter. Do you think that will influence the assessment of candidates and in the long run will not be a rational way?

I think that in the long-term our objective would be to have more locally appropriate centres in India, the expense and the cultural issues such as the need to learn English or Scottish law to be able to pass an assessment in the U.K. should not be necessary for international candidates.

Do you think in two years you would have to modify your MRCP examination to suit new technologies and medications?

We have written components to the examination. We spend a lot of time ensuring that U.K. national guidelines are incorporated, as medicine is a constantly changing field. So we modify the questions all the time to make sure we are up to date.

Courtesy: The Hindu

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

North Korean leader Kim Jong-il is dead

Monday, December 19th, 2011

Kim


North Korean leader Kim Jong-il, revered at home by a propaganda machine that turned him into a demi-god and vilified in the West as a temperamental tyrant with a nuclear arsenal, has died on 17.12.2012.

North Korean leader Kim Jong-il died of a heart attack while on a train trip, state media reported on Monday, sparking immediate concern over who is in control of the reclusive state and its nuclear programme. He had suffered a stroke in 2008, but appeared to have recovered. North Korea’s official KCNA news agency said he died at 8:30 a.m. on Saturday, 17.12.2011 (2330 GMT on Friday) after “an advanced acute myocardial infarction, complicated with a serious heart shock”.

Kim Jong-il who has died aged 69, was the general secretary of the Workers party of Korea, and head of the military in the Democratic People’s Republic of Korea (DPRK). He was one of the most reclusive and widely condemned national leaders of the late 20th and early 21st century, leaving his country diplomatically isolated, economically broken, and divided from South Korea.

Unsurprisingly for a man who went into mourning for three years after the 1994 death of his own father, the legendary leader Kim Il-sung, and who in the first 30 years of his political career made no public statements, even to his own people, Kim’s career is riddled with claims, counter claims, speculation, and contradiction. There are few hard facts about his birth and early years.

The DPRK propagated an extraordinary tale of his birth occurring on Mount Baekdu, one of Korea’s most revered sites, being accompanied by shooting stars in the sky. It is more likely that he was born in a small village in the USSR, while his father was serving as a Soviet-backed general during the second world war.

Kim’s early life was spent in the shadows of a self-created legend, his father Kim Il-sung, who was to return to Korea in 1945 after independence from Japan, and establish, initially with Soviet and Chinese support, the DPRK. His brother and mother were both to die before he was eight. He was to witness the Korean War from 1950 to 1953, which saw hundreds of thousands of Koreans, Chinese, and Americans as part of a UN force battle across the country, returning almost to the point at which they had started. The armistice signed in 1953 settled the border between South and North Korea at the 38th Parallel.

With the descent of the cold war, relations between the two countries (for this is, to all intents and purposes, what they became after the end of the war) were almost completely broken off, with whole families split for the ensuing decades, some for ever. This event and its after-effects, along with the war against the Japanese in the 1940s, was to cast a long shadow over the years ahead, and led to the creation of the wholly unprecedented worship of Kim Il-sung, and his elevation to almost God-like status. It was also to create the system in which his son was to occupy almost as impossibly elevated a position.

Kim was educated at the newly founded university in Pyongyang, named after his father, graduating in 1964. The 1960s and early 1970s were the golden years for the DPRK. It undertook rapid industrialisation, economically outstripped its southern competitor, and enjoyed the support of both the People’s Republic of China, and the Soviet Union. A state ideology, mixing nationalism, and basic Marxist economics, going under the name “Juche” was constructed, and Kim Il-sung effectively silenced, disposed of and cleared away any opposition, isolating the country, and exercising an iron grip on the military, the state media, and the government and party organs.

Kim Jong-il’s early career within the party was spent dealing with propaganda. He had a life-long interest in film, and indeed wrote a treatise, On Cinema, which was to attain the status of canonical truth after his father’s death, along with all of his other utterances. In 1973 he became party secretary of the propaganda department, and, in 1974, was designated his father’s successor, creating in effect the world’s first communist family succession. In 1980 he was elevated to the Politburo, and was granted the epitaph “Dear Leader”, as opposed to “Great Leader”, which had been granted by his father to himself. In 1991, he was named Commander of the DPRK armed forces. The death of his father in 1994 led to his ultimately being appointed general secretary of the Korean Workers Party, the ultimate seat of power. His father was to maintain his position as “eternal president”, and to this day, the DPRK enjoys a head of state who has been dead since 1994.

There is great controversy over the extent of Kim’s powers and influence in the latter years of his father’s long period in power. To some historians, Kim was no more than his father’s puppet, and had no real basis for power in the party, which explains the bitter years from 1994 in which he disappeared from view, waging a long battle for legitimacy within the party and army. To others, he was a negative, malevolent influence over his father from the 1970s onwards, when North Korean began its long and tragic descent into economic depravation, isolation, starvation and poverty.

By 1980, South Korea had overtaken its northern neighbour, and was well on its way to being one of the Asian tigers – high performing economies, with democratic movements ultimately winning power in the 1990s. The withdrawal of most Soviet aid in 1991, with the fall of the Soviet empire, pushed North Korea further down. Kim Il-sung had held a genuine place on North Korean people’s affections. His son was regarded as a shadowy playboy, with rumours circulating over the years that he imported Russian and Chinese prostitutes, and lived a life of profligacy and excess.

More worrying for the international community were the clear connections between Kim and the bombing of a South Korean plane in 1987 which killed 115 people, and the murder by bombing of 17 South Korean officials while on a visit to Burma in 1983. Kim’s admissions, years later, when he met Prime Minister of Japan Junichiro Koizumi in 2002 that he also had knowledge of the abduction of over a dozen Japanese in the 1970s and 1980s only added to his image as a shadowy, evil character.

This is an oversimplification. Kim was to inherit the very worst legacy of the cold war, in a country torn apart by colonialisation and war, a bitter historical residue which lingers to this day. While he may have had influence on his father, the economic template for the country was set in the 1950s and 1960s, long before he had any say. Its unsustainability only became clear in the very final years of Kim Il-sung’s life. And Kim Jong-il finally had to deal with a complex network of interests in the army and party after his father’s death, something which, combined with the immediate impact of bad harvests, created the terrible famines that claimed up to one million North Korean lives from 1995 to 1999. The official state information agency issued a statement, after the worst of this period was over in 2001, saying that North Korea had stood “on the crossroads of life and death”.

North Korea had signed an agreement in 1993, brokered by a visit by former US President Jimmy Carter, to stop its nuclear programme in return for help in building two power-generating nuclear reactors. Disagreements on both sides meant the reactors were not built, and North Korea progressed towards its own nuclear programme in 2003. A brief thaw in relations between the US and the DPRK at the end of the Clinton presidency in 2000 saw high level visits on both sides, but the George W Bush era saw this momentarily stopped, before North Korea was encouraged back to the negotiating table as part of what were called the Six Party Talks from 2006 onwards.

The election of President Barak Obama in 2008 served to provoke a period of harsh rhetoric, nuclear testing, missile launches, and diplomatic aggression uncharacterstic even for the DPRK. Kim was rumoured to have suffered a stroke in late 2008, incapicitating him. This may have forced him to nominate his youngest son as his successor, though there is precious little firm evidence both for when, why, or even if this decision was made.

Kim Jong-il travelled little, and only ever in a train. He visited Russia and China, and had been to Indonesia. He was reputed to have some 30,000 American films in his personal library, and was one of the world’s main customers for luxury cognac. According to a Japanese chef who worked for him in the 1980s and 1990s, he had a connoisseur’s understanding of the finest cuts of raw fish. While officially married only once, he had a number of “recognised” mistresses, with whom he fathered several children. International politicians that met him were impressed by his factual memory and his quick and easy wit. But there is little dispute about his responsibility for a system which saw widespread human rights abuses and perhaps the worst record for press freedom and government transparency in the world.

He is survived by his wife, Kim Young Suk, one daughter and three officially recognised sons.

Kim Jong-il, politician, born February 16 1941; died December 2011.

“Young general” seen poised to take over North Korea dynasty.

Kim Jong-un

His designated successor is believed to be his third son, Kim Jong-un, who is thought to be in his late 20s. Young and inexperienced, Kim Jong-un is seen as poised to take over North Korea with the death of his father and extend the Kim dynasty’s rule over the reclusive state for a third generation.

Not much is known about the younger Kim, not even his age, though his father, Kim Jong-il, and his autocratic regime had begun making preparations for the son’s transition to power.

Thought to be aged around 27, Kim Jong-un Had already been made a four-star general and occupied a prominent political post when he was reported to have made an important diplomatic visit to neighbouring China in May this year.

Educated in Switzerland, he is thought to speak English and German, and bears a striking resemblance to his grandfather, the North’s founder, Kim Il-sung.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Vaclav Havel, leader of “Velvet Revolution”, former Czech President, is dead

Monday, December 19th, 2011

Vaclav-Havel

Vaclav Havel, an anti-Communist playwright, who became Czech President and a worldwide symbol of peace and freedom after leading the bloodless “Velvet Revolution”, died at the age of 75 on 16.12.2011.

Czechs joined their leaders and foreign politicians 16.12.2011 in paying tribute to Vaclav Havel, who led the 1989 Velvet Revolution that peacefully toppled communism in the former Czechoslovakia.

A black flag flew over Prague Castle, the presidential seat, while Czechs lit candles to remember the the dissident playwright who helped kick off the fall of the Iron Curtain and then served as president of Czechoslovakia, and later the Czech Republic.

“Mr. President, thank you for democracy,” read a note placed at the monument to the revolution in downtown Prague.

Havel, the dissident playwright who wove theater into politics to peacefully bring down communism in Czechoslovakia and become a hero of the epic struggle that ended the Cold War, died Sunday morning at his weekend house. He was 75.

He was comforted in his last moments by his wife Dagmar and several nuns, Reuters reported.

Havel was his country’s first democratically elected president after the nonviolent “Velvet Revolution” that ended four decades of repression by a regime he ridiculed as “Absurdistan.”

As president, he oversaw the country’s bumpy transition to democracy and a free-market economy, as well its peaceful 1993 breakup into the Czech Republic and Slovakia.

Even out of office, the diminutive Czech remained a world figure. He was part of the “new Europe” — in the coinage of then-U.S. Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld — of ex-communist countries that stood up for the U.S. when the democracies of “old Europe” opposed the 2003 Iraq invasion.

A former chain-smoker, Havel had a history of chronic respiratory problems dating back to his years in communist jails. He was hospitalized in Prague on Jan. 12, 2009, with an unspecified inflammation, and had developed breathing difficulties after undergoing minor throat surgery.

‘Truth and love must prevail’

Havel left office in 2003, 10 years after Czechoslovakia broke up and just months before both nations joined the European Union. He was credited with laying the groundwork that brought his Czech Republic into the 27-nation bloc, and was president when it joined NATO in 1999.

Shy and bookish, with wispy mustache and unkempt hair, Havel came to symbolize the power of the people to peacefully overcome totalitarian rule.

“Truth and love must prevail over lies and hatred,” Havel famously said. It became his revolutionary motto which he said he always strove to live by.

Havel was nominated several times for the Nobel Peace Prize, and collected dozens of other accolades worldwide for his efforts as a global ambassador of conscience, defended the downtrodden from Darfur to Myanmar.

Among his many honors were Sweden’s prestigious Olof Palme Prize and the Presidential Medal of Freedom, the highest U.S. civilian award, bestowed on him by President George W. Bush for being “one of liberty’s great heroes.”

An avowed peacenik whose heroes included rockers such as Frank Zappa, he never quite shed his flower-child past and often signed his name with a small heart as a flourish.

In an October 2008 interview with The Associated Press, Havel rebuked Russia for invading Georgia two months earlier, and warned EU leaders against appeasing Moscow. “We should not turn a blind eye … It’s a big test for the West,” he said. Havel also said he saw the global economic crisis as a warning not to abandon basic human values in the scramble to prosper. “It’s a warning against the idea that we understand the world, that we know how everything works,” he told the AP in his office in Prague. The cramped work space was packed with his books, plays and rock memorabilia.

Underground essays

Havel first made a name for himself after the 1968 Soviet-led invasion that crushed the Prague Spring reforms of Alexander Dubcek and other liberally minded communists in what was then Czechoslovakia.

Havel’s plays were banned as hard-liners installed by Moscow snuffed out every whiff  of rebellion. But he continued to write, producing a series of underground essays that stand with the work of Soviet dissident Andrei Sakharov as the most incisive and eloquent analyses of what communism did to society and the individual. One of his best-known essays, “The Power and the Powerless” written in 1978, borrowed slyly from the immortal opening line of the mid-19th century Communist Manifesto, writing: “A specter is haunting eastern Europe: the specter of what in the West is called ‘dissent.’”

In the essay, he dissected what he called the “dictatorship of ritual” — the ossified Soviet bloc system under Leonid Brezhnev — and imagined what happens when an ordinary greengrocer stops displaying communist slogans and begins “living in truth,” rediscovering “his suppressed identity and dignity.”

Born Oct. 5, 1936, in Prague, the child of a wealthy family which lost extensive property to communist nationalization in 1948, Havel was denied a formal education, eventually earning a degree at night school and starting out in theater as a stagehand.

His political activism began in earnest in January 1977, when he co-authored the human rights manifesto Charter 77, and the cause drew widening attention in the West.

Havel was detained countless times and spent four years in communist jails. His letters from prison to his wife became one of his best-known works. “Letters to Olga” blended deep philosophy with a stream of stern advice to the spouse he saw as his mentor and best friend, and who tolerated his reputed philandering and other foibles.

The events of August 1988 — the 20th anniversary of the Warsaw Pact invasion — first suggested that Havel and his friends might one day replace the faceless apparatchiks who jailed them.

Thousands of mostly young people marched through central Prague, yelling Havel’s name and that of the playwright’s hero, Tomas Garrigue Masaryk, the philosopher who was Czechoslovakia’s first president after it was founded in 1918.

Havel’s arrest in January 1989 at another street protest and his subsequent trial generated anger at home and abroad. Pressure for change was so strong that the communists released him again in May.

That fall, communism began to collapse across Eastern Europe, and in November the Berlin Wall fell. Eight days later, communist police brutally broke up a demonstration by thousands of Prague students.

It was the signal that Havel and his country had awaited. Within 48 hours, a broad new opposition movement was founded, and a day later, hundreds of thousands of Czechs and Slovaks took to the streets.

In three heady weeks, communist rule was broken. Mick Jagger and the Rolling Stones arrived just as the Soviet army was leaving. Posters in Prague proclaimed: “The tanks are rolling out — the Stones are rolling in.”

On Dec. 29, 1989, Havel was elected Czechoslovakia’s president by the country’s still-communist parliament. Three days later, he told the nation in a televised New Year’s address: “Out of gifted and sovereign people, the regime made us little screws in a monstrously big, rattling and stinking machine.”

Moral voice

Although he continued to be regarded a moral voice as he decried the shortcomings of his society under democracy, he eventually bent to the dictates of convention and power. His watchwords — “what the heart thinks, the tongue speaks” — had to be modified for day-to-day politics. And post-revolutionary life contained many challenges.

In July 1992, it became clear that the Czechoslovak federation was heading for a split. Considering it a personal failure, Havel resigned as president. But he remained popular and was elected president of the new Czech Republic uncontested.

He was small, but his presence and wit could fill a room. Even late in life, he retained a certain impishness and boyish grin, shifting easily from philosophy to jokes or plain old Prague gossip.

In December 1996, just 11 months after his first wife, Olga Havlova, died of cancer, he lost a third of his right lung during surgery to remove a half-inch malignant tumor. He gave up smoking and married Dagmar Veskrnova, a dashing actress almost 20 years his junior.

Holding a post of immense prestige but little power, Havel’s image suffered in the latter years as his people discovered the difficulties of transforming their society in the post-communist era.

His attempts to reconcile rival politicians were considered by many as unconstitutional intrusions, and his pleas for political leaders to build a “civic society” based on respect, tolerance and individual responsibility went largely unanswered.

Media criticism, once unthinkable, became unrelenting. Serious newspapers questioned his political visions; tabloids focused mainly on his private life and his flashy second wife.

Havel himself acknowledged that his handling of domestic issues never matched his flair for foreign affairs. But when the Czech Republic joined NATO in March 1999, and the European Union in May 2004, his dreams came true.

Early in 2008, Havel returned to his first love: the stage. He published a new play, “Leaving,” about the struggles of a leader on his way out of office, and the work gained critical acclaim. “My return to the stage was not easy,” he said. “It’s not a common thing for someone to be involved in theater, become a president, and then go back.”

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Withdrawal of American troops in Iraq

Sunday, December 18th, 2011

Anand B.A., B.L.,

us-leaving-iraq-

The withdrawal of American military forces from Iraq has been a contentious issue within the United States since the beginning of the Iraq War. As the war has progressed from its initial 2003 invasion phase to a multi-year occupation, U.S. public opinion has turned in favor of troop withdrawal. As of May 2007, 55 percent of Americans believed that the Iraq war was a mistake, and 51 percent of registered voters favored troop withdrawal. In late April 2007, the U.S. Congress passed a supplementary spending bill for Iraq that sets a deadline for troop withdrawal, but President Bush vetoed this bill soon afterwards. All US Forces are mandated to withdraw from Iraqi territory by 31 December 2011 under the terms of a bilateral agreement signed in 2008.

Activities during George.W.Bush

On November 17, 2005, Representative John Murtha introduced H.J.Res. 73 , a resolution calling for U.S. forces in Iraq to be “redeployed at the earliest practicable date” to stand as a quick-reaction force in U.S. bases in neighboring countries such as Kuwait. In response, Republicans proposed a resolution that “the deployment of United States forces in Iraq be terminated immediately,” without any provision for redeployment, which was voted down 403-3.

On June 16, 2006, the House voted 256-153 in a non-binding resolution against establishing a deadline for the withdrawal of troops from Iraq. Republican then-House Majority Leader John Boehner, who argued against a deadline, stated “achieving victory is our only option”, and “we must not shy away”. On the other hand, Democratic then-House Minority Leader and current Speaker of the House Nancy Pelosi argued that a deadline is necessary, and stated “’stay the course’ is not a strategy, it’s a slogan”, and “it’s time to face the facts.”

On March 27, 2007, Congress passed H.R. 1591, which called for the withdrawal of U.S. troops in Iraq by March 2008. However, President Bush vetoed the bill and the House of Representatives failed to override the veto. Congress then passed H.R. 2206, which provided funding for the Iraq War through September 30, 2007 and was signed into law by President Bush on May 25, 2007. H.R. 2206 included eighteen benchmarks for the Iraqi government to meet.

On May 9, 2007, Representative Jim McGovern introduced H.R. 2237 to the House: “To provide for the redeployment of United States Armed Forces and defense contractors from Iraq.” The bill failed with a vote of 255 to 171, thirteen of the Nays coming from Democrats representing districts won by John Kerry in 2004.]

On July 12, 2007 the House passed H.R. 2956 by a vote of 223 to 201, for redeployment (or withdrawal) of U.S. armed forces out of Iraq. The resolution requires most troops to withdraw from Iraq by April 1, 2008.

On July 18, 2007, after an all-night debate, the Senate blocked the passage of a bill that would have set a troop withdrawal timetable with a vote of 52-47. The withdrawal would have started within 120 days, and would have required that all troops (except an unspecified number could be left behind to conduct a very narrow set of missions) be out of the country by April 30, 2008.

McGovern-Polk proposal

Former U.S. Senator George McGovern and William R. Polk, director of the University of Chicago Center for Middle Eastern Studies, published a detailed proposal for U.S. withdrawal from Iraq in their book, Out of Iraq: A Practical Plan for Withdrawal Now. (Simon & Schuster, 2006.) A sizable excerpt was published in the October 2006 edition of Harper’s magazine.

This plan was completely abandoned. Some of the basic features of their proposal included:

  • The first soldiers to be sent home should be private security contractors.
  • An international stabilization force of 15,000 soldiers to be established. Troops will be drawn from Morocco, Tunisia, and Egypt, funded by the U.S. This force would remain for two years after the departure of U.S. troops.
  • Transport, communications, and light arms equipment currently used by U.S. forces should be donated to the new multinational force.
  • In place of a new Iraqi army, a national reconstruction corps should be established, modeled on the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
  • The immediate cessation of work on U.S. military bases.
  • U.S. withdrawal from the Green Zone.
  • Release of all prisoners of war.

2008 U.S.–Iraq Status of Forces bilateral Agreement

In 2008, the US and Iraqi government signed the U.S.–Iraq Status of Forces Agreement which implments that all US forces would withdraw from Iraqi cities by June 30, 2009 and that All US Forces would be mandated to withdraw from Iraqi territory by December 31, 2011 under the terms of a bilateral agreement. On December 14, 2008, then-U.S. President George W. Bush signed the security pact with Iraq. In his fourth and final trip to Iraq, the president appeared with Iraq’s prime minister Nouri al-Maliki and said more work is to be done.

U.S.–Iraq Status of Forces Agreement

The U.S.–Iraq Status of Forces Agreement (official name: “Agreement Between the United States of America and the Republic of Iraq On the Withdrawal of United States Forces from Iraq and the Organization of Their Activities during Their Temporary Presence in Iraq”) was a status of forces agreement (SOFA) between Iraq and the United States. It established that U.S. combat forces would withdraw from Iraqi cities by June 30, 2009, and all U.S. forces will be completely out of Iraq by December 31, 2011. The pact required criminal charges for holding prisoners over 24 hours, and required a warrant for searches of homes and buildings that were not related to combat. U.S. contractors working for U.S. forces would have been subject to Iraqi criminal law, while contractors working for the State Department and other U.S. agencies would retain their immunity. If U.S. forces committed still undecided “major premeditated felonies” while off-duty and off-base, they would have been subjected to an undecided procedures laid out by a joint U.S.-Iraq committee if the U.S. certified the forces were off-duty.

The agreement ceased as of the 16th of December 2011, when the United States completed it final withdrawal of troops from Iraq. The symbolic ceremony in Baghdad officially “cased” (retired) the flag of US forces in Iraq, according to army tradition

The Iraqi government also approved a Strategic Framework Agreement with the U.S., aimed at ensuring international cooperation including minority ethnicity, gender, and belief interests and other constitutional rights; threat deterrence; exchange students; education; and cooperation in the areas of energy development, environmental hygiene, health care, information technology, communications, and law enforcement.

Several groups of Iraqis protested the passing of the SOFA accord as prolonging and legitimizing the occupation, and Grand Ayatollah Ali Husseini al-Sistani expressed concerns with the ratified version. Some other Iraqis expressed skepticism that the U.S. would completely end its presence by 2011. U.S. Secretary of Defense Robert Gates had predicted that after 2011 he would have expected to see “perhaps several tens of thousands of American troops” as part of a residual force in Iraq. Some Americans had discussed “loopholes” and some Iraqis had said they believed parts of the pact remained a “mystery”.

President Obama’s speech on February 27, 2009

On February 27, 2009, at Marine Corps Base Camp Lejeune in North Carolina, President Barack Obama announced a deadline for the withdrawal of combat troops from Iraq. According to the president, by August 31, 2010, after nearly seven and a half years of United States military engagement in Iraq, all but a “transitional force” of 35,000 to 50,000 troops would be withdrawn from the Middle Eastern nation. President Obama defined the task of the transitional force as “training, equipping, and advising Iraqi Security Forces as long as they remain non-sectarian; conducting targeted counter-terrorism missions; and protecting our ongoing civilian and military efforts within Iraq”. Under this plan, the majority of troops will be withdrawn just a month after the deadline in the signed agreement between former President George W. Bush and Prime Minister of Iraq Nouri al-Maliki where the majority of troops will be withdrawn at one point, and the entirety of troops to be out by December 31, 2011.

August 2010 partial withdrawal

On August 19, 2010, the 4th Stryker Brigade, 2nd Infantry Division was the last US combat brigade to withdraw from Iraq. About 50,000 US troops will remain in the country in an advisory capacity. According to the US, they will help to train Iraqi forces in a new mission dubbed by the US as “Operation New Dawn,” which will run until the end of 2011. The mission that ended August 19, 2010 was dubbed by the US as “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” at a projected cost of more than $900 billion and 4,415 US troops killed in action. Over 100,000 Iraqi civilians were estimated to be killed, according to the Iraq Body Count website. President Obama announced the end of Operation Iraqi Freedom in his Oval Office address on August 31, 2010.

Full withdrawal

With the collapse of the discussions about extending the stay of any U.S. troops, on October 21, 2011, President Obama announced the full withdrawal of troops from Iraq as scheduled before. The U.S. will retain an embassy in Baghdad and two consulates with around 4,000 to 5,000 defense contractors. President Obama and al-Maliki outlined a broad agenda for post-war cooperation without American troops in Iraq during a joint press conference on December 12, 2011 at the White House. This agenda includes cooperation on energy, trade and education as well as cooperation in security, counter-terrorism, economic development and strengthening Iraq’s institutions. Both leaders said their countries will maintain strong security, diplomatic and economic ties after the last U.S. combat forces withdraw at the end of 2011.

President Barack Obama paid tribute to the troops who served in Iraq on December 14, 2011, at the Fort Bragg military base in North Carolina. As the last of the American troops prepared to exit Iraq, he said the United States was leaving behind a “sovereign, stable and self-reliant” Iraq. On December 15, an American military ceremony was held in Baghdad putting a formal end to the U.S mission in Iraq. Only 4,000 U.S troops remain in Iraq and they are scheduled to leave by the end of the year, leaving behind 200 Marine Security Guards and 15,000 embassy personnel.

Key dates in the 2003-2011 Iraq war

2003

—March 20: U.S. forces attack Baghdad with missiles and bombs in a failed attempt to kill Saddam Hussein. U.S. and allied ground troops roll into Iraq.

—April 9: American troops storm Baghdad and the statue of Saddam is toppled in Firdous Square, the symbolic collapse of his regime.

—May 1: President George W. Bush declares an end to major combat operations.

—July 22: Saddam’s sons Oday and Qusay are killed in a gunfight in Mosul.

—Aug. 7: A car bomb strikes the Jordanian Embassy, the first such attack of the war. Twelve days later, a truck bomb demolishes the headquarters of the United Nations in Baghdad, killing top U.N. envoy Sergio Vieira de Mello and 21 others.

—Sept 3: U.S. announces an Iraqi administration largely made up of Iraqi exiles who opposed Saddam.

—Oct. 26: A barrage of rockets slams into the Al-Rasheed Hotel in the Green Zone, killing an American lieutenant colonel and injuring 17 other people. Deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, one of the architects of the war, who was visiting Baghdad, escapes injury.

—Dec. 13: Saddam is captured in an underground hideout near Tikrit.

___

2004

—Feb. 1: Two suicide bombers attack Kurdish political offices in Irbil, killing 117 people and injuring 133.

—March 2: Multiple explosions rock Baghdad and Karbala at the climax of a Shiite festival, killing nearly 200 people in the deadliest attack so far.

—March 31: Four Blackwater security contractors are ambushed and killed in Fallujah, setting off the first battle for the insurgent-dominated city west of Baghdad.

—April 4: Followers of Shiite cleric Muqtada al-Sadr launch attacks across southern Iraq after the U.S tries to close his newspaper. Fighting rages until the end of August.

—April 18: U.S. announces an investigation into abuses against detainees at the Abu Ghraib prison as gruesome photos emerge showing Iraqi prisoners humiliated.

—May 17: The head of the Iraqi Governing Council, Ezzedine Salim, is killed in suicide attack near the entrance to the Green Zone.

—May 19: U.S. jets mistakenly bomb a wedding party in western Iraq, killing 42 people, including women and children.

—June 28: The U.S. transfers sovereignty to the Iraqis but retains most real power. The civilian head of the occupation authority, L. Paul Bremer, leaves the country.

—July 1: Trial of Saddam begins with the ousted leader appearing at his first hearing.

—Sept. 30: A car bomb strikes American troops handing out candy to children, killing up to 35 children.

—Nov. 7: U.S. soldiers and Marines launch the biggest attack of the war to date to seize the insurgent stronghold of Fallujah.

—Dec. 21: A bomb kills 22 people, including 18 Americans, at Forward Operating Base Marez in Mosul.

___

2005

—Jan. 26: A helicopter crashes in western Iraq, killing 31 Americans.

—Jan. 30: Iraqis select a new parliament in the first elections since the fall of Saddam. Shiite and Kurdish parties take an overwhelming majority after Sunnis largely boycott.

—Feb. 28: A vehicle bomb kills 127 people in Hillah in the deadliest blast to date.

—March 4: Italian journalist Giuliana Sgrena is freed by Italian intelligence but the rescuing agent is killed when U.S. troops fire on their vehicle en route to Baghdad airport.

—Aug. 28: An Iraqi commission submits a draft constitution to parliament.

—Aug. 31: Rumors of a suicide bomber panics Shiite marchers in a religious procession at a Baghdad bridge and nearly 10,000 people reportedly die in the stampede.

—Sept. 14: A series of bombings kills 160 people in Baghdad in a dramatic escalation of the insurgency.

—Oct. 15: Iraqis approve the new constitution in a referendum.

—Oct. 24: The Palestine and Sheraton hotels, favored by Western journalists, are struck by multiple truck bombs.

—Nov. 19: U.S. troops kill 24 people, including 15 noncombatants, in Haditha after an insurgent attack.

—Dec. 15: Iraqis choose a new parliament in the first election under the new constitution.

___

2006

—Feb. 22: Sunni militants bomb the Shiite Golden Dome shrine in Samarra, triggering a wave of sectarian violence that brings Iraq to the brink of civil war.

—June 7: The leader of al-Qaida in Iraq, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, is killed in a U.S. airstrike northeast of Baghdad.

—June 17: U.S. troops launch a battle to take control of the western city of Ramadi in a bloody conflict that persists for more than a year.

—July 9: Shiite militias kill 40 Sunnis in the Jihad neighborhood of Baghdad as sectarian war spreads to the capital.

—Nov. 23: Bombs kill more than 200 Shiites in Baghdad’s Sadr City neighborhood.

—Dec. 30: Saddam is executed by hanging.

___

2007

—Jan. 10: President Bush orders 30,000 reinforcements to Iraq in an effort to stem the sectarian war and stabilize Baghdad.

—Jan. 28: Followers of a Shiite cult launch a battle in Najaf that kills nearly 300 people.

—Feb. 3: A bomb in a Baghdad market kills 135 people.

—Feb. 27: Shiite militias besiege British bases in Basra, ultimately prompting most British forces to leave the country.

—March 23: Iranians seize 15 British navy personnel patrolling near Basra, releasing them April 4.

—March 27: A blast in Tal Afar kills 152 people, setting off a wave of Shiite reprisals that claim 70 Sunni lives.

—April 18: Bombs across Baghdad kill nearly 200 people.

—Aug. 14: A series of bombings directed against the Yazidi religious community in the north kills nearly 800 people.

—Aug. 29: Muqtada al-Sadr announces a cease-fire after a public backlash against his militia following a clash in Karbala that killed 50 people. Attacks against U.S. troops in Shiite areas begin to drop.

—Sept. 16: Blackwater security guards mistakenly believing they were under attack kill 17 civilians in Nisoor Square in Baghdad.

___

2008

—Jan. 8: U.S. and Iraqi forces launch operations in Baghdad to secure the capital.

—Jan. 23: Operations begin in Mosul against al-Qaida’s last major urban stronghold.

—Feb. 21: Turkey launches an offensive in northern Iraq against Kurdish rebels from the PKK.

—March 25: Heavy fighting breaks out in Basra as Iraqi forces try to crush Shiite militias, which launch counterattacks in Baghdad. Fighting rages for a month until the Shiites accept a cease-fire.

—Oct. 26: U.S. special operations troops strike in Syria to break up a ring smuggling weapons and fighters into Iraq.

—Nov. 27: The Iraqi parliament approves an agreement with the U.S. calling for the departure of all U.S. troops by the end of 2011.

___

2009

—May 27: The last British combat troops leave Iraq.

—Aug. 19: A massive truck bomb kills about 100 people in Baghdad.

—Oct. 25: Bombs targeting government buildings kill 127 in Baghdad.

___

2010

—March 7: Iraqi parliamentary election fails to give power to a single bloc, leading to months of political negotiations and infighting that drag on until a power-sharing deal in November.

—Aug. 18: U.S. combat operations in Iraq end as its last combat brigade departs for Kuwait. Thousands of troops remain behind in a supporting role.

___

2011

—April 8: The Iraqi army raids Camp Ashraf, home to Iranian exiles. The raid kills 34 civilians and produces calls for the Iraqi government to honor agreements for the protection of the camp.

—May 5: Car bomb in Hillah kills nearly 30 people.

—June 21: A bomb in the southern city of Diwaniyah kills 20 and injures 30.

—Oct. 21: President Barack Obama announces all troops will leave Iraq by the end of the year.

—Dec. 15: The U.S. military officially declares the end of its mission.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Killing of Osama Bin Laden voted Top News Story of 2011

Sunday, December 18th, 2011

Killing of Osama Bin Laden voted Top News Story of 2011

The killing of Osama bin Laden during a raid by Navy SEALs on his hideout in Pakistan was the top news story of 2011, followed by Japan’s earthquake/tsunami disaster, according to The Associated Press’ annual poll of U.S. editors and news directors.

The death of bin Laden, the al-Qaeda leader who masterminded the Sept. 11, 2001, terror attacks, received 128 first-place votes out of 247 ballots cast for the top 10 stories. The Japan disaster was next, with 60 first-place votes. Placing third were the Arab Spring uprisings that rocked North Africa and the Middle East, while the European Union’s financial turmoil was No. 4.

The international flavour of these top stories contrasted with last year’s voting when the Gulf of Mexico oil spill was the top story, President Barack Obama’s health care overhaul was No. 2, and the U.S. midterm elections were No. 3.

Here are 2011’s top 10 stories, in order

Osama Bin Laden’s Death: He’d been the world’s most-wanted terrorist for nearly a decade, ever since a team of his al-Qaeda followers carried out the attacks of Sept. 11, 2001. In May, the long and often-frustrating manhunt ended with a night-time assault by a helicopter-borne special operations squad on his compound in Abbottabad, Pakistan. Bin Laden was shot dead by one of the raiders, and within hours his body was buried at sea.

Japan’s Triple Disaster: A 9.0-magnitude earthquake off Japan’s northeast coast in March unleashed a tsunami that devastated scores of communities, leaving nearly 20,000 people dead or missing and wreaking an estimated $218 billion in damage. The tsunami triggered the worst nuclear crisis since Chernobyl after waves knocked out the cooling system at a nuclear power plant, causing it to spew radiation that turned up in local produce. About 100,000 people evacuated from the area have not returned to their homes.

Arab Spring: It began with demonstrations in Tunisia that rapidly toppled the long-time strongman. Spreading like a wildfire, the Arab Spring protests sparked a revolution in Egypt that ousted Hosni Mubarak, fuelled a civil war in Libya that climaxed with Muammar Qadhafi’s death, and fomented a bloody uprising in Syria against the Assad regime. Bahrain and Yemen also experienced major protests and unrest.

Eu Fiscal Crisis: The European Union was hit with relentless fiscal turmoil. In Greece, austerity measures triggered strikes, protests and riots, while Italy’s economic woes toppled Premier Silvio Berlusconi. France and Germany led urgent efforts to ease the debt crisis; Britain balked at proposed changes.

U.S. Economy: By some measures, the U.S. economy gained strength as the year progressed. Hiring picked up a bit, consumers were spending more, and the unemployment rate finally dipped below 9 percent. But millions of Americans remained buffeted by foreclosures, joblessness and benefit cutbacks, and investors were on edge monitoring the chain of fiscal crises in Europe.

Penn State Sex Abuse Scandal: One of America’s most storied college football programs was tarnished in a scandal that prompted the firing of Hall of Fame football coach Joe Paterno. One of his former assistants, Jerry Sandusky, was accused of sexually molesting 10 boys; two senior Penn State officials were charged with perjury; and the long-time president was ousted. Paterno wasn’t charged, but expressed regret he didn’t do more after being told there was a problem.

Qadhafi Toppled In Libya: After nearly 42 years of mercurial and often brutal rule, Muammar Qadhafi was toppled by his own people. Anti-government protests escalated into an eight-month rebellion, backed by NATO bombing, that shattered his regime, and Qadhafi finally was tracked down and killed in the fishing village where he was born.

Fiscal Showdowns In Congress: Partisan divisions in Congress led to several showdowns on fiscal issues. A fight over the debt ceiling prompted Standard & Poor’s to strip the U.S. of its AAA credit rating. Later, the so-called “super committee” failed to agree on a deficit-reduction package of at least $1.2 trillion potentially triggering automatic spending cuts of that amount starting in 2013.

Occupy Wall Street Protests: It began Sept. 17 with a protest at a New York City park near Wall Street, and within weeks spread to scores of communities across the U.S. and abroad. The movement depicted itself as leaderless and shied away from specific demands, but succeeded in airing its complaint that the richest 1 percent of Americans benefit at the expense of the rest. As winter approached, local police dismantled several of the protest encampments.

Gabrielle Giffords Shot: The popular third-term congresswoman from Arizona suffered a severe brain injury when she and 18 other people were shot by a gunman as she met with constituents outside a Tucson supermarket in January. Six people died, and Giffords’ painstaking recovery is still in progress.

Among the news events falling just short of the Top 10 were the death of Apple Inc. co-founder Steve Jobs, Hurricane Irene, the devastating series of tornados across Midwest and South-eastern U.S., and the repeal of the “don’t ask, don’t tell” policy that barred gays from serving openly in U.S. military.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

********

AIMA opposes Centre’s move on CMAT – 17.12.2011

Sunday, December 18th, 2011

Describing as discriminatory, the All India Management Association (AIMA) on 17.12.2012 has opposed the Common Management Admission Test (CMAT) announced by the Centre for admission to all management courses. The apex body of management professionals, AIMA, has been conducting the Management Aptitude Test (MAT) for the past two decades.

In a letter to the Human Resource Development Ministry, the AIMA has said MAT’s uniqueness and success lay in its inclusiveness. It is conducted in both the online and paper-based format, reaching out to a much wider audience, accommodating the mixed education background of students while staying rigorous on testing aptitude.

The proposal to introduce and conduct a common management aptitude test (CMAT) exclusively in an online format is ill-suited to a big and diverse country like India. “While such a platform might work for more elite tests like CAT, which are mainly targeted at students in metros seeking admission to Indian Institutes of Management, conducting a common test of this nature in an only online format would only widen the digital divide.”

A large number of students who would avail themselves of this test would be from tier 2 and 3 towns, where accessibility to computers is limited; add to this connectivity, bandwidth and power issues. An online format will hurt the opportunities of many students from non-metros and less-connected areas. Instead of enhancing the scope and accessibility to management degrees, it will only end up being discriminatory, the letter said.

Citing the AIEEE-2011 test, the AIMA said only 4,900 candidates had opted for computer-based test of the 11 lakh applicants which showed that though there had been a significant growth in computer literacy, the reach has not been inclusive with reference to demographic distribution.

Courtesy: The Hindu

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Indian Government to lay guidelines for Hospital Safety

Saturday, December 17th, 2011

Shanthi Ganesan

India’s apex body for disaster management is preparing “mandatory” guidelines for hospitals that will cover fire and other emergency hazards, after a major tragedy struck a private super speciality medical centre in Kolkata killing over 90 people in December, 201.

A core group would be constituted that would decide the guidelines for hospitals that would “cover fire and all other hazards”, a National Disaster Management Authority spokesperson told.

The NDMA had in the past issued guidelines for medical preparedness and mass casualty management “but it largely dealt with preparedness of hospitals to deal with disasters outside the hospital”, the spokesperson told.

The official said a meeting of NDMA officials was held on 16.12.2011 evening and after a brain-storming session with different officers and experts it was decided to prepare guidelines for hospital safety and preparedness to deal with on-site emergencies.

The decision was taken in the wake of the recent fire accident at AMRI Hospital at Kolkata, the spokesperson said. ”We have to now address this major issue of emergencies inside the hospitals both in the government and private sectors in the country,” NDMA vice chairman M. Shashidhar Reddy said in the meeting. The meeting was convened to review the present status of hospital safety and understand the role and responsibilities of different agencies.

Members and officers of NDMA, representatives from World Health Organisation (WHO), UN agencies, AIIMS, health ministry, Armed Forces Medical Services, corporate hospitals, Delhi Fire Service, experts from IITs, IIITs and NGOs were present at the meeting.

NDMA member Muzaffar Ahmed was tasked with constituting the core group of experts and preparing the guidelines for hospital safety and preparedness after wide consultation with all stakeholders. ”The core group, besides reviewing the present status, will identify gaps and look at international best practices. It will also look at the existing codes and other legal provisions and recommend steps for better monitoring and supervision of all safety measures,” the spokesperson said.

NDMA, constituted under the Disaster Management Act, 2005 and headed by the prime minister, has been tasked with spearheading and implementing a holistic and integrated approach to disaster management in the country.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Indian Prime Minister’s visit to Russia, December 2011

Saturday, December 17th, 2011

Catherine Joseph

Prime Minister Manmohan Singh on 15.12.2011 arrived Moscow on a three-day visit to Russia for further expanding bilateral cooperation and consolidating coordination on regional and global issues.
Singh arrived at the Sheremetyevo International Airport and was received by Russia’s deputy foreign minister A M Vadakin.

Noting that there is enormous mutual goodwill in the two countries for each other, Singh, prior to his departure, had said in New Delhi that he is “convinced that India-Russia consultation on global issues is more necessary today than ever before”. “Both countries recognise the significant mutual benefit we derive from working together. I will utilise my visit to further expand our bilateral cooperation and further consolidate our coordination on regional and global issues. “This is in our national interest and in the interest of global peace and prosperity,” the Prime Minister, who will be attending the 12th annual Indo-Russian Summit in Moscow, said in a statement.

Observing that 2011 India-Russia Annual Summit was taking place against the backdrop of a complex international environment, Singh said he was “looking forward to an indepth exchange of views with the Russian leadership on the crisis facing the global economy and the political developments in our extended neighbourhood, including West Asia, Gulf and Afghanistan and the impact of all this on peace and stability in the world.

“I am convinced that India-Russia consultation on global issues is more necessary today than ever before. Our bilateral relations with Russia are based on mutual trust, friendship and shared interests,” he had said, noting that bilateral ties encompass diverse sectors including nuclear energy, defence, space, science and technology, hydrocarbons, trade and investment and people-to-people exchanges.

Five Agreements signed

The Prime Minister, Dr Manmohan Singh, left Moscow for India on 17.12.2011 after concluding a three-day visit during which he attended the 12th annual Indo-Russian summit and witnessed inking of five agreements, including one for technical assistance in joint production of 42 more frontline Sukhoi-MKI 30 jets.

Dr Singh, who held talks with the President, Mr Dmitry Medvedev, cleared the uncertainty over the Kudankulam nuclear power project on 16.12.2011 and said the first unit of the protest-hit plant will be operationalised in a “couple of weeks” but India and Russia did not sign any agreement on construction of the third and fourth units.

The two countries signed a crucial agreement for technical assistance in joint production of 42 more frontline Sukhoi-MKI 30 jets, which was among the five pacts initialled in the presence of Dr Singh and Mr Medvedev besides a joint statement on Indo-Russian partnership.

Russia also backed India’s bid for a permanent seat in an expanded UN Security Council as well as its aspirations to join the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation, while Dr Singh welcomed Moscow’s entry to the World Trade Organization.

Dr Singh congratulated his counterpart, Mr Vladimir Putin, on the victory of his ruling United Russia party in the December 4, 2011 parliamentary polls, during their meeting.

Russia to offer 42 upgraded Sukhois to India

An additional 42 Sukhoi frontline fighters will be provided to India by Russia under an agreement inked between the two sides during the visit of the Prime Minister, Dr Manmohan Singh. With this pact, the total number of acquired or contracted aircraft by India in various stages of manufacture of the frontline Su-30 MKI fighters would increase to 272.

The agreement for the upgraded Sukhois was signed by the Defence Secretary, Mr Shashi Kant Sharma, and the Russian Federal Service for Military-Technical Cooperation Director, Mr M.A. Dmitriev, in the presence of Dr Singh, and the Russian President, Mr Dmitry Medvedev, after their talks at the 12th annual Indo-Russian Summit at the Kremlin 0n 16.12.2011.

The pact, which was among the five agreements initialled between the two countries, came against the backdrop of a crash of an Indian Air Force’s Sukhoi-30 near Pune. The mishap, in which the two pilots ejected safely, raised some technical questions and also led to the grounding of the entire fleet of 120 planes pending investigations.

An Inter-Governmental Agreement (IGA) and a general contract were signed in 2000 for the manufacture of 140 Su-30 MKI aircraft by HAL. A 2007 protocol envisaged manufacture of a further 40 aircraft. Earlier, 50 Su-30 aircraft were purchased in phases prior to the signing of IGA and deliveries started in the late 90s. The latest version is expected to include a new cockpit, an upgraded radar and certain stealth features to avoid radar detection.

Significantly, the upgraded Sukhoi-30 MKIs will be able to carry a heavier weapons load, especially the airborne version of the Brahmos cruise missile. The first delivery of the upgraded Sukhois is expected in 2014 and the last by 2018.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Koodankulam Nuclear Power Plant – the Issues

Sunday, December 11th, 2011

Ramya

Koodankulam Nuclear Power Plant is a Nuclear Power station currently under construction in Koodankulam in the Tirunelvelli district of the southern Indian state of Tamil Nadu. Project investment cost to India was estimated to be US$ 3 billion (Rs.13,615 Crores) in a 2001 agreement.

kudankulam_nuclear plant

History

An Inter-Governmental Agreement on the project was signed on November 20, 1988 by Prime Minister Rajiv Gandhi and Soviet President Mikhail Gorbachev. The project remained in limbo for 10 years due to political and economic upheaval in Russia after the post-1991 Soviet breakup, and also due to objections of the United States on the grounds that the agreement does not meet the 1992 terms of the Nuclear Suppliers Group (NSG).

Since the plant was conceived in the mid-1980s, an anti-nuclear group People’s Movement Against Nuclear Energy was opposing the plant for about 25 years due to the Environmental impact of nuclear power and its threat to the people and environment.

A small port became operational in Kudankulam on January 14, 2004. This port was established to receive barges carrying over sized light water reactor equipment from ships anchored at a distance of 1.5 kilometres (0.93 mi). Until 2004 materials had to be brought in via road from the port of Tuticorin, risking damage during transportation.

In 2008 negotiation on building four additional reactors at the site began. Though the capacity of these reactors has not been declared, it is expected that the capacity of each reactor will be 1000 MW or 1 GW.The new reactors would bring the total capacity of the power plant to 9200 MW or 9.2 GW.

In June 2011, Sergei Ryzhov, the chief designer of the light water VVER nuclear reactors used at this Nuclear Power Plant was killed in an airplane accident. The plane belonging to the Rus-Air airlines was flying from Moscow to the Karelian capital Petrozavodsk.

Technical description

Two 1 GW reactors of the VVER-1000 model are being constructed by the Nuclear Power corporation of India Limited (NPCIL) and Atomstroyexport. When completed they will become the largest nuclear power generation complex in India producing a cumulative 2 GW of electric power. Both units are water-cooled, water-moderated power reactors. The first was scheduled to start operation in December 2009 and the second one was scheduled for March 2010. Currently, the official projections put unit 1 into operation in June 2011, and unit 2 will go in March 2012.

Four more reactors are set to be added to this plant under a memorandum of intent signed in 2008. A firm agreement on setting up two more reactors, has been postponed pending the ongoing talks on liability issues. Under an inter-government agreement signed in December 2008 Russia is to supply to India four third generation VVER-1200 reactors of 1170 MW.

The reactors have some advanced safety features like passive heat removal system, double containment, Core Catcher, and hydrogen re-combiner instead of conventional systems

Controversy

As of October 2011, thousands of protesters and villagers living around the Russian-built Koodankulam nuclear plant in the southern Tamil Nadu state, are blocking highways and staging hunger strikes, preventing further construction work, and demanding its closure as they fear of the disasters like the Environmental impact of nuclear power, Radioactive waste, nuclear accident similar to the radiation leak in March at Japan’s Fukushima nuclear disaster.

The protesters have clearly stated few specific reasons for opposing the Koodankulam NPP project.

According to S P Udayakumar, of the voluntary People’s Movement Against Nuclear Energy, “the nuclear plant is unsafe” and “the safety analysis report and the site evaluation study have not been made public. No public hearing was held. It’s an authoritarian project that has been imposed on the people.” Prime Minister Manmohan Singh told Tamil Nadu Chief Minister J Jayalalitha that “all precautions would be taken at the Koodankulam nuclear plant to maintain the highest safety standards”.

Protesters claimed that even advanced countries like Germany has decided to shutdown all its 17 Nuclear reactors through which the country gets 23% of its energy.

Gopal Gandhi, Grandson of Mahatma Gandhi, former West Bengal governor also said that Indian Fukushima possible in a lecture on ‘India 2021- Hazarding Guesses, Guessing Hazards’ in New Delhi)

A Public Interest Litigation (PIL) has also been filed against the government’s civil nuclear program at the apex Supreme Court. The PIL specifically asks for the “staying of all proposed nuclear power plants till satisfactory safety measures and cost-benefit analyses are completed by independent agencies”.

Protesters also claimed that the Fukushima disaster in which the emergency cooling system itself was damaged by the earthquake, has made it clear that no one can really predict any disaster occurance.

A center panel constituted by the Government of India ,which did a survey of the safety features in the plant,said the Koodankulam reactors are the safest and fears of the people are not based on scientific principles.Dr. Muthunayagam,panel’s convener,also added that the protesters have asked for some documents which are not related to the safety of the reactor hence he suspects the very nature of their questions.

In response to the center panel report, protesters wrote an open letter to the chief minister Jayalalithaa that the center panel’s report is “ill-baked and incomplete eyewash report” and also said that the report has “ignored our question on liability, and has given no specific or scientific information on nuclear waste, and vague information on the fresh water needs of the KKNPP”

Activities that’s been Going For 25 Years

The ongoing people’s agitation to protest against the Koodankulam Nuclear Power Project (KKNPP) in the coastal village of Idinthakarai in Tirunelveli might have been triggered by a bout of panic after the Fukushima disaster, but anti-nuclear activists in Tamil Nadu see in it the fruition of their sustained campaign in various forms since a quarter century.

While the present agitation has thrown up a major challenge to the Union government and the nuclear establishment mainly because it is being staged by the people living in the backyard of the nuclear reactors, the awareness on the hazards of nuclear plants among the people was not created overnight, say some activists, who had started raising their voice against the project way back in 1987 even when the project was in the conceptual stage.

Though some of those activists are still directly involved in the fight against the commissioning of the reactors in Koodankulam, many of them have moved out to give moral support from the sidelines. Anton Gomez, leader of the Tamil Nadu Fishermen Association, from Thoothukudi, who was one of the pioneers in organising a campaign initially, is still around and was part of the team that called on PM Manmohan Singh recently.

Prominent among those who were part of the Koodankulam Anti-nuke Confederation, the organisation that sought to stir the consciousness of the people all over Tamil Nadu and also in places such as Mumbai and Delhi after its launch in 1988 were: Gomez, Mani, an engineer-turned journalist G Ramesh, Fr Samy of Indian Catholic Youth Federation and Dr C N Deivanayagam of Chennai.

The first campaign, however, was in Idinthakarai in September, 1987, with many speakers from Chennai, including journalists like Ramesh, addressing the crowd, Mani told Express.

In 1988, a cycle rally by about 150 people was taken up by the Indian People’s Front (IPF) from Thoothukudi to Tirunelveli through Nagercoil and Koodankulam when the tail end of the procession came under attack at Koodankulam. Mani said that a counter campaign was launched by the CPM and the Congress then — CPM because the project involved the erstwhile Soviet Union and the Congress because then PM Rajiv Gandhi was the one who envisaged it.

The same year, a rally and public meeting was also held in Tirunelveli by the confederation, in which Rev Y David, a Protestant pastor-turned social activist, who then ran an organisation called Samathuva Samudhya Iyakkam and working for the welfare of Palmyra workers, brought in his people.

Former Union minister George Fernandes was the main speaker in a meeting held in Thoothukudi in 1989 when Balaprajathipathi Adigalar, the head of the Ayavazhi cult, took an active part. Some local BJP leaders also addressed the crowd and even the Dravidar Kazhagam’s representative was on stage, said Mani.

Those days, newspapers and magazines in Tamil Nadu actively carried features and stories on the campaign and also ran articles written by people like Ramesh, whose series was titled Kollavarum Koodankulam (Death threat from Koodankulam). When the then DMK MP, Vaiko, said in Parliament that “humanity will be wiped out if the plant comes,” some papers even carried it as the lead story, Mani recalled.

Subsequently, when then USSR president Mikhail Gorbachev visited India, two black flag protests were attempted in Delhi and Mumbai by the confederation.

When a national fishermen’s rally, led by Fr Thomas Kocheri, visited Kanyakumari in 1989 under the title ‘Save water, save life’, slogans were raised against Koodankulam and there was even a police firing. In Mumbai, a protest was held in 1989 at Kala Goda under the banner of Indian Federation of Trade Unions (ML group). IPF organised rallies and protests in Chennai. Fr Samy organised a ‘Scientific Conference’ in Madurai and prepared 100 students to campaign in non-fishing villages around Koodankulam.

Meanwhile, when there were plans to supply water to the plant from Pechiparai dam in Kanyakumari, a local politician Dr Kumaradoss organised a series of protests by mobilising the farmers. Between May 3 and 13, 1989, several street corner meetings were held in non-fishing villages and on the final day a meeting was organised in Koodankulam. Police initially refused permission for the meeting citing law and order problems but finally relented by allowing it in a school ground. Mani recalled that the police officer told them that it was the same ground from where Rajiv Gandhi was to have addressed the crowd when he was expected to visit Koodankulam to lay the foundation stone for the project. But police barricaded the area preventing many people from entering the ground, Mani said.

Rajiv Gandhi never came mainly because of the protests. Even other dignitaries like former President R Venkatraman and former chief minister M Karunanidhi were expected for the inauguration, said Mani.

Then the project itself went into limbo with the disintegration of the USSR and the campaign lost steam.

Again when the project was revived under an Indo-Russian agreement, the campaign gained strength and many meetings were held. Apart from that, activists distributed pamphlets and booklets against nuclear energy. One of the booklets by Y David, Koodankulam Anumin Nilayam — Vendave Vendam (Koodankulam nuclear plant — No, No), which was first brought out in 1988, was very popular among the people that it ran into four print, runs subsequently with updates. The fourth run was in 1997.

The present leader of the movement, S P Udayakumar, returned from the US in 2001 when David was leading the campaign with Balaprajathipathi Adigalar taking an active role. As David said, he found in Udayakumar an effective leader and handed over the mantle. Udayakumar said he had been holding street corner meetings and distributing pamphlets for the last several years. He had even brought Medha Patkar to Koodankulam to address meetings. He said he is still mobilising support.

Former President A.P.J. Abdul Kalam’s Stand

Former President A.P.J. Abdul Kalam said the Kudankulam nuclear plant was absolutely safe but failed to convince those agitating against the commissioning of the facility, located 650km from Chennai.

Kalam, who visited the project site, said he had not come to play mediator. But the protesters argued that Kalam’s decision to meet only the plant officials and not villagers’ representatives proved he had come merely to issue a certificate to the nuclear facility.

The Centre has appointed a 15-member committee to reassure the villagers about the plant’s safety features. It had also requested Kalam, a votary of nuclear power and weapons, to affirm the safety of the plant. The government was looking to exploit the popularity that the former President, a Tamil, enjoys among the masses.

Kalam spent three hours inspecting the plant and being briefed on its various features. “He asked many questions about safety. He wanted to know how we can be sure that a disaster like Chernobyl (Russia) or Fukushima (Japan) would not happen here,” station director R.S. Sundar said. “We explained that the technology to be used here is much more advanced, and so are the safety features.”

Later, Kalam told the media the plant had put in place all the necessary safety features. He cited the mechanism to ensure automatic cooling of the plant in the event of a power cut followed by a generator failure, the double-wall protection, structural safety and the containers to store the 25 per cent residual fuel. He allayed the radiation fears too. “Also, there is no need to worry about the safety aspect of the plant as it is in a low-intensity seismic zone. There is also no threat of a tsunami as the plant is 1,300km from the seismic centre point and is 13.5 metres above the sea level,” Kalam said.

Fight ‘irrational’ anti-nuclear stance, says former AEC chief

Nuclear power is a safe and viable long term alternative to traditional sources of power and an anti-nuclear stance is `irrational’, according to Dr M.R. Srinivasan, Member and former Chairman, Atomic Energy Commission, Government of India.

Addressing an interactive session on the need of nuclear power and safety norms, in the context of the ongoing agitation that has stalled work on the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project in south Tamil Nadu, Dr Srinivasan said, “all need to join in fighting this attack” on nuclear power projects.

Recalling his close association with the nuclear power projects programme in India since the 1970s, Dr Srinivasan said India with more over 20 nuclear power reactors in operation has an impeccable record in terms of operations and safety.

Some of the reactors have been online for more than a year at a time. “The critics on the streets do not know what it takes to keep such equipment going” for that long uninterrupted, he said referring to the expertise available in India.

Safety Assured

The Kudankulam facility, with “advanced third generation”, reactors has abundant safety measures built into it beginning from the choice of location to the multi-level safety and back-up equipment that have been provided.

In comparison, the Fukushima reactor in Japan, where the combined earthquake and tsunami had damaged the reactors earlier this year, was a first generation unit. The possibility of such an incident happening here is inconceivable as the Kudankulam facility is not in a seismic zone compared with Japan which is ‘extremely seismic’.

Cheap Power

Nuclear power projects are key to the development of the economy as traditional resources are becoming costlier and renewable sources such as wind and solar are either costlier or the technology is not sufficient to power industrial development. Some of the earliest nuclear power projects such as the Tarapore unit churn out power at Rs 1 a kWhr, while later ones cost about Rs 2-3 a kWhr. Power from Kudankulam, if the project is not disrupted for long, will cost less than Rs 3, he said.

The State Government is talking about large infrastructure projects such as the metro rail and mono rail. But if there is ‘no juice’ to power the projects these would be dead investments, he said.

At the meeting organised by the Confederation of Indian Industry – Southern Region, Ms Gayathri Sriram, Chairperson, CII’s women empowerment forum and Managing Director, Ucal, said the industry is concerned about the prevailing shortage of power which was hitting the manufacturing sector. It had been hoping that additional generation capacities would help address the shortage but now a solution to the power shortage was being delayed.

Kudankulam protests overdone, says PM

Prime Minister Manmohan Singh on 17.12.2011 said the agitation against Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project in Tamil Nadu has been “overdone”, and expressed hope that it would end soon as the government had gone “out of the way” to assure the villagers about the safeguards of the facility.

Manmohan Singh,while in Moscow for a summit meeting with Russian President Dmitry Medvedev announced that Kudankulam’s unit I would go operational in a few weeks. He also said that with a total 2,000 MW capacity, the first two units of Kudankulam built over the last decade at a cost of Rs14,000 crore, “cannot be simply left idle.”

The second unit of Kudankulam, the Prime Minister said, would be operational in another six months after unit I.

Manmohan Singh said he was in touch with the state government and it was his hope that the state, which is short of power, will recognise that the nuclear plant, with 2,000 MW capacity, will bring nearly 1,000 MW to it, while the other half would go to other southern States.

Kudankulam: State experts’ committee to visit Tirunelveli

The Tamil Nadu State government-constituted experts’ committee on the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project issue will begin its visit to Tirunelveli on 18.02.2012 and hold talks with the representatives of protesters.

Disclosing this after meeting Chief Minister Jayalalithaa at the Secretariat Chennai, M.R. Srinivasan, member of the committee and former Atomic Energy Commission Chairman, and S. Iniyan, convener of the committee and Director, Institute of Energy Studies, Anna University-Chennai, told reporters that the panel’s work would include the visit to the power plant site, discussions with District Collector and his colleagues and ascertaining opinion of the local people.

Making it clear that its work would be based on reports of the Experts’ Group of the Union government, Dr. Srinivasan said the Group had given exhaustive answers to the questions raised by agitators. “We are going to review the report of the Experts’ Group in the context of questions raised by people’s representatives.”

When told that certain sections of the local people were feeling neglected, Dr. Iniyan said his panel would interact with such sections. The former AEC chairman said the committee would stay there “as long as necessary”.

On the questions concerning nuclear waste, he said “no nuclear waste will be placed in Kudankulam per se. Nuclear waste comes from the reprocessing plant and we are not proposing a reprocessing plant in Kudankulam.”

The panel appointed by the state government has M.R. Srinivasan, former Atomic Energy Commission Chairman as member of the committee and also includes two professors from Anna University, D. Arivu Oli and S. Iniyan, and retired IAS officer L.N. Vijayaraghavan.

Centre orders filing of cases against four NGOs

In a blow to the voluntary sector, the Union government has ordered registration of cases against four non-governmental organisations (NGOs), whom it suspects to be behind the growing agitation against the Kudankulam nuclear power project.

“While the Central Bureau of Investigation has registered cases against two NGOs, the State [Tamil Nadu] police have filed cases against two others for violation of provisions of the Foreign Contribution Regulation Act (FCRA),” Union Home Secretary R.K. Singh told. Later, the CBI confirmed that it had received a reference from the Home Ministry for investigation into the two NGOs of Tamil Nadu for the alleged FCRA violations. Its spokesperson said the agency was writing to the State government for its consent for beginning the probe. Incidentally, the Ministry’s reference has not made any connection of the two NGOs with the anti-nuclear agitation at Kudankulam.

The crackdown comes within days of Prime Minister Manmohan Singh saying, in an interview to the Science magazine, that NGOs had been funding agitations against nuclear power plants in the country. They were allegedly diverting foreign funds to this end.

Senior Home Ministry officials said the NGOs were asked to show cause and their bank accounts were frozen as these were ostensibly used for diverting money for funding agitations. It was found that the NGOs hurriedly “manufactured” receipts to show utilisation of lump-sum payments originally meant for charity.

The officials said a German national, who was picked up by the Tamil Nadu police at Nagercoil for allegedly assisting the anti-nuclear plant protesters, was deported earlier on 28.02.2012. Sonnteg Reiner Hermann, 49, against whom the Home Ministry had issued a “look-out notice,” was detained by the police monitoring the protests.

Arriving in India on a tourist visa, he had been helping the protesters in violation of the visa rules. “He had no business to be in Nagercoil. He had violated all the visa rules, and hence we have deported him,” a senior official said.

State expert panel submits report on nuclear project

Kudankulam 2

An expert committee appointed by the Tamil Nadu government on 28.02.2012 submitted its report on the safety aspects of the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project (KKNNP) to Chief Minister Jayalalithaa, marking a crucial stage in the debate over the project. At the same time, the State government invited the People’s Movement against Nuclear Energy (PMANE) representatives for talks on 29.02.2012.

Legal notice

Meanwhile, Mr. Udayakumar has sent a legal notice to Prime Minister Manmohan Singh for insinuating that the anti-Kudankulam protests were funded by United States and the Scandinavian non-government organisations.

Protesters explain stand against Kudankulam to CM

Kudankulam NGOs

A delegation led by PMSNE convener S.P. Udayakumar calling on Chief Minister Jayalalithaa at the Secretariat on 29.02.2012.

Though the delegation took exception to the way in which the State government’s experts committee carried out its work in Tirunelveli district, the Chief Minister did not say anything about the committee’s report.

He recalled that after the previous meeting between the representatives of the agitation and the Chief Minister in September, 2011 Ms Jayalalithaa immediately convened a meeting of the Cabinet and adopted a resolution to halt the work on the KKNNP until the fears of the local population over the safety of the plant were allayed.

Jayalalithaa gives go-ahead for Kudankulam project – 19.03.2012

Ending the impasse over the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project (KKNNP), the Tamil Nadu Cabinet, chaired by Chief Minister Jayalalithaa, on 19.03.2012 resolved to take steps for the early commissioning of the plant.

The Cabinet also decided that a Rs.500-crore package of development works should be taken up in Kudankulam, having regard to the local fishermen’s welfare. Announcing the decisions after an hour-long meeting, the Chief Minister, in a statement, called upon all to cooperate with the government.

The decision came as a relief to a large section of people, particularly trade and industry, who are bearing the brunt of a power crisis, but drew adverse comments from activists and parties opposed to nuclear energy.

Meanwhile, nine persons, including two members of the anti-KKNNP struggle committee S. Sivasubramanian and K. Rajalingam, were arrested near the project site at 12.45 p.m. on 19.03.2012 .

Ms. Jayalalithaa explained the basis for the government decision: reports of the Experts Group, constituted by the Centre in October; the State government’s Experts Committee; and the petitions given by the protesters were exhaustively scrutinised. There was no possibility of the occurrence of an earthquake or tsunami, and anyway the plant had the best safety features.

Kudankulam: 11 protesters held on sedition charges

Police moved against those protesting the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project (KKNPP) on 19.03.2012, arresting 11 activists, including two members of the anti-KKNPP struggle committee. This is the first time the police cracked the whip on protesters in the last seven and half months.

While top rung leaders spearheading the agitation against the plant were arrested on sedition charges, about 185 others who tried to create a roadblock were apprehended by the police.

Of the total 195 persons arrested, 11 were held under Section 121 (Waging, or attempting to wage war, or abetting waging of war, against the Government of India), 124 (A) (Sedition) and 153 (A) (Promoting enmity between different groups on grounds of religion, race, place of birth, residence, language, etc., and doing acts prejudicial to maintenance of harmony) of IPC. Others were booked on charges of unlawful assembly etc, police sources said.

To continue… Watch for More ….

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

********

Mullaperiyar Dam Issues and current Scenario

Friday, December 9th, 2011

Anand BA., BL.,

1.         On 29-10-1886 a lease indenture for 999 years was made between Maharaja of Travancore and Secretary of State for India for Periyar irrigation works by another agreement in 1970, Tamil Nadu was permitted to generate power also.

2.         The Mullaperiyar Dam was constructed during 1887-1895 across Periyar River in the then Travancore state (now Kerala) territory after said indenture. The Periyar Dam with full reservoir level of 152 ft. provides for diversion of water from the reservoir through a tunnel to Vaigai basin in Tamil Nadu for irrigation benefits in 68558 ha.

Mullaperiyar Dam

3          In 1979, reports appeared in Kerala Press about the safety of Mulla Periyar Dam.   On 25th November, 1979 Chairman, CWC held discussions at Thirvananthapuram regarding strengthening Periyar dam with officers of Irrigation and Electricity, Deptt. of Kerala and PWD of Tamil Nadu.  In the meeting, emergency measures to be completed before next monsoon (1980), medium term measures and long-term measures for strengthening of Periyar Dam were decided.  One of the emergency measures was to keep the shutters of spillway raised fully to lower the reservoir level to 136 ft.

4.         A second meeting under the Chairmanship of Chairman, CWC was held on 29th April 1980 at New Delhi and it was opined that after the completion of emergency and medium term measures in the form of cable anchoring, the water level in the reservoir can be restored up to 145 ft.

5.         As per the Memorandum on the Rehabilitation of Mulla Periyar Dam prepared by CWC and forwarded to Tamil Nadu on 25th March, 1986, emergency measures were implemented.  In the aforesaid Memo, CWC gave its recommendation about peak flood and size of additional vents to be added in the spillway for implementing remaining emergency measure of providing additional spilling capacity.  It also gave its recommendation about the design details of concrete backing on the downstream face of the dam.  Besides this, CWC suggested The Government of Tamil Nadu to examine the possibility of raising the top of RCC parapet by another two feet apart from few other suggestions.  It was opined in the forwarding note that after completion of the proposed strengthening measures, provision of other additional vents and implementation of other suggestions, Periyar dam would be competent to hold water upto FRL of 152 ft.

6.         The matter became subjudice with several petitions in the Kerala and Tamil Nadu High Courts. All these cases were transferred to the Supreme Court which heard the matter and desired in its order dated 28.4.2000 that Hon’ble Minister (WR) may convene a meeting of the Chief Ministers of both the states of Kerala and Tamil Nadu to amicably resolve the issue.

7.        Hon’ble Minister (WR) convened the Inter-State meeting on 19.5.2000 and as decided in the meeting, an Expert Committee under Member (D&R), CWC with representatives from both States was constituted in June 2000 to study the safety of the dam with respect to strengthening of dam carried out by The Government of Tamil Nadu on the advice of Central Water Commission and advise regarding raising of water level in the reservoir beyond 136 ft as a result of strengthening of dam.

8.     The Committee in its report of March, 2001 opined that with the strengthening measures implemented, the water level can be raised from 136 ft. to 142 ft. without endangering safety of the dam. Further raising of water level to 152 ft. will be considered after balance strengthening measures are implemented.

9.                  In the case of Transfer Petition Dr. Subramanian Swamy Vs Tamil Nadu, the Report of the Expert Committee was filed in the Hon’ble Supreme Court on 31.8.2001 and also sent to the State Governments of Kerala and Tamil Nadu.

10        In writ Petition ( C) No. 386 of 2001 (Mulla Periyar Environmental Protection Forum Vs Union of India and Ors) the Supreme Court in its Judgement dated 27.2.2006, permitted the Government of Tamil Nadu to raise the water level of Mulla Periyar dam from 136 ft. to 142 ft. and take up  the remaining strengthening measures.

11.      Consequent to the aforesaid orders of the Supreme Court of India, the Kerala Government passed the Kerala Irrigation and Water Conservation (Amendment) Act 2006 which received the assent of the Governor   on 18th March 2006 which prohibited the raising of water level beyond 136 ft. in the Mulla Periyar Dam as Mullaperiyar Dam was placed under the Schedule of ‘Endangered Dams’.

12.     The Government of Tamil Nadu filed a suit No. 3 of 2006 – State of Tamil Nadu v/s State of Kerala and Union of India in the Hon’ble Supreme Court on 31.3.2006 praying for -

(i)                 Declaration of Kerala Irrigation and Water Conservation (Amendment) Act 2006 passed by Kerala Legislature as unconstitutional in its application to and effect on Mulla Periyar Dam.

(ii)               Pass a decree of permanent injunction restraining Kerala from application and enforcing impunged legislation enforcing with or obstructing Tamil Nadu from increasing the water level to 142 feet and from carrying out the repair works as per judgment of Supreme Court dated 27th February 2006.

13.      A Review Petition filed by the State of Kerala on 3.4.2006 was dismissed by the Supreme Court on 27.7.2006.

14.      In the matter referred to in para 13 above, the Hon’ble Supreme Court has passed an order on 25.9.2006 stating “the two State Governments independently or with the intervention of the Union of India may try to sort out the dispute, if possible.

15.      The Hon’ble Union Minister (WR) convened an inter-State meeting of the Chief Ministers of States of Tamil Nadu & Kerala on Mulla periyar dam issue on 29.11.2006 at New Delhi.  Hon’ble Union Minister (WR) further discussed matter with the Minister (WR/PW) from the States of Tamil Nadu & Kerala on18.12.2006.  The States of Tamil Nadu and Kerala reiterated their respective stand in the meetings and no consensus could be reached regarding a solution acceptable to both States. The matter is now subjudice.

16.              Subsequently, Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu met Hon’ble Prime Minister on 18.12.2007 and Hon’ble Prime Minister suggested him to have a meeting with Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala on Mulla Periyar issue.  Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu met Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala on 19.12.2007 in presence of Hon’ble Union Minister of Water Resources.  Further a letter dated 20.12.2007  was  received from the Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu  mentioning that in the above meeting, Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu suggested to oversee the seepage measurement of the dam by engineers not belonging to either of the two States through CWC and Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala  agreed to consider them.

17.       Later, the Govt. of Tamil Nadu forwarded a letter dt 22/1/08 of Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala addressed to Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu wherein it is mentioned that in the meeting dt 19/12/2007 he suggested a joint mechanism to monitor the seepage. The Govt. of Tamil Nadu also enclosed a letter dated 4/2/2008 from Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu addressed to Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala wherein it is mentioned that joint monitoring was not discussed in the meeting.

18.     CWC was requested to suggest a suitable mechanism for monitoring the seepage and possible structure of the Committee to monitor it. They suggested a nine- member Committee headed by a Chief Engineer, Central Water Commission having representatives from both States for Monitoring the seepage of Mulla Periyar Dam.   The composition of the Committee along with terms of reference was sent to Chief Secretary,  Government of Tamil Nadu and Kerala vide letter dated 28.4.2008 for  their concurrence / suggestions.

19.       The Government of Tamil Nadu vide its letter dated 17.6.2008 has sent its comments on the proposed Monitoring Committee stating that the present proposal of the Government of India to constitute a Committee comprising officers from CWC, Tamil Nadu Government and Kerala Government to measure the seepage in Mulla Periyar Dam is not in conformity with the discussion held in the meeting dated 19.12.2007 and proposal will lead to more and more complications and thus not acceptable to Govt. of Tamil Nadu. The Govt. of Kerala vide letter dt 24.2.2009 informed that the stand taken by the Govt. of Tamil Nadu for  neutral agency of experts excluding those form Kerala and Tamil Nadu is not acceptable to them.

20.      In the meanwhile, Govt. of Kerala has got done hydrological review studies from a professor of IIT, Delhi and has since filed the said hydrological studies report in the Hon’ble Supreme Court on 15.07.08 in connection with Suit No.3 of 2006 filed by the Government of Tamil Nadu. It has been concluded in the report that the Mulla Periyar dam is hydrologic ally unsafe for passing the estimated Probable Maximum Flood (2, 91,275 cusec / 8,248 cusec) with the existing spillway capacity. Comments of Hydrological Studies Organisation, CWC on the report were forwarded to the Govt. Advocate as per instructions of MoWR vide CWC letter dated 13.10.08. CWC has commented that the difference in the adopted values of Design Rainfall (Storm) depth, Time distribution of rainfall, Unit hydrograph & Infiltration rate have resulted in estimation of higher flood peak (PMF) and the said studies by the IIT Professor  does  not appear to be well founded.

21.      Meanwhile the Government of Kerala constituted a Committee in May 2009 which submitted its report in June, 2009. The Committee suggested mapping of the underwater area, installation of highly sensitive computer operated Seismograph and construction of a new Dam downstream of existing dam. The Committee has also opined that the dam has reached such a deteriorated condition that no amount of rectification work could salvage it to a safe and healthy condition.  Keeping in view this report, Minister (WR) advised Chairman, CWC in July, 2009 to constitute a team of officers to visit the dam and assess the present condition of the Mulla Periyar dam and look into the issues raised in the report of the above Expert Committee. The team had proposed a visit to the dam from 22-25 July, 2009 and the conveniences of the Government of Kerala and Tamil Nadu for the visit were sought. The Government of Tamil Nadu agreed to the proposed visit but the Government of Kerala requested for postponement of the proposed visit because of torrential rains. Thereafter, the visit could not materialize.

22.        Thereafter, Secretary (WR) convened a meeting on the Mulla Periyar Dam on 31.7.2009. The meeting was attended among others by Principal Secretary, PWD, Tamil Nadu and Additional Chief Secretary, WRD, Kerala. In the meeting the representative of Kerala informed that the Kerala Govt. visualizes construction of new dam as the only feasible solution and they have started survey and investigation for a new dam at an alternate site downstream of the existing dam and they may also consider the construction of a new dam at their own cost. Representative of Kerala stated in the meeting that the Govt. of Kerala also recognizes the established uses of water from the dam by Tamil Nadu as per the existing agreement between the two States and will continue the same after the construction of a new dam. In the said meeting the representative of Govt. of Tamil Nadu informed that the Govt. of Tamil Nadu would examine the proposal of the Govt. of Kerala for new Dam after the same is formally received from them. In view of this, Hon’ble Minister (WR) vide DO dated 26.08.2009  requested Hon’ble Chief Minister, Kerala to send the proposal in this regard to the Govt. of Tamil Nadu for their consideration.

23.       Later, Govt. of Tamil Nadu vide letter dated 14.9.09 mentioned that as regards the decision that has emerged in the meeting, to examine the proposal of the Kerala Government for the construction of a new dam by Tamil Nadu Government, the Government of Tamil Nadu had already communicated to the Government of India as well as to the Government of Kerala that there is no need for construction of a new dam by the Kerala Government, as the existing dam after it is strengthened, functions like a new dam. They also  mentioned that Hon’ble Chief Minister of Tamil Nadu in his letter dated 13.07.09 to  Hon’ble Chief Minister of Kerala had mentioned that Kerala Govt. may not raise the issue of new dam any more.

24.       The Govt. of Kerala vide letter dated 26.9.2009 sent comments on the minutes of the meeting dated 31.7.2009 mentioning that the statement “The Govt. of Kerala also recognizes the established use of water from the dam by the Tamil Nadu as per the existing agreement between the two States and continue the same after the construction of new dam” is not acceptable.  What was mentioned in the meeting was that Kerala is willing to give water to Tamil Nadu.

25.   Further, Hon’ble Supreme Court heard the issues related to Mulla Periyar Dam on 10.11.2009 and passed the order that,

“As the case involves the resolution of said questions, the suit may be placed before the Hon’ble Chief Justice of India for necessary directions for placing it before a constitution Bench.

The contesting parties shall maintain status quo in respect of Mulla Periyar Dam as existing today.  However, order of status quo will not be an impediment for the plaintiff (State of Tamil Nadu) to carry out maintenance and repairs for proper upkeep of the said Dam.”

26.        The case was heard by five judges on 18.2.2010 and the Court directed Central Govt. to constitute an empowered Committee in this regard which would hear the parties to the suit on all issues that will be  raised before them, and furnish a report, as far as possible, with in six months from their constitution.

27        Following the order of Hon’ble Supreme Court dated 29.02.2010, Centre (MoWR) has constituted an Empowered Committee vide Notification dated the 30th April, 2010.   The Committee started its functioning and was to submit its report within six months period.  Further, Supreme Court vide its order dated 20th September, 2010 has extended the term of Committee by a further period of six months.  Therefore, implementing the said directions of the Supreme Court, the Central Government extends, the terms of Empowered Committee for a further period of six months w.e.f. 30th October, 2010 vide Notification dated the 28th October, 2010.

Current situation

In a rare unity in the Kerala assembly, the 141-member house unanimously passed a resolution that the central government should sanction a new dam to replace the leaking, masonry Mullaperiyar in Idukki district.

This is the third unanimous resolution passed by the Kerala assembly demanding a new dam. The first was passed in 1993 when K. Karunakaran of the Congress was the chief minister and the next came in 2009 when V.S. Achuthanandan of the CPI-M was heading the state government.

When Chief Minister Oommen Chandy read out the resolution that the only way to end the current impasse is a new dam and till that time the water level in the 115-year-old dam be reduced to 120 feet, it was welcomed by all members with the thumping of desks.

The three-and-half hours long debate saw members from both the treasury and opposition benches agreeing that the house was worried about the safety of the over a century old earthen dam as it could endanger the lives of over four million people in and around the five districts near it.

Leader of Opposition V.S. Achuthanandan went to the extent of demanding the resignation of Revenue Minister Thiruvanchoor Radhakrishnan for the remark made by Advocate General K.P. Dandapani in the Kerala High Court last week on the Mullaperiyar Dam.

It was reported in the media that Dandapani had said there was no relation between water level and the safety of the dam. He appeared before the cabinet and pointed out that he never said such a thing.

Kerala is worried that a strong earthquake might damage the dam and cause widespread destruction. It is seeking a new dam and has offered to fund and build it, but Tamil Nadu does not agree. Experts from Kerala side say if a quake strikes and the dam is damaged, over four million people and their property in districts of Idukki, Kottayam, Alappuzha, Ernakulam and parts of Thrissur would be washed away.

Kerala and Tamil Nadu have been at loggerheads over the dam, built under an 1886 accord between the then Maharaja of Travancore and the erstwhile British Raj. It is located in Kerala and its waters also serve Tamil Nadu.

Tamil Nadu wants the dam’s storage capacity to be increased by raising the dam height from 136 feet (41.5 metre) to 142 feet (43 metre) as the state’s irrigation needs have shot up.

Supreme Court tells Kerala, Tamil Nadu not to arouse people’s feelings

There is nothing serious, grave or emergent about the safety of the Mullaperiyar dam warranting our interference at this stage, the Supreme Court observed on 13.12.2011 and asked Tamil Nadu and Kerala not to arouse people’s feelings and create a fear psychosis.

The Empowered Committee, headed by the former Chief Justice of India, A.S. Anand, was looking into all aspects regarding the safety of the dam and no order was required at this stage, observed a five-judge Constitution Bench comprising Justices D.K. Jain, R.M. Lodha, C.K. Prasad, Deepak Verma and Anil R. Dave.

The Bench, however, said the apprehensions of Kerala regarding the safety of the dam could not be brushed aside since the water level in the dam had gone up beyond 136 ft on four days from November 26 to December 2, coupled with earthquakes.

The Bench made it clear to Tamil Nadu that it should maintain the water level at 136 ft.

The Bench was hearing applications filed by Kerala, to reduce the water level in the dam from 136 ft to 120 ft, and Tamil Nadu for deployment of CISF for protection of the dam and to pass an order to restrain Kerala Ministers and officials from making statements creating fear psychosis among the people about the safety of the dam.

Kalam favours armed forces for maintaining rivers, dams

Amid the friction between Tamil Nadu and Kerala over the Mullaperiyar dam issue, former President A P J Abdul Kalam on 14.12.2011 said the country cannot afford a civil war on water and suggested deployment of armed forces to maintain rivers and dams. “Water cannot be a (source of) conflict in India. India cannot afford a civil war on water… Indian rivers and dams have to be operated and maintained by army, navy or other armed forces for equitable distribution,” he said.

Mr. Kalam said chief ministers of Tamil Nadu and Kerala should reach for an amicable solution to the issue. “It is not wise to discuss the issue through media,” he cautioned. Strongly batting for interlinking of rivers, he said the country was “not prepared” to face natural disasters caused by floods. “India needs visionaries to launch a river linking project which may have to be completed in two decades and not a five year plan which will fit into politics…,” he said.

Later talking to reporters, he suggested a National Water Grid Management scheme which could be one of the mechanisms to resolve inter-state disputes. “Like national highways and the Central Power Grid, my suggestion is a National Water Grid Management (to resolve water disputes)…,” he said.

Kerala parties agree to call off stirs over Mullaperiyar

A day after the Supreme Court asked both Kerala and Tamil Nadu to cool tempers, major political parties of Kerala, including the Congress and the Left parties, on 14.12.2011 announced that they were calling off their respective agitations over the Mullaperiyar dam issue. Representatives of the parties said Prime Minister Manmohan Singh had assured them he would do his best to find an amicable solution to the issue over which political parties and organisations in Kerala and Tamil Nadu have been pitted against each other in recent weeks.

Dr. Manmohan Singh, who met an all-party delegation from Kerala at Parliament House, stressed on the need to create a conducive atmosphere in both States. He wanted politicians and others to restrain themselves as the Supreme Court was already seized of the matter, and not to do anything that might aggravate the situation. The delegation was led by Chief Minister Oommen Chandy and the former Chief Minister, V.S. Achuthanandan.

Tamil Nadu MPs’ protest

Meanwhile, a group of Congress MPs from Tamil Nadu, led by TNCC president K. Gnanadesikan and Dindigul MP N.S.V. Chithan, staged a demonstration near the Gandhi statue in the Parliament complex seeking deployment of the personnel of the Central Industrial Security Force in the Mullaperiyar dam area.

They also wanted the Centre to advise Kerala to allow an increase in the water level in the reservoir to 142 feet from the present 136 feet.

TN Assembly asks Kerala to amend Act for raising water level

The Tamil Nadu Assembly on 15.12.2011, in a special sitting, adopted a unanimous resolution, calling upon the Kerala government to make suitable amendments to the Kerala Irrigation and Water Conservation (Amendment) Act, 2006 to enable the water level of the 116-year-old Mullaperiyar dam to be raised to 142 feet. Moved by Chief Minister Jayalalithaa, the resolution also asked the Kerala government not to create hurdles to the execution of the remaining strengthening measures for facilitating the water level to be raised to 152 ft eventually.

Mullaperiyar issue has sown the seeds of mutual distrust between people on either side of the 116-year-old dam, but nobody wants a harvest of hate.

Mullaiperiyar: Empowered Committee leave no stone unturned

The members of the Supreme Court-appointed Empowered Committee’s panel inspected the Vaigai Dam and an electricity sub-station at the Lower Camp on 25.12.2011.

Led by former Chief Justice of India A S Anand, the panel members — Justices A R Lakshmanan and K T Thomas, C D Thatte and K K Mehta — have been on a visit to the Mullaiperiyar dam and adjoining areas to file a report before the Supreme Court on how to resolve the dispute between Tamil Nadu and Kerala.

The Committee has been collecting details about the stability of the dam from December 21. On December 23 and 24, 2011, the expert committee visited Idukki dam, Periyar dam, baby dam and its adjoining ones. On 25.12.2011, the members reviewed the water outlets of the Mullaiperiyar dam in TN.

Chief Engineer of Kerala Irrigation Department P Lathika, Periyar Dam Committee member James Wilson, Tamil Nadu Cauvery Technology Committee head Subramaniam, PWD Chief Engineer Rajagopal, Periyar-Vaigai Chief Engineer Sampath Kumar and others accompanied them.

The team inspected the smaller dams, Iraichal Palam and pipes for pumping out water during emergency situations in the Kumily-Lower Camp forest area. The team members also examined Periyar Hydraulic Power Station at the Lower Camp. As the dam was constructed using the surkhi ( a mixture containing burnt brick powder), the expert committee also took samples of limestone near the Lower Camp.

While inspecting the Vaigai dam, the committee opened the shutters to check their functioning and interacted with the engineers to know about the water outlets. The team also reviewed the Madurai-Sedapatti water supply system near Muthalakampatti and Peranai at Nilakottai near Dindigul.

Honour Supreme Court’s Verdict

In her memorandum dt 25.12.2011, Tamil Nadu Chief Minister Ms. Jayalalithaa urged Dr. Singh to advise the Kerala government to honour the Supreme Court’s February 27, 2006 order, allowing the raising of the water level initially from 136 to 142 feet. She sought his intervention to make appropriate amendments to the Kerala Irrigation and Water Conservation (Amendment) Act, 2006.

Ms. Jayalalithaa said Dr. Singh should advise Kerala not to venture upon the construction of a new dam, since the retrofitted dam was safe and functioning well. Besides asking for the deployment of the Central Industrial Security Force and removal of all encroachments in the leased area, she said the Prime Minister should order the National Disaster Management Authority to withdraw its notification forming a team of experts to prepare a contingency response plan.

May consider security for Mullaperiyar dam

Prime Minister Manmohan Singh on 26.12.2011 reportedly assured DMK that the Centre might consider providing security cover to Mullaperiyar dam over which Tamil Nadu and Kerala are locked in a raging row. According to Karunanidhi, Singh also said the Centre might examine the possibility of protecting the dam by itself. The DMK had earlier requested the chairman of the Supreme Court-appointed Empowered Committee on the dam issue to deploy Central Industrial Security Force (CISF) at the reservoir site, instead of Kerala police.

Mullaperiyar, Idukki dams safe, experts tell panel- 3.01.2012

Allaying the apprehensions of the people of Kerala and Tamil Nadu, the two technical experts of the Supreme Court appointed-Empowered Committee (EC) on 3.01.2012 informed the Committee that the recent tremors in that region did not have any impact on the Mullaperiyar and Idukki dams and that the dams were safe.

The two members — the former Secretary to the Union Ministry of Water Resources, C.D. Thatte, and retired Chief Engineer, Central Water Commission, D.K. Mehta — had inspected all the dams in and around the Mullaperiyar catchment area to ascertain their safety in the wake of the recent earthquakes.

The inspection came after Kerala filed an application seeking to bring on record the recent earthquakes and pleading for an oral hearing. The Committee had asked two of its members to conduct an on-the-spot inspection and submit a report.

The report was submitted to the EC’s head, the former Chief Justice of India, A.S. Anand. The other members on the Committee are retired Supreme Court Judges K.T. Thomas (representing Kerala) and A.R. Lakshmanan (representing Tamil Nadu).

At the meeting on 3.01.2012, the EC considered the report and the objections raised by Kerala during the inspection of the dam. The report concluded that the tremors did not have any impact on the Mullaperiyar dam and there was no danger to its safety.

The Committee took serious exception to the objection raised by Kerala that the views of the two members could not be construed as the views of the EC. It was pointed out that the EC had passed a resolution at an earlier meeting authorising the two technical members to carry out the inspection. The procedure adopted by the members could not be faulted by the Kerala government, it said.

The EC also considered the reports, studies and investigations conducted by various agencies constituted by it to go into the safety of the Mullaperiyar dam. The various tests and studies undertaken by the Committee are: scanning the up-steam face of the dam using remote-operated vehicle and digital camera by the Central Soil and Materials Research Station (CSMRS), Delhi; non-destructive test by the Central Water and Power Research Station (CWPRS), Pune; cable anchor stress test; study by the Geological Survey of India; bathymetric survey by the CWPRS; material testing by the CSMRS and the CWPRS; seepage study by the Bhabha Atomic Research Centre (BARC); flood study by the Central Water Commission (CWC); testing of the cores by the CWPRS/ CSMRS; in situ tests and stability check, both by the CWPRS; and checking of measuring instruments used in the dam.

The panel will meet again on January 24 and 25, 2012 to consider the modalities of finalising its report to be submitted to the Supreme Court, as its term ends in February, 2012.

The panel once again rejected Kerala’s request for copies of reports of various agencies, stating that such a request had already been rejected.

Jayalalithaa announces memorial for engineer, J. Pennycuick who built Mullaperiyar

Amid the simmering Mullaperiyar dam row, Tamil Nadu government on 8.01.2012 announced setting up of a memorial for British engineer Major (later Colonel) J. Pennycuick , who had constructed the dam at Lower Camp in Theni district over 116 years ago.

“I am happy to announce that a memorial to thankfully remember Cuick will be built at a cost of Rs. one crore and over 2500 sq ft at the Tamil Nadu Electricity Board premises in Lower Camp. Upon its completion, Cuick’s grandson will be invited for its inauguration,” Chief Minister Jayalalithaa said in a statement here, adding a statue of the engineer will also be installed there.

Since the dam has been functioning well and will remain strong for many hundred years more, people from the southern districts had placed a demand for constructing a memorial for Cuick to show our gratitude,” Ms. Jayalalithaa said.

By constructing the dam, “Cuick’s name had been etched in the hearts of the local people. The proposed initiative will be a fond remembrance of a man who paved the way for the prosperity of south Tamil Nadu,” she said.

Kerala sticks to stand on Mullaperiyar – 27.01.2012

Sticking to its stand on building a new dam in place of the 116-year-old Mullaperiyar reservoir, Kerala on 27.01.2012 said it is aware of the importance of giving water to five parched districts of Tamil Nadu, but is concerned over the safety of its people. “We know very well the importance of water from Mullaperiyar to Tamil Nadu. The five districts of Tamil Nadu are completely depending on water from Mullaperiyar. We are always for distribution of water without any objection,” Kerala Chief Minister Oommen Chandy told reporters in Chennai.

At the same time, Mr. Chandy said his government “is very much anxious” about the safety of the people of his State and the dam issue could be discussed by the two States to find an amicable solution. The Chief Minister said Kerala wanted to maintain cordial ties with Tamil Nadu.

Kerala earmarks Rs. 50 crore for new Mullaperiyar dam – 19.03.2012

Kerala Finance Minister K.M. Mani has earmarked Rs. 50 crore in the 2012-13 budget for construction of a new dam at Mullaperiyar.

Presenting the budget in the State Assembly on 19.03.2012, Mr. Mani said that the new dam would be constructed 1,300 metres downstream from the existing dam.

Kerala and Tamil Nadu, it may be recalled, have been engaged in a protracted court battle.

Mullaperiyar dam structurally & hydrologically safe: Panel

Setting at rest the controversy over the safety of the 116-year-old Mullaperiyar dam, the Empowered Committee, headed by the former Chief Justice of India A.S. Anand, has said it is “structurally and hydrologically safe, and Tamil Nadu can raise the water level from 136 to 142 feet after carrying out certain repairs.”

In its report submitted to the Supreme Court on 25.04.2012, the committee is understood to have said: “The dam is seismically safe.” Last year’s earth tremors in that region “did not have any impact on the Mullaperiyar dam and the Idukki reservoir and there was no danger to the safety of the two dams.”

The committee’s conclusion is expected to bring relief to both Kerala and Tamil Nadu after apprehensions were raised on the Mullaperiyar dam’s safety following mild tremors in that region. The committee gave its findings on the basis of the reports, studies and investigations conducted by various agencies constituted to go into the safety aspects. The committee was set up in February 2010 during the course of arguments on Tamil Nadu’s suit questioning the law enacted by Kerala to restrict the water level in the dam to 136 ft.

On Kerala’s demand for construction of a new dam, the Empowered Committee said that in view of the age of the existing reservoir, building a new one could be considered as an alternative proposal. If a new dam was constructed, the maximum water level (MWL) should be fixed at 155 ft and a fresh agreement signed between the two States on water sharing and maintenance.

Dissenting note

While Justice K.T. Thomas, retired Supreme Court judge representing Kerala on the committee, gave a dissenting note and said water level in the existing dam should not be raised above 136 feet, Justice A.R. Lakshmanan, retired Supreme Court judge representing Tamil Nadu, opposed the proposal for a new dam saying it was not necessary.

The committee framed five main issues: “Which strengthening measures as suggested by the CWC [Central Water Commission] have already been carried out by Tamil Nadu for the dam, each of the two: the main and baby dam components, to ensure its safety and stability based on the investigations so far carried out? Which remaining measures from amongst those suggested by the CWC are yet to be carried out by Tamil Nadu for the safety and stability of the dam and when will they be undertaken and completed? Should the reservoir level be raised from 136 ft.? If yes, what further measures for strengthening the existing dam do the two parties envisage to allow the raising of reservoir level to 142 ft. and beyond?”

Kerala proposed additional issues: “What are the needs of Tamil Nadu in the waters in the existing Mullaperiyar dam? Does Tamil Nadu suffer any injury, if the storage is not raised beyond 136 ft? Does the MWL go beyond 155 ft. submerging the lands which are not part of the Lease Deed of 1886? If so, to what extent? Will increase of storage beyond 136 ft. prejudicially affect the environment, ecology and biodiversity? Will the downstream Idukki dam collapse if the Mullaperiyar dam breaks? What will be the consequent loss of lives and property to both States?; What benefits would accrue to both States from the diversion of Periyar waters, under the alleged Lease Deed of 1886 and the supplemental agreements of 1970? Is Periyar an inter-State river?”

The Empowered Committee, which includes the former Secretary to the Ministry of Water Resources, C.D. Thatte, and the retired CWC Chief Engineer, D.K. Mehta, has answered all the issues in its 250-page report.

The case comes up for further hearing before a five-judge Constitution Bench on May 4, 2012.

Watch for more. To continue …..

Dream  Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*******

Impact of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) on Indian Economy

Thursday, December 8th, 2011

Impact of Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) on Indian Economy

Anand,  BA., B.L

Definition

Foreign direct investment (FDI) or foreign investment refers to the net inflows of investment to acquire a lasting management interest (10 percent or more of voting stock) in an enterprise operating in an economy other than that of the investor. It is the sum of equity capital,other long-term capital, and short-term capital as shown in the balance of payments. It usually involves participation in management, joint-venture, transfer of technology and expertise. There are two types of FDI: inward foreign direct investment and outward foreign direct investment, resulting in a net FDI inflow (positive or negative) and “stock of foreign direct investment”, which is the cumulative number for a given period. Direct investment excludes investment through purchase of shares. FDI is one example of international factor movement.

Types

A foreign direct investor may be classified in any sector of the economy and could be any one of the following:

  • an individual;
  • a group of related individuals;
  • an incorporated or unincorporated entity;
  • a public company or private company;
  • a group of related enterprises;
  • a government body;
  • an estate (law), trust or other social institution; or
  • any combination of the above.

The foreign direct investor may acquire voting power of an enterprise in an economy through any of the following methods:

  • by incorporating a wholly owned subsidiary or company
  • by acquiring shares in an associated enterprise
  • through a merger or an acquisition of an unrelated enterprise
  • participating in an equity joint venture with another investor or enterprise…

Foreign direct investment incentives may take the following forms:

  • low corporate tax and income tax rates
  • tax holidays
  • other types of tax concessions
  • preferential tariffs
  • special economic zones
  • EPZ – Export Processing Zones
  • Bonded Warehouses
  • Maquiladoras
  • investment financial subsidies
  • soft loan or loan guarantees
  • free land or land subsidies
  • relocation & expatriation subsidies
  • job training & employment subsidies
  • infrastructure subsidies
  • R&D support
  • derogation from regulations (usually for very large projects)

Foreign Direct Investments in India

Starting from a baseline of less than $1 billion in 1990, a recent UNCTAD survey projected India as the second most important FDI destination (after China) for transnational corporations during 2010-2012. As per the data, the sectors which attracted higher inflows were services, telecommunication, construction activities and computer software and hardware. Mauritius, Singapore, the US and the UK were among the leading sources of FDI.

FDI in 2010 was $24.2 billion, a significant decrease from both 2008 and 2009.  Foreign direct investment in August 2010 dipped by about 60% to aprox. $34 billion, the lowest in 2010 fiscal, industry department data released showed.  In the first two months of 2010-11 fiscal, FDI inflow into India was at an all-time high of $7.78 billion up 77% from $4.4 billion during the corresponding period in the previous year.

The world’s largest retailer WalMart has termed India’s decision to allow 51% FDI in multi-brand retail as a “first important step” and said it will study the finer details of the new policy to determine the impact on its ability to do business in Indi

Impact on 51% FDI on India

The decision to hold back FDI in multi-brand retail will have a strong impact on the domestic and foreign investor sentiment, another chamber, the Confederation of Indian Industry (CII), said in a release. “We firmly hope that this would not be a rollback and a quick consensus is reached,” CII Director General Chandrajit Banerjee said.

Describing the volte face as a case of “missed opportunity”, Assocham Secretary General D S Rawat said, “It will send a very negative message to foreign investors.”

Rawat said FDI in multi-brand retail could have created over 10 million jobs in three years, curbed wastage of farm products and benefited farmers through better prices for their produce.

FICCI urged the government to move ahead with this progressive reform and proposed solutions like considering a maximum of 49 per cent FDI in multi-brand retail and increasing the percentage of sourcing from the small scale sector, which was proposed to be fixed at a minimum 30 per cent.

The government was forced to put its decision to allow FDI in multi-brand retail on hold in view of stiff opposition from UPA ally Trinamool Congress and other political parties.

Impact in Tamil Nadu

Chennai, Nov 27: Opposing the government policy of allowing 51 percent FDI in multi-brand retail sector in India Tamil Nadu Chief Minister J Jayalalithaa on Sunday (today) said that she would not allow multi-brand global palyer to set up hyper markets in Tamil Nadu.

Jayalalithaa further said that government should reverse its “ill advised” move as it will monopolise the market, exploit farmers and consumers.

“I am constrained to state that my government will not allow the multi brand global players as permitted under the new policy to set up their hyper markets in Tamil Nadu,” Jayalalithaa declared.

The government new FDI retail policy to allow 51% foreign direct investment (FDI) in multi-brand retail segment will permit world’s top retail giant like Walmart, Carrefour and Tesco to set up market in the country. Earlier, such retailers were not allowed to coduct retail business in India.

Current Indian Market Situation

Retailing in India is one of the pillars of its economy and accounts for about 15% of its GDP. The Indian retail market is estimated to be US$ 450 billion and one of the top five retail markets in the world by economic value.

Organised retailing, absent in most rural and small towns of India in 2010, refers to trading activities undertaken by licensed retailers, that is, those who are registered for sales tax, income tax, etc. These include the publicly-traded supermarkets, corporate-backed hypermarkets and retail chains, and also the privately owned large retail businesses. Unorganised retailing, on the other hand, refers to the traditional formats of low-cost retailing, for example, the local mom and pop store, owner manned general stores, paan/beedi shops, convenience stores, hand cart and pavement vendors, etc.

Supermarkets and similar organized retail accounted for just 4% of the market in 2008. Until recently, regulations prevented most of the foreign investment in retailing. Some retails faced complying with over thirty regulations such as “signboard licences” and “anti-hoarding measures” before they could open doors. There are taxes for moving goods to states, from states, and even within states in some cases. However, the Indian government has been opening the retail market and simplifying regulations. In November 2011, Indian central government announced major reforms paving way for giants such as Walmart, Carrefour and Tesco, as well single brand majors such as IKEA, Nike, and Apple to enter one of the fastest growing retail market of 1.2 billion people. This announcement immediately caused intense activism – both in opposition and in support – within India. On 7 December 2011, Indian government conceding to the opposition, announced it is suspending the retail reforms till it reaches a consensus.

Most Indian shopping takes place in open markets or millions of small, independent grocery and retail shops. Shoppers typically stand outside the retail shop, ask for what they want, and cannot pick or examine a product from the shelf. Access to the shelf or product storage area is limited. Once the shopper requests the food staple or household product they are looking for, the shopkeeper goes to the container or shelf or to the back of the store, brings it out and offers it for sale to the shopper. Often the shopkeeper may substitute the product, claiming that it is similar or equivalent to the product the consumer is asking for. The product typically has no price label in these small retail shops; although some products do have a manufactured suggested retail price (MSRP) pre-printed on the packaging. The shopkeeper prices the food staple and household products arbitrarily, and two consumers may pay different prices for the same product on the same day. Price is sometimes negotiated between the shopper and shopkeeper. The shoppers do not have time to examine the product label, and do not have a choice to make an informed decision between competitive products.

India’s retail and logistics industry, organized and unorganized in combination, employs about 40 million Indians (3.3% of Indian population). The typical Indian retail shops are very small. Over 14 million outlets operate in the country and only 4% of them being larger than 500 sq ft (46 m2) in size. India has about 11 shop outlets for every 1000 people. Vast majority of the unorganized retail shops in India employ family members, do not have the scale to procure or transport products at high volume wholesale level, have limited to no quality control or fake-versus-authentic product screening technology and have no training on safe and hygienic storage, packaging or logistics. The unorganized retail shops source their products from a chain of middlemen who mark up the product as it moves from farmer or producer to the consumer. The unorganized retail shops typically offer no after-sales support or service. Finally, most transactions at unorganized retail shops are done with cash, with all sales being final.

Between 2000 to 2010, consumers in select Indian cities have gradually begun to experience the quality, choice, convenience and benefits of organized retail industry.

Growth over 1997-2010

India in 1997 allowed foreign direct investment (FDI) in cash and carry wholesale. Then, it required government approval. The approval requirement was relaxed, and automatic permission was granted in 2006. Between 2000 to 2010, Indian retail attracted about $1.8 billion in foreign direct investment, representing a very small 1.5% of total investment flow into India.

Single brand retailing attracted 94 proposals between 2006 and 2010, of which 57 were approved and implemented. For a country of 1.2 billion people, this is a very small number. Some claim one of the primary restraint inhibiting better participation was that India required single brand retailers to limit their ownership in Indian outlets to 51%. China in contrast allows 100% ownership by foreign companies in both single brand and multi-brand retail presence.

Indian retail has experienced limited growth, and its spoilage of food harvest is amongst the highest in the world, because of very limited integrated cold-chain and other infrastructure. India has only 5386 stand-alone cold storages, having a total capacity of 23.6 million metric tons. However, 80 percent of this storage is used only for potatoes. The remaining infrastructure capacity is less than 1% of the annual farm output of India, and grossly inadequate during peak harvest seasons. This leads to about 30% losses in certain perishable agricultural output in India, on average, every year.

Indian laws already allow foreign direct investment in cold-chain infrastructure to the extent of 100 percent. There has been no interest in foreign direct investment in cold storage infrastructure build out. Experts claim that cold storage infrastructure will become economically viable only when there is strong and contractually-binding demand from organized retail. The risk of cold storing perishable food, without an assured way to move and sell it, puts the economic viability of expensive cold storage in doubt. In the absence of organized retail competition and with a ban on foreign direct investment in multi-brand retailers, foreign direct investments are unlikely to begin in cold storage and farm logistics infrastructure.

Until 2010, intermediaries and middlemen in India have dominated the value chain. Due to a number of intermediaries involved in the traditional Indian retail chain, norms are flouted and pricing lacks transparency. Small Indian farmers realize only 1/3rd of the total price paid by the final Indian consumer, as against 2/3rd by farmers in nations with a higher share of organized retail. The 60%+ margins for middlemen and traditional retail shops have limited growth and prevented innovation in Indian retail industry.

India has had years of debate and discussions on the risks and prudence of allowing innovation and competition within its retail industry. Numerous economists repeatedly recommended to the Government of India that legal restrictions on organized retail must be removed, and the retail industry in India must be opened to competition. For example, in an invited address to the Indian parliament in December 2010, Jagdish Bhagwati, Professor of Economics and Law at the Columbia University analysed the relationship between growth and poverty reduction, then urged the Indian parliament to extend economic reforms by freeing up of the retail sector, further liberalisation of trade in all sectors, and introducing labor market reforms. Such reforms Professor Bhagwati argued will accelerate economic growth and make a sustainable difference in the life of India’s poorest.

A 2007 report noted that an increasing number of people in India are turning to the services sector for employment due to the relative low compensation offered by the traditional agriculture and manufacturing sectors. The organized retail market is growing at 35 percent annually while growth of unorganized retail sector is pegged at 6 percent.

The Retail Business in India is currently at the point of inflection. As of 2008, rapid change with investments to the tune of US $ 25 billion were being planned by several Indian and multinational companies in the next 5 years. It is a huge industry in terms of size and according to India Brand Equity Foundation (IBEF), it is valued at about US$ 395.96 billion. Organised retail is expected to garner about 16-18 percent of the total retail market (US $ 65-75 billion) in the next 5 years.

India has topped the A.T. Kearney’s annual Global Retail Development Index (GRDI) for the third consecutive year, maintaining its position as the most attractive market for retail investment. The Indian economy has registered a growth of 8% for 2007. The predictions for 2008 is 7.9%. The enormous growth of the retail industry has created a huge demand for real estate. Property developers are creating retail real estate at an aggressive pace and by 2010, 300 malls are estimated to be operational in the country.

Growth after 2011

Before 2011, India had prevented innovation and organized competition in its consumer retail industry. Several studies claim that the lack of infrastructure and competitive retail industry is a key cause of India’s persistently high inflation. Furthermore, because of unorganized retail, in a nation where malnutrition remains a serious problem, food waste is rife. Well over 30% of food staples and perishable goods produced in India spoils because poor infrastructure and small retail outlets prevent hygienic storage and movement of the goods from the farmer to the consumer.

One report estimates the 2011 Indian retail market as generating sales of about $470 billion a year, of which a miniscule $27 billion comes from organized retail such as supermarkets, chain stores with centralized operations and shops in malls. The opening of retail industry to free market competition, some claim will enable rapid growth in retail sector of Indian economy. Others believe the growth of Indian retail industry will take time, with organized retail possibly needing a decade to grow to a 25% share. A 25% market share, given the expected growth of Indian retail industry through 2021, is estimated to be over $250 billion a year: a revenue equal to the 2009 revenue share from Japan for the world’s 250 largest retailers.

The Economist forecasts that Indian retail will nearly double in economic value, expanding by about $400 billion by 2020. The projected increase alone is equivalent to the current retail market size of France.

In 2011, food accounted for 70% of indian retail, but was under-represented by organized retail. A.T. Kearney estimates India’s organized retail had a 31% share in clothing and apparel, while the home supplies retail was growing between 20% to 30% per year. These data correspond to retail prospects prior to November announcement of the retail reform.

Indian Retail Market

Indian market has high complexities in terms of a wide geographic spread and distinct consumer preferences varying by each region necessitating a need for localization even within the geographic zones. India has highest number of outlets per person (7 per thousand) Indian retail space per capita at 2 sq ft (0.19 m2)/ person is lowest in the world Indian retail density of 6 percent is highest in the world. 1.8 million households in India have an annual income of over 45 lakh (US$91,260).

Delving further into consumer buying habits, purchase decisions can be separated into two categories: status-oriented and indulgence-oriented. CTVs/LCDs, refrigerators, washing machines, dishwashers, microwave ovens and DVD players fall in the status category. Indulgence-oriented products include plasma TVs, state-of-the-art home theatre systems, iPods, high-end digital cameras, camcorders, and gaming consoles. Consumers in the status category buy because they need to maintain a position in their social group. Indulgence-oriented buying happens with those who want to enjoy life better with products that meet their requirements. When it comes to the festival shopping season, it is primarily the status-oriented segment that contributes largely to the retailer’s cash register.

While India presents a large market opportunity given the number and increasing purchasing power of consumers, there are significant challenges as well given that over 90% of trade is conducted through independent local stores. Challenges include: Geographically dispersed population, small ticket sizes, complex distribution network, little use of IT systems, limitations of mass media and existence of counterfeit goods.

Major Indian Retailers

Indian apparel retailers are increasing their brand presence overseas, particularly in developed markets. While most have identified a gap in countries in West Asia and Africa, some majors are also looking at the US and Europe. Arvind Brands, Madura Garments, Spykar Lifestyle and Royal Classic Polo are busy chalking out foreign expansion plans through the distribution route and standalone stores as well. Another denim wear brand, Spykar, which is now moving towards becoming a casualwear lifestyle brand, has launched its store in Melbourne recently. It plans to open three stores in London by 2008-end.

The low-intensity entry of the diversified Mahindra Group into retail is unique because it plans to focus on lifestyle products. The Mahindra Group is the fourth largest Indian business group to enter the business of retail after Reliance Industries Ltd, the Aditya Birla Group, and Bharti Enterprises Ltd. The other three groups are focusing either on perishables and groceries, or a range of products, or both.

  • REI AGRO LTD Retail: 6TEN and 6TEN kirana stores
  • Future Groups-Formats: Big Bazaar, Food Bazaar, Pantaloons, Central, Fashion Station, Brand Factory, Depot, aLL, E-Zone etc.
  • Raymond Ltd.: Textiles, The Raymond Shop, Park Avenue, Park Avenue Woman, Parx, Colourplus, Neck Ties & More, Shirts & More etc.
  • Fabindia: Textiles, Home furnishings, handloom apparel, jewellery
  • RP-Sanjiv Goenka Group Retail-Formats: Spencer’s Hyper, Spencer’s Daily, Music World, Au Bon Pain (Internaional bakery cafeteria), Beverly Hills Polo Club
  • The Tata Group-Formats: Westside, Star India Bazaar, Steeljunction, Landmark, Titan Industries with World of Titans showrooms, Tanishq outlets, Croma.
  • Reliance Retail-Formats: Reliance MART, Reliance SUPER, Reliance FRESH, Reliance Footprint, Reliance Living, Reliance Digital, Reliance Jewellery, Reliance Trends, Reliance Autozone, iStore
  • Reliance ADAG Retail-Format: Reliance World
  • K Raheja Corp Group-Formats: Shoppers Stop, Crossword, Hyper City, Inorbit Mall
  • Nilgiri’s-Formats: Nilgiris’ supermarket chain
  • Marks & Spencer: Clothing, lifestyle products, etc.
  • Lifestyle International-Lifestyle, Home Centre, Max, Fun City and International Franchise brand stores.
  • Pyramid Retail-Formats: Pyramid Megastore, TruMart
  • Next retail India Ltd (Consumer Electronics
  • Vivek Limited Retail Formats: Viveks, Jainsons, Viveks Service Centre, Viveks Safe Deposit Lockers
  • PGC Retail -T-Mart India, Switcher , Respect India , Grand India Bazaar ,etc.,
  • Subhiksha-Formats: Subhiksha supermarket pharmacy and telecom discount chain.
  • Trinethra- Formats: Fabmall supermarket chain and Fabcity hypermarket chain
  • Vishal Retail Group-Formats: Vishal Mega Mart
  • BPCL-Formats: In & Out
  • German Metro Cash & Carry
  • Shoprite Holdings-Formats: Shoprite Hyper
  • Paritala stores bazar: honey shine stores
  • Aditya Birla Group – “More” Outlets
  • Kapas- Cotton garment outlets
  • Nmart Retails with 71 operating Stores till now and total 153 Stores in India and 1 to open in Dubai Shortly. (Expected to be 150 by the end of Aug-2012)(www.nmart.co.in)

Entry of MNC

The world’s largest retailer by sales, Wal-Mart Stores Inc and Sunil Mittal’s Bharti Enterprises have entered into a joint venture agreement and they are planning to open 10 to 15 cash-and-carry facilities over seven years. The first of the stores, which will sell groceries, consumer appliances and fruits and vegetables to retailers and small businesses, is slated to open in north India by the end of 2008.

Carrefour, the world’s second largest retailer by sales, is planning to setup two business entities in the country one for its cash-and-carry business and the other a master franchisee which will lend its banner, technical services and know how to an Indian company for direct-to-consumer retail.

The world’s fifth largest retailer by sales, Costco Wholesale Corp (Costco) known for its warehouse club model is also interested in coming to India and waiting for the right opportunity.

Opposition to the retailers’ plans have argued that livelihoods of small scale and rural vendors would be threatened. However, studies have found that only a limited number of small vendors will be affected and that the benefits of market expansion far outweigh the impact of the new stores.

Tesco Plc., plans to set up shop in India with a wholesale cash-and-carry business and will help Indian conglomerate Tata group to grow its hypermarket business

Challenges

A McKinsey study claims retail productivity in India is very low compared to international peer measures. For example, the labor productivity in Indian retail was just 6% of the labor productivity in United States in 2010. India’s labor productivity in food retailing is about 5% compared to Brazil’s 14%; while India’s labor productivity in non-food retailing is about 8% compared to Poland’s 25%.

Total retail employment in India, both organized and unorganized, account for about 6% of Indian labor work force currently – most of which is unorganized. This about a third of levels in United States and Europe; and about half of levels in other emerging economies. A complete expansion of retail sector to levels and productivity similar to other emerging economies and developed economies such as the United States would create over 50 million jobs in India. Training and development of labor and management for higher retail productivity is expected to be a challenge.

To become a truly flourishing industry, retailing in India needs to cross the following hurdles:

  • Automatic approval is not allowed for foreign investment in retail.
  • Regulations restricting real estate purchases, and cumbersome local laws.
  • Taxation, which favours small retail businesses.
  • Absence of developed supply chain and integrated IT management.
  • Lack of trained work force.
  • Low skill level for retailing management.
  • Lack of Retailing Courses and study options
  • Intrinsic complexity of retailing – rapid price changes, constant threat of product obsolescence and low margins.

In November 2011, the Indian government announced relaxation of some rules and the opening of retail market to competition.

Indian Retail Reform

Until 2011, Indian central government denied foreign direct investment (FDI) in multi-brand Indian retail, forbidding foreign groups from any ownership in supermarkets, convenience stores or any retail outlets, to sell multiple products from different brands directly to Indian consumers.

The government of Manmohan Singh, prime minister, announced on 24 November 2011 the following:

  • India will allow foreign groups to own up to 51 per cent in “multi-brand retailers”, as supermarkets are known in India, in the most radical pro-liberalisation reform passed by an Indian cabinet in years;
  • single brand retailers, such as Apple and Ikea, can own 100 percent of their Indian stores, up from the previous cap of 51 percent;
  • both multi-brand and single brand stores in India will have to source nearly a third of their goods from small and medium-sized Indian suppliers;
  • all multi-brand and single brand stores in India must confine their operations to 53-odd cities with a population over one million, out of some 7935 towns and cities in India. It is expected that these stores will now have full access to over 200 million urban consumers in India;
  • multi-brand retailers must have a minimum investment of US$100 million with at least half of the amount invested in back end infrastructure, including cold chains, refrigeration, transportation, packing, sorting and processing to considerably reduce the post harvest losses and bring remunerative prices to farmers;
  • the opening of retail competition will be within India’s federal structure of government. In other words, the policy is an enabling legal framework for India. The states of India have the prerogative to accept it and implement it, or they can decide to not implement it if they so choose. Actual implementation of policy will be within the parameters of state laws and regulations.

The opening of retail industry to global competition is expected to spur a retail rush to India. It has the potential to transform not only the retailing landscape but also the nation’s ailing infrastructure.

A Wall Street Journal article claims that fresh investments in Indian organized retail will generate 10 million new jobs between 2012-2014, and about five to six million of them in logistics alone; even though the retail market is being opened to just 53 cities out of about 8000 towns and cities in India.

It is expected to help tame stubbornly high inflation but is likely to be vehemently opposed by millions of small retailers, who see large foreign chains as a threat. The need to control food price inflation — averaging double-digit rises over several years — prompted the government to open the sector, analysts claim. Hitherto India’s food supplies have been controlled by tens of millions of middlemen (less than 5% of Indian population). Traders add huge mark-ups to farm prices, while offering little by way of technical support to help farmers boost their productivity, packaging technology, pushing up retail prices significantly. Analysts said allowing in big foreign retailers would provide an impetus for them to set up modern supply chains, with refrigerated vans, cold storage and more efficient logistics. “I think foreign chains can also bring in humongous logistical benefits and capital,” Chandrajit Banerjee, director-general, Confederation of Indian Industry, told Reuters. “The biggest beneficiary would be the small farmers who will be able to improve their productivity by selling directly to large organised players,” Mr Banerjee said.

Indian retail reforms on hold

According to Bloomberg, on 3 December 2011, the Chief Minister of the Indian state of West Bengal, Mamata Banerjee, who is against the policy and whose Trinamool Congress brings 19 votes to the ruling Congress party-led coalition, claimed that India’s government may put the FDI retail reforms on hold until it reaches consensus within the ruling coalition. Reuters reports that this risked a possible dilution of the policy rather than a change of heart.

India Today claimed that the resistance to Indian retail reforms is primarily because it has been badly sold, even though it can help fix the exploitation of Indian farmers by the decades-old “arhtiya” and “mandi” monopoly system. India Today claims the policy is good for the small Indian farmer and the Indian consumer.

Pratap Mehta, president of the Centre for Policy Research, claimed any U-turn or postponement of retail reforms will cause an immense loss of face to the Congress-led central government of Manmohan Singh. The mom-and-pop farmers of India support these reforms. The consumers of India want the reforms. The government has already annoyed those who oppose change and innovation in retail. By putting retail reforms on hold, the government will additionally alienate much larger segment of India’s population supporting FDI. So they will now have the worst of both worlds, claims Mehta.

Deepak Parekh, Ashok Ganguly and other economic policy leaders of India, on 4 December 2011, called placing investment and innovation in retail on hold for the sake of vested interests as unfair and detrimental to vast majority in India. They urged farmers, consumers and the common people to raise their voice against this false drama of apprehension against investment and modernising trade in organised retailing. They called upon Indians to come out and strongly support progressive measures and reforms with the same spirit and gusto with which we take the liberties to criticize policies or issues we do not appreciate.

Several newspapers claimed on 6 December 2011 that India parliament is expected to shelve retail reforms while the ruling Congress party seeks consensus from the opposition and the Congress party’s own coalition partners. Suspension of retail reforms on 7 December 2011 would be, the reports claimed, an embarrassing defeat for the Indian government, suggesting it is weak and ineffective in implementing its ideas.

Anand Sharma, India’s Commerce and Industry Minister, after a meeting of all political parties on 7 December 2011 said, “The decision to allow foreign direct investment in retail is suspended till consensus is reached with all stakeholders.”

Social Impact and Controversy with Retail Reforms

The November 2011 retail reforms in India have sparked intense activism, both in opposition and in support of the reforms.

Controversy over Indian retail reforms

A horticultural produce retail market in Kolkata, India; produce loss in these retail formats is very high for perishables

Critics of the Indian retail reforms announcement are making one or more of the following points:

  • Independent stores will close, leading to massive job losses. Walmart employs very few people in the United States. If allowed to expand in India as much as Walmart has expanded in the United States, few thousand jobs may be created but millions will be lost.
  • Walmart will lower prices to dump goods, get competition out of the way, become a monopoly, then raise prices. We have seen this in the case of the soft drinks industry. Pepsi and Coke came in and wiped out all the domestic brands.
  • India doesn’t need foreign retailers, since homegrown companies and traditional markets may be able to do the job.
  • Work will be done by Indians, profits will go to foreigners.
  • Remember East India Company. It entered India as a trader and then took over politically.
  • There will be sterile homogeneity and Indian cities will look like cities anywhere else.
  • The government hasn’t built consensus.

Supporters claim none of these objections has merit. They claim:

  • Organized retail will need workers. Walmart employs 1.4 million people in United States alone. With United States population of about 300 million, and India’s population of about 1200 million, if Walmart-like retail companies were to expand in India as much as their presence in the United States, and the staffing level in Indian stores kept at the same level as in the United States stores, Walmart alone would employ 5.6 million Indian citizens. Walmart has a 6.5% market share of the total United States retail. Adjusted for this market share, the expected jobs in future Indian organized retail would total over 85 million. In addition, millions of additional jobs will be created during the building of and the maintenance of retail stores, roads, cold storage centers, software industry, electronic cash registers and other retail supporting organizations. Instead of job losses, retail reforms are likely to be massive boost to Indian job availability.
  • KPMG – one of the world’s largest audit companies – finds that in China, the employment in both retail and wholesale trade increased from 4% in 1992 to about 7% in 2001, post China opening its retail to foreign and domestic innovation and competition. In absolute terms, China experienced the creation of 26 million new jobs within 9 years, post China announcing FDI retail reforms. Additionally, contrary to some concerns in China, post retail reforms, the number of traditional small retailers also grew by 30% over 5 years.
  • India needs trillions of dollar to build its infrastructure, hospitals, housing and schools for its growing population. Indian economy is small, with limited surplus capital. Indian government is already operating on budget deficits. It is simply not possible for Indian investors or Indian government to fund this expansion, job creation and growth at the rate India needs. Global investment capital through FDI is necessary. Beyond capital, Indian retail industry needs knowledge and global integration. Global retail leaders, some of which are partly owned by people of Indian origin, can bring this knowledge. Global integration can potentially open export markets for Indian farmers and producers. Walmart, for example, expects to source and export some $1 billion worth of goods from India every year, since it came into Indian wholesale retail market.
  • Walmart, Carrefour, Tesco, Target, Metro, Coop are some of over 350 global retail companies with annual sales over $1 billion. These retail companies have operated for over 30 years in numerous countries. They have not become monopolies. Competition between Walmart-like retailers has kept food prices in check. Canada credits their very low inflation rates to Walmart-effect. Anti-trust laws and state regulations, such as those in Indian legal code, have prevented food monopolies from forming anywhere in the world. Price inflation in these countries has been 5 to 10 times lower than price inflation in India. The current consumer price inflation in Europe and the United States is less than 2%, compared to India’s double digit inflation.
  • The Pepsi and Coke example is meaningless in the context of Indian beverage market. More competition is lacking because of limited demand. Indian consumer has limited interest in soft drinks. Soft drinks represent less than 5% of Indian beverage market. Indian consumer prefers milk-based, tea and coffee and these account for 90% of Indian beverage market. In these markets, Coca Cola and Pepsi have plenty of competition. The next most important market in India is bottled water, that outsells combined soft drink sales of the Pepsi and Coca Cola. Bottled water, milk, coffee and tea market in India are big markets, and have plenty of domestic brands, European brands like Nestle, as well as Pepsi and Coca Cola. Organized retail too will have numerous brands and strong competition.
  • Comparing 21st century to 18th century is inappropriate. Conditions today are not same as in the 18th century. India wasn’t a democracy then, it is today. Global awareness and news media were not the same in 18th century as today. Consider China today. It has over 57 million square feet of retail space owned by foreigners, employing millions of Chinese citizens. Yet, China hasn’t become a vassal of imperialists. It enjoys respect from all global powers. Other Asian countries like Malaysia, Taiwan, Thailand and Indonesia see foreign retailers as catalysts of new technology and price reduction; and they have benefitted immensely by welcoming FDI in retail. India too will benefit by integrating with the world, rather than isolating itself.
  • With 51% FDI limit in multi-brand retailers, nearly half of any profits will remain in India. Any profits will be subject to taxes, and such taxes will reduce Indian government budget deficit. Many years ago, China adopted the retail reform policy India has announced; China allowed FDI in its retail sector. It has taken FDI-financed retailers in China between 5 to 10 years to post profits, in large part because of huge investments they had to make initially. Like China, it is unlikely foreign retailers will earn any profits in India for the first 5 to 10 years. Ultimately, retail companies must earn profits with hard work and by creating value.
  • States have a right to say no to retail FDI within their jurisdiction. States have the right to add restrictions to the retail policy announced before they implement them. Thus, they can place limits on number, market share, style, diversity, homogeneity and other factors to suit their cultural preferences. Finally, in future, states can always introduce regulations and India can change the law to ensure the benefits of retail reforms reach the poorest and weakest segments of Indian society, free and fair retail competition does indeed lead to sharply lower inflation than current levels, small farmers get better prices, jobs created by organized retail pay well, and healthier food becomes available to more households.
  • Inbuilt inefficiencies and wastage in distribution and storage account for why, according to some estimates, as much as 40% of food production doesn’t reach consumers. Fifty million children in India are malnourished. Food often rots at farms, in transit, or in antiquated state-run warehouses. Cost-conscious organized retail companies will avoid waste and loss, making food available to the weakest and poorest segment of Indian society, while increasing the income of small farmers. Walmart, for example, since its arrival in Indian wholesale retail market, has successfully introduced “Direct Farm Project” at Haider Nagar near Malerkotla in Punjab, where 110 farmers have been connected with Bharti Walmart for sourcing fresh vegetables directly, thereby reducing waste and bringing fresher produce to Indian consumers.
  • Indian small shops employ workers without proper contracts, making them work long hours. Many unorganized small shops depend on child labour. A well-regulated retail sector will help curtail some of these abuses.
  • Organized retail has enabled a wide range of companies to start and flourish in other countries. For example, in the United States, an organized retailer named Whole Foods has rapidly grown to annual revenues of $9 billion by working closely with farmers, delighting customers and caring about the communities it has stores in.
  • The claims that there is no consensus are without merit. About 10 years ago, when opposition formed the central government, they had proposed retail reforms and suggested India consider FDI in retail. Retail reforms discussions are not new. More recently, retail reforms announced evolved after a process of intense consultations and consensus building initiative. In 2010, the Indian government circulated a discussion paper on FDI retail reforms. On July 6 2011, another version of the discussion paper was circulated by the central government of India. Comments from a wide cross-section of Indian society including farmers’ associations, industry bodies, consumer forums, academics, traders’ associations, investors, economists were analyzed in depth before the matter was discussed by the Committee of Secretaries. By early August 2011, the consensus from various segments of Indian society was overwhelming in favor of retail reforms. The reform outline was presented in India’s Rajya Sabha in August 2011. The announced reforms are the result of this consensus process. The current opposition is not helping the consensus process, since consensus is not built by threats and disruption. Those who oppose current retail reforms should help build consensus with ideas and proposals, if they have any. The opposition parties currently disrupting the Indian parliament on retail reforms have not offered even one idea or a single proposal on how India can eliminate food spoilage, reduce inflation, improve food security, feed the poor, improve the incomes of small farmers.

Opposition to retail reforms

Within a week of retail reform announcement, Indian government has faced a political backlash against its decision to allow competition and 51% ownership of multi-brand organized retail in India.

Despite the fact that Salman Khurshid, India’s law minister, claiming that many opposition parties, including the Bharatiya Janata Party, had privately encouraged the government to push through the retail reform, the intense criticism now targets Congress-led coalition government, and its decision to push through one of the biggest economic reforms in years for India. Opposition parties claim supermarket chains are ill-advised, unilateral and unwelcome.

The opposition claims the entry of organized retailers would lead to their dominance that would decimate local retailers and force millions of people out of work.

Mamata Banerjee, the chief minister of West Bengal and the leader of the Trinamool Congress, announced her opposition to retail reform, claiming “Some people might support it, but I do not support it. You see America is America … and India is India. One has to see what one’s capacity is.”

Other states whose Chief Ministers have either personally announced opposition or announced reluctance to implement the retail reforms: Tamil Nadu, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar and Madhya Pradesh.

Chief Ministers of many states have not made a personal statement in opposition or support of India needing retail reforms. Gujarat, Kerala, Karnataka and Rajasthan are examples of these states. Both sides have made conflicting claims about the position of chief ministers from these states.

A Wall Street Journal article reports that in Uttar Pradesh, Uma Bharti, a senior leader of the opposition Bharatiya Janata Party (BJP), threatened to “set fire to the first Wal-Mart store whenever it opens;” with her colleague Sushma Swaraj busy tweeting up a storm of misinformation about how Wal-Mart allegedly ruined the U.S. economy.

On 1 December 2011, an India-wide “bandh” (close all business in protest) was called by political parties opposing the retail reform. While many organizations responded, the reach of the protest was mixed. The Times of India, a national newspaper of India, claimed people appeared divided over the bandh call and internal rivalry among trade associations led to a mixed response, leaving many stores open day-long and others opening for business as usual in the second half of the day. Even Purti Group, a network of stores owned and operated by Nitin Gadkari were open for business, ignoring the call for bandh. Gadkari is the president of BJP, the key party currently organizing opposition to retail reform.

The Hindu, another widely circulated newspaper in India, claimed the opposition’s call for a nationwide shutdown on 1 December 2011, in protest of retail reform received a mixed response. Some states had strong support, while most did not. Even in states where opposition political parties are in power, many ignored the call for the shutdown. In Gujarat, Bihar, Delhi, Andhra Pradesh, Haryana, Punjab and Assam the call evoked a partial response. While a number of wholesale markets observed the shutdown, the newspaper claimed a majority of kirana stores and neighborhood small shops — for whom apparently the trade bandh had been called — remained open, ignoring the shutdown call. Conflicting claims were made by the organizers of the nationwide shutdown. Contrary to eyewitness reports, one Trader union’s secretary general claimed traders across the country participated wholeheartedly in the strike.

The political parties opposing the retail reforms physically disrupted and forced India’s parliament to adjourn again on Friday 2 December 2011. The Indian government refused to cave in, in its attempt to convince through dialogue that retail reforms are necessary to protect the farmers and consumers. Indian parliament has been dysfunctional for the entire week of November 28 2011 over the opposition to retail reforms.

Support for retail reforms

In a pan-Indian survey conducted over the weekend of 3 December 2011, overwhelming majority of consumers and farmers in and around ten major cities across the country support the retail reforms. Over 90 per cent of consumers said FDI in retail will bring down prices and offer a wider choice of goods. Nearly 78 per cent of farmers said they will get better prices for their produce from multi-format stores. Over 75 per cent of the traders claimed their marketing resources will continue to be needed to push sales through multiple channels, but they may have to accept lower margins for greater volumes.

Farmer groups

Various farmer associations in India have announced their support for the retail reforms. For example:

  • Shriram Gadhve of All India Vegetable Growers Association (AIVGA) claims his organization supports retail reform. He claimed that currently, it is the middlemen commission agents who benefit at the cost of farmers. He urged that the retail reform must focus on rural areas and that farmers receive benefits. Gadhve claimed, “A better cold storage would help since this could help prevent the existing loss of 34% of fruits and vegetables due to inefficient systems in place.” AIVGA operates in nine states including Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, West Bengal, Bihar, Chattisgarh, Punjab and Haryana with 2,200 farmer outfits as its members.
  • Bharat Krishak Samaj, a farmer association with more than 75,000 members says it supports retail reform. Ajay Vir Jakhar, the chairman of Bharat Krishak Samaj, claimed a monopoly exists between the private guilds of middlemen, commission agents at the sabzi mandis (India’s wholesale markets for vegetables and farm produce) and the small shopkeepers in the unorganized retail market. Given the perishable nature of food like fruit and vegetables, without the option of safe and reliable cold storage, the farmer is compelled to sell his crop at whatever price he can get. He cannot wait for a better price and is thus exploited by the current monopoly of middlemen. Jakhar asked that the government make it mandatory for organized retailers to buy 75% of their produce directly from farmers, bypassing the middlemen monopoly and India’s sabzi mandi auction system.
  • Consortium of Indian Farmers Associations (CIFA) announced its support for retail reform. Chengal Reddy, secretary general of CIFA claimed retail reform could do lots for Indian farmers. Reddy commented, “India has 600 million farmers, 1,200 million consumers and 5 million traders. I fail to understand why political parties are taking an anti-farmer stand and worried about half a million brokers and small shopkeepers.” CIFA mainly operates in Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka and Tamil Nadu; but has a growing members from rest of India, including Shetkari Sanghatana in Maharashtra, Rajasthan Kisan Union and Himachal Farmer Organisations.
  • Prakash Thakur, the chairman of the People for Environment Horticulture & Livelihood of Himachal Pradesh, announcing his support for retail reforms claimed FDI is expected to roll out produce storage centers that will increase market access, reduce the number of middlemen and enhance returns to farmers. Highly perishable fruits like cherry, apricot, peaches and plums have a huge demand but are unable to tap the market fully because of lack of cold storage and transport infrastructure. Sales will boost with the opening up of retail. Even though India is the second-largest producer of fruits and vegetables in the world, its storage infrastructure is grossly inadequate, claimed Thakur.
  • Sharad Joshi, founder of Shetkari Sangathana (farmers association), has announced his support for retail reforms. Joshi claims FDI will help the farm sector improve critical infrastructure and integrate farmer-consumer relationship. Today, the existing retail has not been able to supply fresh vegetables to the consumers because they have not invested in the backward integration. When the farmers’ produce reaches the end consumer directly, the farmers will naturally be benefited. Joshi feels retail reform is just a first step of needed agricultural reforms in India, and that the government should pursue additional reforms.

Suryamurthy, in an article in The Telegraph, claims farmer groups across India do not support status quo and seek retail reforms, because with the current retail system the farmer is being exploited. For example, the article claims:

  • Indian farmers get only one third of the price consumers pay for food staples, the rest is taken as commissions and markups by middlemen and shopkeepers
  • For perishable horticulture produce, average price farmers receive is barely 12 to 15% of the final price consumer pays
  • Indian potato farmers sell their crop for Rs. 2 to 3 a kilogram, while the Indian consumer buys the same potato for Rs. 12 to 20 a kilogram.

Economists and entrepreneurs

Many business groups in India are welcoming the transformation of a long-protected sector that has left Indian shoppers bereft of the scale and variety of their counterparts in more developed markets.

B. Muthuraman, the president of the Confederation of Indian Industry, claimed the retail reform would open enormous opportunities and lead to much-needed investment in cold chain, warehousing and contract farming.

Organized retailers will reduce waste by improving logistics, creating cold storage to prevent food spoilage, improve hygiene and product safety, reduce counterfeit trade and tax evasion on expensive item purchases, and create dependable supply chains for secure supply of food staples, fruits and vegetables. They will increase choice and reduce India’s rampant inflation by reducing waste, spoilage and cutting out middlemen. Fresh investment in organized retail, the supporters of retail reform claim will generate 10 million new jobs by 2014, about five to six million of them in logistics alone.

Organized retail will offer the small Indian farmer more competing venues to sell his or her products, and increase income from less spoilage and waste. A Food and Agricultural Organization report claims that currently, in India, the small farmer faces significant losses post-harvest at the farm and because of poor roads, inadequate storage technologies, inefficient supply chains and farmer’s inability to bring the produce into retail markets dominated by small shopkeepers. These experts claim India’s post-harvest losses to exceed 25%, on average, every year for each farmer.

Unlike the current monopoly of middlemen buyer, retail reforms offer farmers access to more buyers from organized retail. More buyers will compete for farmers produce leading to better support for farmers and to better bids. With less spoilage of staples and agricultural produce, global retail companies can find and provide additional markets to Indian farmers. Walmart, since its arrival in India’s wholesale retail market, already sources and exports about $1 billion worth of Indian goods for its global customers.

Not only do these losses reduce food security in India, the study claims that poor farmers and others loose income because of the waste and inefficient retail. Over US$50 billion of additional income can become available to Indian farmers by preventing post-harvest farm losses, improving transport, proper storage and retail. Organized retail is also expected to initiate infrastructure development creating millions of rural and urban jobs for India’s growing population. One study claims that if these post-harvest food staple losses could be eliminated with better infrastructure and retail network in India, enough food would be saved every year to feed 70 to 100 million people over the year.

Supporters of retail reform, The Economist claims, say it will increase competition and quality while reducing prices helping to reduce India’s rampant inflation that is close to the double digits. These supporters claim that unorganized small shopkeepers will continue to exist alongside large organized supermarkets, because for many Indians they will remain the most accessible and most convenient place to shop.

Chief Ministers of Indian states

Supporters of retail reform who have voiced the need to promote organized retail include Chief Ministers of several states of India, several belonging to political parties that have no affiliation with Congress-led central government of India. The list includes the Chief Ministers of Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu and Gujarat. In a report submitted earlier in 2011, these Chief Ministers urged the Prime Minister to prioritize reforms to help promote organized retail, shorten the retail path from farm to consumer, allow organized retail to buy direct from farmers at remunerative produce prices, and reduce farm to retail costs. Similarly, the Chief Minister of Delhi has come out in support of the retail reform, as have the Chief Ministers of the two farming states of Haryana and Punjab in north India. The Chief Ministers of Haryana and Punjab claim that the announced retail reforms will immensely benefit farmers in their states.

The Chief Minister of the state of Maharashtra – the state with the highest GDP in India and home to its financial capital Mumbai – has also welcomed the retail reform.

Tarun Gogoi, the Chief Minister of Assam, an eastern state in India, announcing his support to the retail reform, claimed “this will go a long way in bringing about a sea change in rural economy. The decision will boost agriculture and allied sectors, manufacturing, logistics, integrated cold chains, refrigerated transportation and food processing facilities in a big way.” Criticising the BJP-organized opposition, Gogoi claimed that these parties who had just a few years ago dubbed opening up retail as good for India, are now singing a different tune.

Current supermarkets

Existing Indian retail firms such as Spencer’s, Foodworld Supermarkets Ltd, Nilgiri’s and ShopRite support retail reform and consider international competition as a blessing in disguise. They expect a flurry of joint ventures with global majors for expansion capital and opportunity to gain expertise in supply chain management. Spencer’s Retail with 200 stores in India, and with retail of fresh vegetables and fruits accounting for 55 per cent of its business claims retail reform to be a win-win situation, as they already procure the farm products directly from the growers without the involvement of middlemen or traders. Spencer’s claims that there is scope for it to expand its footprint in terms of store location as well as procuring farm products. Foodworld, which operates over 60 stores, plans to ramp up its presence to more than 200 locations. It has already tied up with Hong Kong-based Dairy Farm International. With the relaxation in international investments in Indian retail, India’s Foodworld expects its global relationship will only get stronger. Competition and investment in retail will provide more benefits to consumers through lower prices, wider availability and significant improvement in supply chain logistics

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywinl.com

*******

A Law that thwarts Justice

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

Prabha Sridevan

Section 15 of the Hindu Succession Act that determines the order of succession in the case of a Hindu woman who dies intestate should be amended for, it reflects an entrenched system of subjugation of women.

The family that had sent a young woman back to her parents after her husband’s death, surfaced when she died. There was a contest between her mother and the husband’s sister’s sons for her property. The mother lost all the way up to the Supreme Court, which noted that it was a “hard case.”

“What women can expect from Courts… is a qualified degree of equal treatment,” wrote Professor Wendy Williams in “The Equality Crisis: Some Reflections on Culture, Courts, and Feminism,” published in 7 Women’s Rts. L. Rep. 175 (1982), adding that “women’s equality as delivered by Courts can only be an integration into a pre-existing, predominantly male world.”

This is so because, though the courts may be well meaning and earnestly intend to uphold equal rights for women, they can only reflect the shared life experience of individuals. This takes a largely male hue, not only because the judgment-deliverers are predominantly male, but also because society systemically supports male supremacy. And this systemic slant shades the thought processes that lie behind laws too, and the courts apply the laws in their judgments.

The skewed reality in which gender is positioned in the social, political, economic and cultural transactions shows up the fact that law is not gender-based — sometimes it is not even gender-neutral. Gender-neutrality will not be enough if it merely maintains the status quo — which is nothing but the perpetuation of gender discrimination. Women need, and must have, affirmation of their equality.

If enactment of laws was sufficient to protect women, then women in India are on velvet. But reality bites. The law is observed in the breach, or the law is not effectively enforced by the law-enforcement agencies, or judicial redress lies beyond the woman’s horizon, or yet, the evil is seen as an accepted practice. Or women get beaten by “hard cases.”

Look at this particular “hard case,” which is reported in (2009)15 SCC Page 66 Omprakash and Others Vs. Radhacharan and Others. In 1955, Narayani Devi married Deendayal Sharma, who died within three months. Soon she was driven out of her matrimonial home. She lived with her parents, earned a living and died on July 11, 1966. She left behind a substantial estate, but wrote no will. Both her mother and her husband’s family claimed a succession certificate. The Supreme Court considered the scope of Section 15 of the Hindu Succession Act and held against the mother.

Section 15(1) says that if a Hindu woman dies without leaving a will, her property will devolve in the following order. The first in the order are her children, children of a predeceased child and her husband. If none of these persons is available, then it will go to the next in line: the heirs of the husband. Standing behind them will be the heirs of the father and the mother. Section 15(2) says that notwithstanding these provisions, if the woman is not survived by a child or the children of a predeceased child, then any property she inherited from her father or mother will go to the father’s heirs, and any property she inherited from her husband or father-in-law will go to the husband’s heirs.

The Supreme Court held that Section 15(1) lays down the ordinary rule of succession; Section 15(2)(a) only carves out an exception to Section 15(1). It observed that the law is silent on a Hindu woman’s self-acquired property, and such property cannot be considered as property inherited from her parents. The court said: “This is a hard case… But then only because a case appears to be hard would not lead us to invoke different interpretation of a statutory provision, which is otherwise impermissible. It is now a well settled principle in law that sentiment or sympathy alone would not be a guiding factor in determining the rights of the parties which are otherwise clear and unambiguous.”

In Narayani Devi’s case, the mother’s claim was not based on sympathy or sentiment, but logic and principles of fairness, equity and justice. The Supreme Court, however, found that the law was a hurdle to her claim.

Justice A.M. Bhattacharjee wrote thus in Modern Hindu Law Under Constitution: “Under the provision of Section 15(1) read with sub-section (2) in the absence of children, the order of succession in the case of a female Hindu would vary according to the source of acquisition of property.” He asked why the source of acquisition should be a determinant in the case of a Hindu woman when it is not so in the case of a Hindu man. “Unless we still want to perpetuate in a somewhat different form the old outmoded view that ownership of property cannot be full but must be somewhat limited.”

A mother shares equally with the children and the widow when a son predeceases her. But when a married daughter dies, the mother ranks after the husband’s heirs. This is the law as enacted in 1955-1956. Hindu law as it existed before the Constitution has been the subject of criticism for the glaring inequalities that it perpetuated. But we find lurking inequalities even in subsequent enactments.

Ironically, some of the ancient texts have a more pragmatic and equal approach in such cases. Stridhana, according to some texts, is categorised as technical and non-technical. Non-technical stridhana is that property which is acquired by a woman through her skill and mechanical arts (Vasishta). In the case of a woman who has no issues, the heirs to stridhana are her husband, mother, brother or father (Devala). Aprajaayaa haredbhartaa mata bhrata pitaapi va, says Devalasmrti (A.D. 600-900).

In the 21st edition of Principles of Hindu Law (Mulla), it is observed that Section 15(2) “seem to have been made on the ground that they prevent such property passing into the hands of persons to whom justice would require it should not pass and on the ground that the exceptions are in the interest of the intestate herself.” If the intention of this provision is to prevent property from devolving on persons to whom justice “would require it should not pass,” then the family that had refused to take care of Narayani should not have got anything.

In India those who own property do not always write a will. Narayani did not. She did not know the law of succession. She certainly would not have wanted her husband’s sister’s children to grab her earnings. If her spirit is floating around, it must be a very unhappy one. In India if a woman loses her husband because of death, desertion or divorce, there is a high probability that she will come to be with her parents. In the present day, many women have self-acquired property that they have earned because of their parents’ support. These are the ground realities.

Section 15 should be amended. The order of succession should be altered. In addition to “inheritance,” other modes of acquisition from parents or because of parents could be added.

Justice Bhattacharjee’s criticism of Section 15 has been referred to above. Decades after his book was written, the injustice continues. Neither biological nor social differences shall corrupt the ideal of equality or the reality of equality. In this case the law views the man’s estate and the woman’s estate through different spectacles: her autonomy over her property is less complete than his. How else can one explain the injustice? There are many more such cases. The law should not stand in the way of justice.

Whether the Supreme Court could or should have addressed the gender discrimination, and seen that the apparent “hardness” of the case was only the outer layer of an entrenched system of subjugation of women, and unpeeled the layers, are questions that need not be argued now.

Professor Williams’ article says: “But to the extent the law of the public world must be reconstructed to reflect the needs and values of both sexes change must be sought from legislatures rather than courts. And women whose separate experience has not been adequately registered… are the ones who must seek the change.” It is time that this law is made gender-balanced.

(Prabha Sridevan, a former Judge of the Madras High Court, is Chairperson, Intellectual Property Appellate Board.)

Courtesy: The Hindu

Investigating the investigation

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

Vidya Subrahmaniam

A court judgment delivered earlier in 2011 holds important lessons for those engaged in investigating and fighting terrorism.

Questioning the methods of terror investigation is always a challenge because it is so easily seen as defending the enemies of the nation. The exercise is monumentally difficult after a benumbing bomb attack — especially if it has been judged to be the work of a home-grown Islamist organisation.

The raging anger at this time is in fact against too little, too careful policing, with voices clamouring for instant punishment to the perpetrators. And should the police, under pressure, go off beam and name a few incorrect names and round up a few misidentified suspects, the wrong is seen, not as a wrong, but, in a perverted sort of way, as a balancing act, a compensation for the injustice done to the terror victims. Even from a liberal point this can appear as unavoidable collateral damage suffered in the larger battle against terrorism.

But anguished demands for action and lashing out at imagined culprits can be horribly, embarrassingly off the mark, as the Anders Breivik shootings so chillingly demonstrated. The automatic assumption after the Oslo killings was that Islamists were behind it. Yet Breivik turned out to be insanely anti-Muslim. Imagine the decibel levels of anti-Muslim voices had Breivik not been found out as soon as he was. Within hours of the Oslo outrage, the Wall Street Journal ran a biting editorial (since revised) blaming it on Islamist terrorists: The jihadists, the leader said, had extracted a “terrible price” because of Norway’s commitment to “freedom of speech and conscience” and “every other freedom that still defines the West.” The WSJ leader went beyond the terror attack and became an ideological tirade against a faith seen to be in a classic clash against liberal Western values.

Back in India, there was the usual rush of slanted commentaries after the July 13, 2011 serial bombings in Mumbai. Even if the outrage was masterminded by the Indian Mujahideen (IM) or some other Islamist organisation — as indicated by the Union Home Minister — there was little justification for the offensive anti-Muslim tone in the post-blasts public conversation. A celebrity columnist blamed vote bank compulsions for the government’s failure to crush domestic terrorism. The sub-text: The investigating agencies needed to be ruthless in picking up Muslim suspects. On social networking sites, the language was coarser with not a few demanding saturation combing of Muslim neighbourhoods. Reporters freely identified alleged IM terrorists even as one hate-spewing newspaper article demanded disenfranchisement of Muslims for their alleged role in commissioning terror acts.

The Oslo shootings reinforced a point that was self-evident and yet seemed to require re-stating every time a bomb blast shattered the peace anywhere in India. Terror wears the mask of religion and this religion can be Islam, Christianity, Hinduism, Sikhism or something else. From Nathuram Godse in 1948 to Breivik today, we have seen terrorists claiming affinity to a host of faiths and ideologies. Nonetheless, Muslims alone have been made to feel that they have somehow to answer for the perverted acts of their alleged co-religionists. When Muslim boys are picked up and shown off as terrorists, there is rarely any interrogation of the police accounts despite their dreary sameness.

Over the past many years, we have become habituated to seeing young Muslim men, their faces covered, being paraded at press conferences. Each of these has been a trophy moment for the police and a spectacular newsbreak for the press. What happens when the same men are later released because the prosecution could not produce an iota of evidence?

Indeed, the spate of acquittals in many of the terror cases ought to induce some rethinking on policing methods and the rationality of picking up suspects just to be able to show quick, dramatic results. Whether it is Godhra 2002, the Delhi blasts of 2005 and 2008, the Mumbai train attacks of 2006, Mecca Masjid cases of 2007 or men and boys routinely picked up and charged with terrorism, the evidence presented in the courts has proved over and over to be wafer thin.

Maulana Umarji was not only the key conspirator in the Godhra train burning, but, according to then media reportage, he actively incited the mob. In February 2011, he was acquitted along with 63 others. As Jyoti Punwani noted in The Hindu, the Maulana had in fact played the opposite role, expressing “regret on behalf of his community, publicly and repeatedly.”

Dozens of boys arbitrarily picked up by the Andhra Pradesh police and chargesheeted in the Mecca Masjid blasts have since been honourably acquitted and are currently fighting to be compensated for the slur cast on them. Mohammad Salman, an alleged IM operative, whom the police recently linked to the July 13, 2011 Mumbai bombings, citing his interrogation report in the 2008 Delhi blasts case, turned out to have been discharged in that case. When the case came up in court, the seizure memos of the Uttar Pradesh police and the Delhi police did not match; the police showed his age as 27 when his parents were married in 1990 and his school certificate showed his birth year as 1992.

The Hindu came across several cases of blatant falsification of evidence against alleged terrorists. The Lucknow police’s case against Kolkata  resident Aziz-ur-Rahman was that on June 22, 2007, he and four others arrived in Lucknow armed with huge amounts of RDX and other explosives. On June 23 — after the Lucknow police arrested two of them — Rahman dumped the explosives in a hollow behind the city’s Sanjay Gandhi Post Graduate Institute of Medical Sciences and returned to  Kolkata. When defence counsel Mohammad Shoaib took up the case, he came across a glaring discrepancy. On June 23, 2007, Rahman was in the custody of the Jadavpur police facing a theft charge — a fact established by his production the same day before Additional Chief Judicial Magistrate (Alipore) J. Koley. But because Rahman was also charged under Section 399 (dacoity) in another case, Mr. Koley, in his order dated June 22, 2007, granted his custody to the West Bengal CID.

The most devastating blow to the prosecution case was dealt on February 2 this year by Delhi (Dwarka courts) Additional Sessions Judge Virender Bhat. Mr. Bhat’s judgment, delivered with rapier sharp wit and sarcasm, is a testament on the functioning of the Delhi’s police’s anti-terrorism wing, and ought to be compulsory reading for all those training to be investigators. If nothing else, they would learn the art of credible fabrication.

The prosecution case: At around midnight on June 27, 2005, an elite team led by anti-terrorism officer Ravinder Tyagi (the CBI asked for his punishment in another fabricated case), staged an encounter on the Gurgaon-Delhi Road which resulted in the capture of four alleged ISI agents and Kashmiri terrorists, Saqib Rahman alias Masood, Nazir Ahmad Sofi, Gulam Moinuddin Dar and Bashir Ahmed Shah. Mr.Tyagi had secret information that preparatory to a massive bomb attack in the Capital, the terrorists, carrying huge amounts of arms and ammunition, would be reaching Delhi from Gurgaon in a Tata Indica car. The raiding party, travelling in two vehicles, a Swaraj Mazda and a Maruti Gypsy, “gave chase to the Tata Indica” and blocked it from both ends. Terrorist Masood came out of the car and fired two rounds on the police party. Mr. Tyagi and his men “overpowered the terrorists,” including terrorist Dar who was about to lob a hand grenade.

In his judgment, Mr. Bhat tore the police version to shreds. The judge found it “shocking and unbelievable” that Mr. Tyagi took his own time to act on the “secret information” and did not pass it on to his superiors. “What if the terrorists had struck?” he asked, concluding that either “there was no information” or Mr. Tyagi had “ulterior” motives. About the policemen being able to easily disarm the terrorists, he said: “Such kind of imaginary bravery is seen only in Bollywood… Why would terrorists armed with AK 56 and hand grenades surrender to the police?… The encounter should have been fierce. Nothing like this happened which shows it (encounter) is totally imaginary and conceived by the police to implicate the accused in a false case.”

The Judge pointed out a host of other errors and contradictions — the site plan was falsified, the recoveries were planted, the terrorist vehicle, claimed by the police to have been stolen in May 2003, was registered only in July 2003. The prosecution case finally collapsed after the defence obtained the log book of the two police vehicles through Right to Information applications. The log book entries showed that neither the Swaraj Mazda nor the Gypsy went to the encounter spot on the night of June 27, 2005.

In conclusion the judge, who recommended punishment to Mr. Tyagi and his team, said: “It is difficult to take it (the stage-managed encounter) out of mind. These four police officers have brought utter shame and disrepute to the whole Delhi Police Force. In my opinion, there cannot be any more serious or grave crime than a police officer framing an innocent citizen in a false criminal case … It is not only unethical but also illegal for an investigating agency to resort to concoction, padding, fabrication of evidence — all serious offences under the law even to bring a known criminal to justice.”

Wise words that must be paid heed to by every policeman and every citizen who feel that the means are unimportant when the fight is against terrorism.

Let us amend the Law, it is only fair to women

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

Dr. Justice AR. Lakshmanan

Section 15 should be amended, so that in case a female Hindu dies intestate leaving her self-acquired property with no heirs, as mentioned in Clause ‘a’ of Section 15, the property should devolve on her husband’s heirs and also on the heirs of her paternal side.

This refers to the article “A law that thwarts justice” (The Hindu, June 27, 2011) by Ms. Prabha Sridevan, former Judge of the Madras High Court. I have analysed it and am in agreement with the views expressed by the author for my own reasons.

As Chairman of the Law Commission of India, I took up for consideration the necessity of amending Section 15 of the Hindu Succession Act, 1956 which deals with the general rules of Succession in the case of female Hindus dying intestate — not having made a will before one dies — in view of the vast societal changes that have taken place.

The Hindu Succession Act, 1956 is part of the Hindu Code which includes the Hindu Marriage Act, 1955, the Hindu Adoptions and Maintenance Act, 1956 and the Hindu Minority and Guardianship Act, 1956.

The Hindu Succession Act made a revolutionary change in the law for female Hindus. For the first time, a Hindu female could become an absolute owner of property. She could inherit equally with a male counterpart and a widow was also given importance regarding the succession of her husband’s property as also to her father’s property. The Act was amended in 2005 to provide that the daughter of a co-parcener in a joint Hindu family governed by the Mitakshara Law shall, by birth, become a co-parcener in her own right in the same manner as the son, having the same rights and liabilities in respect of the said property as that of a son.

Scheme of succession

Section 15 of the Hindu Succession Act propounds a definite and uniform scheme of succession to the property of a female Hindu who dies intestate. There are also rules set out in Section 16 of the Act which provides for the order of succession and the manner of distribution among heirs of a female Hindu.

Source of acquisition

The group of heirs of the female Hindu dying intestate is described in 5 categories as ‘a’ to ‘e’ of Section 15 (1) which is illustrated as under:

In a case where she dies intestate leaving property, her property will firstly devolve upon her sons and daughters so also the husband. The children of any pre-deceased son or daughter are also included in the first category of heirs of a female Hindu;

In case she does not have any heir as referred to above, i.e., sons, daughters and husband including children of any pre-deceased sons or daughters (as per clause ‘a’) living at the time of her death, then the next heirs will be the heirs of the husband;

Thirdly, if there are no heirs of the husband, the property would devolve upon the mother and father;

Fourthly, if the mother and father are not alive, then the property would devolve upon the heirs of the father which means brother, sister, etc;

The last and the fifth category is the heirs of the mother upon whom the property of the female Hindu will devolve if in the absence of any heirs falling in the four preceding categories.

This is the general rule of succession, but the Section also provides for two exceptions which are stated in Sub-Section (2). Accordingly, if a female dies without leaving any issue, then the property inherited by her from her father or mother will not devolve according to the rules laid down in the five entries as stated earlier, but upon the heirs of father. And secondly, in respect of the property inherited by her from her husband or father-in-law, the same will devolve not according to the general rule, but upon the heirs of the husband.

The Hindu Succession Bill, 1954, as originally introduced in the Rajya Sabha, did not contain any clause corresponding to Sub-Section (2) of Section 15. It came to be incorporated on the recommendations of the Joint Committee of the two Houses of Parliament. The intent of the legislature is clear that the property, if it originally belonged to the parents of the deceased female, should go to the legal heirs of the father.

So also under Clause (b) of Sub Section (2) of Section 15, the property inherited by a female Hindu from her husband or her father-in-law shall also under similar circumstances, devolve upon the heirs of the husband. It is the source from which the property was inherited by the female, which is more important for the purpose of devolution of her property. The fact that a female Hindu originally had a limited right and after acquiring the full right, would not, in any way, alter the rules of succession given in Sub Section (2) of Section 15.

The 174{+t}{+h} Report of the Law Commission also examined the subject of “Property Rights of Women; Proposed Reforms under the Hindu Law” and had noted that the rules of devolution of the property of a female who dies intestate reflects patriarchal assumptions.

The basis of inheritance of a female Hindu’s property who dies intestate would thus be the SOURCE from which such female Hindu came into the possession of the property and the manner of inheritance which would decide the manner of devolution.

The term ‘property’ though not specified in this Section means property of the deceased heritable under the Act. It includes both movable and immovable property owned and acquired by her by inheritance or by devise or at a partition or by gift or by her skill or exertion or by purchase or prescription. This Section does not differentiate between the property inherited and self-acquired property of a Hindu female; it only prescribes that if a property is inherited from husband or father-in-law, it would go to her husband’s heirs and if the property is inherited from her father or mother, in that case, the property would not go to her husband’s, but to the heirs of the father and mother.

This is very aptly illustrated by the following illustration:- A married Hindu female dies intestate leaving the property which is her self-acquired property. She has no issue and was a widow at the time of her death. As per the present position of law, her property would devolve in the second category, i.e., to her husband’s heirs. Thus, in a case where the mother of her husband is alive, her whole property would devolve on her mother-in-law. If the mother-in-law is also not alive, it would devolve as per the rules laid down in case of a male Hindu dying intestate, i.e., if the father of her deceased husband is alive, the next to inherit will be her father-in-law and if in the third category, the father-in-law is also not alive, then her property would devolve on the brother and sister of the deceased husband.

Thus, in the case of the self-acquired property of a Hindu married female dying intestate, her property devolves on her husband’s heirs. Her paternal and material heirs do not inherit, but the distant relations of her husband would inherit as per the husband’s heirs.

The case for change

The Hindu Succession Act, 1956 was enacted when, in the structure of the Hindu society, women hardly went out to work. There has been a vast change in the social scene in the past few years and women have made progress in all spheres. The consequence is that women are owning property earned by their own skill. These situations were not foreseen by the legislators.

If that is so, what is the impact of these socio-economic changes? Do they warrant any change in the law of succession in relation to the property of a female Hindu dying intestate? What is the fallout of a gradual disintegration of the joint Hindu family and the emergence of nuclear families as a unit of society over the years in the context of law of succession governing the issue at hand?

A fundamental tenet of the law of succession has been the proximity of relation in which a Successor stands to the person who originally held the property that may be the subject matter of inheritance in a given case. The fact that women have been given the right to inherit from her parental side also assumes relevance in the present context. These developments and changes lead to competing arguments and approaches that may be taken in re-defining the law of succession in case of a female Hindu dying intestate. Thus, three alternative options emerge for consideration, namely:

1. Self-acquired property of a female Hindu dying intestate should devolve first upon her heirs from the natal family.

2. Self-acquired property of a female Hindu dying intestate should devolve equally upon the heirs of her husband and the heirs from her natal family.

3. Self-acquired property of a female Hindu dying intestate should devolve first upon the heirs of her husband.

The third option may be taken first as this can be disposed of summarily. The option essentially means continuation of the status quo. We have seen earlier that socio-economic changes warrant corresponding changes in the law as well.

We may now take up the first option. The protagonists of this approach contend that the general order of succession reflects a gender bias. It will be relevant to refer to a passage in Pradhan Saxena – Succession Laws and Gender Justice in Re-defining Family Law in India by Archana Parasar, Amit Dhanda, New Delhi.

The supporters of the said approach contend that the joint family system has slowly eroded and that an increasing number of nuclear and semi-nuclear families have replaced the traditional Mitakshara Hindu joint family system. Women are also becoming more economically independent. With the growth of the nuclear family, a married woman’s dependency on her natal family and continued closeness to it is much greater today even if it was not so earlier. Most married women would prefer that their parents should be the more preferred heirs to inherit her property if her children and husband are not alive. She would also prefer that her sister and brother have a better right to inherit her property than her brother-in-law and sister-in-law.

Accordingly, it is urged that Section 15(1) should be modified to ensure that the general order of succession does not place a woman’s husband’s heirs above those who belong to her natal family like her father and mother and thereafter, her brother and sister. It is contended that when a man dies intestate, his wife’s relatives do not even figure in the order of succession despite the manner in which he may have acquired the property. In view of this, parity is sought in the case of a female by applying the same rules as applicable to male’s property.

Accordingly, it is suggested that it would be better to amend Section 15(1) to specify the general rules of devolution, which will apply not only to self-acquired property by a woman, but also to other property acquired through her family, gifts, etc. The only proviso which would then be needed would be the property that a woman acquires from her husband’s family.

The second option in this regard is that the property of a female Hindu dying intestate devolves upon the heirs depending upon the source from which, the said property was acquired by her, the self-acquired property of such female be simultaneously inherited by her heirs both from the husband family as well as the natal family in equal share. The fact remains that in spite of her closeness to and dependence on her natal family, her relations with her husband’s family are not separated and uprooted in entirety. She continues to be a member of her husband’s family, getting support from it in all walks of life. One cannot afford to ignore the ground realities in this regard. The social ethos and the mores of our patriarchal system demand that the existing system should not be totally reversed as claimed by the protagonists of the first option. Lest, there may be social and family tensions which may not be in the overall interest of the family as a whole and as such, ought to be avoided. In any case, it is open to the female Hindu to bequeath her property the way she likes by executing a Will.

Conclusions

In the present scenario, when amendments are made to the effect that women have been entitled to inherit property from her parental side as well as from husband’s side, it will be quite justified if equal right is given to her parental heirs along with her husband’s heirs to inherit her property.

It is, therefore, proposed that in order to bring about a balance, Section 15 should be amended, so that in case a female Hindu dies intestate leaving her self-acquired property with no heirs, as mentioned in Clause ‘a’ of Section 15, the property should devolve on her husband’s heirs and also on the heirs of her paternal side.

If this amendment is brought about, the effect will be as under:

A married Hindu female dies intestate leaving self-acquired property at the time of her death, the only surviving relatives being her mother-in-law (L) and her mother (M).

Pre-Amendment

As per the present law, her property would devolve entirely on ‘L’ and ‘M’ will not get anything from her property.

Post Amendment

By the proposed amendment, her mother-in-law and mother should equally inherit her self-acquired property.

A married Hindu female dies intestate leaving self-acquired property and she has no heirs as per Clause ‘a’ of the Schedule, the only surviving relatives are her husband’s brother and sister (BL & SL) and her own brother and sister (B&S).

Pre-Amendment

As per the present law, her property would normally devolve upon ‘BL’ and ‘SL’. ‘B’ and ‘S’ do not inherit anything from her in this property.

Post Amendment

By the proposed amendment, her own brother and sister should equally inherit along with her brother-in-law and sister-in-law.

The above amendment, suggested by me as Chairman of 18{+t}{+h} Law Commission as early as in June 2008 in the public interest, is still pending with the Union Law Ministry.

(The writer is a former Judge of the Supreme Court of India and former Chairman, Law Commission of India. His email id is jusarlakshmanan@gmail.com)

Courtesy: The Hindu

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

******

Euthanasia – India’s call

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

Anjana

The legality of mercy killing or euthanasia and its ethical and moral sides have been hotly discussed and debated in the Indian media and society for the last week or so.

Mercy killing is defined as the killing of one person by another. The victim of mercy killing is normally in the vegetable state or has an injury or illness that cannot be cured, as it is usually in its last stage. The victim experiences immensely painful last days just before his or her death.

For a voluntary case of mercy killing to take place, the killer must first obtain the consent of the victim, but there have been recorded cases of mercy killing against the wishes of the victim as well. This is known as involuntary mercy killing. The victim of a mercy killing dies a painless death after suffering an incurable ailment or serious injury. The term euthanasia, which means mercy killing, is derived from the Greek word for ‘good death’. Euthanasia has been legalised in some Western countries but is still considered to be an unethical practice in the Third World.

Also known as assisted suicide and mercy death, euthanasia is the intentional killing by act or omission of a dependent human being for his or her alleged benefit.

It is illegal in India and most countries of the world. Only ten odd countries have legalised the practice of mercy killing. Some social activists claim that euthanasia and assisted suicide are government mandated suffering for the terminally ill persons.

The DoctorNDTV.com survey on this issue has shown a mixed response. More than half the respondents feel that the decision should not be left to the doctors or the next of kin, while one third support the doctors / relatives right to take this decision. Two-thirds agree that euthanasia is the same as mercy killing. Though 71 per cent people feel that legal advice is necessary before taking a decision, most people (>88 per cent) feel that it may be misused in India.

The following are the pros and cons for allowing euthanasia.

Pros:

  • It provides a way to relieve extreme pain
  • It provides a way of relief when a person’s quality of life is low
  • Frees up medical funds to help other people
  • It is another case of freedom of choice

Cons:

  • Euthanasia devalues human life
  • Euthanasia can become a means of health care cost containment
  • Physicians and other medical care people will get involved in directly causing death
  • There is a ‘slippery slope’ effect that will occur.
  • Stances, views and opinions on euthanasia vary greatly; it is called murderous by some and merciful by others. Such controversy arises generally from the serious social, cultural and moral issues attached to the subject.

A Matter of Life and Death – March 7th 2011

Bringing the issue into the limelight has been the case of Aruna Shanbaug, who has been in a vegetative state of 37 years. A nurse at Mumbai’s KEM hospital in 1973, she was sexually assaulted while working and the incident left her in a vegetative state, relying on life support systems since the incident.

On Monday the 7th of March 2011, the Indian Supreme Court ruled that passive euthanasia was legal in India and could be practiced in special circumstances, but struck down any hopes of active euthanasia in the country. The Supreme Court was responding to an appeal filed by a friend of Shanbaug. The Supreme Court stated that the plea from the friend was not a valid reason enough to grant euthanasia to the ex-nurse. The apex court also stated that if the hospital taking care of Shanbaug had filed a similar appeal, it would carry more weight and authenticity than the one currently filed. One of the reasons given by the court in rejecting the appeal was that the hospital and the nurses taking care of Aruna Shanbaug were opposed to euthanasia of the patient.

India has given the green light for passive euthanasia, a decision seen as welcome and progressive move by many doctors across the country. Passive euthanasia is administering euthanasia by removing the life support extended to a patient in vegetative condition. This is in contrast to active euthanasia, where an active chemical or agent is injected or delivered into the body of a patient in vegetative condition. The apex court observed that the country might not be ready for such radical and drastic ruling. The court stated that the only way active euthanasia could be legalised is if the Indian Parliament passed a law to that effect.

A Bench of Justices Markandey Katju and Gyan Sudha Misra, however, did not accept the plea of Pinky Viranai seeking permission to withdraw life support to her friend.  Writing the judgment, Justice Katju said that there was no statutory provision in our country as to the legal procedure for withdrawing life support to a person in PVS or who is otherwise incompetent to take a decision. He agreed that passive euthanasia should be permitted in our country in certain situations.

The Bench pointed out that in the absence of a law against sexual harassment at work places, the Supreme Court in the Visakha case had laid down guidelines. Similarly he claimed that he was now laying down the law in this connection which will continue to be the law until Parliament makes a law on the subject. According to him, a decision has to be taken to discontinue life support [to a patient in PVS] either by the parents or the spouse or other close relatives, or in the absence of any of them, such a decision can be taken even by a person or a body of persons acting as a next friend. It can also be taken by the doctors attending the patient. However, the decision should be taken bona fide in the best interest of the patient.

The Bench believes that if they leave it solely to the patient’s relatives or to the doctors or the next friend to decide whether to withdraw life support to an incompetent person, there is always a risk in our country that this may be misused by some unscrupulous persons who wish to inherit or otherwise grab the property of the patient. Considering the low ethical levels prevailing in our society today and the rampant commercialisation and corruption, they cannot rule out the possibility that unscrupulous persons with the help of some unscrupulous doctors may fabricate material to show that it is a terminal case with no chance of recovery.”

In the present case, the Bench declared that Aruna Shanbaug’s parents are dead and other close relatives had not been interested in her ever since she had the unfortunate assault on her. It is the KEM Hospital staff, who has been amazingly caring for her day and night for so many long years, who really are her next friends, and not Ms. Pinky Virani, who has only visited her on a few occasions and written a book on her. Hence it is for the KEM Hospital staff to take that decision. The KEM hospital staff has clearly expressed their wish that Aruna Shanbaug should be allowed to live.

The nurses and doctors at the hospital were jubilant over the Supreme Court ruling. A few nurses at the hospital remarked to the media that the ruling was the best women’s day gift the top court could have given them. The nurses even went on to question the authenticity of Ms. Pinky Virani, Shanbaug’s friend who appealed to the Supreme Court to grant euthanasia. The nurses at KEM hospital claimed that Shanbaug was like family to them. They claimed that Shanbaug was not completely vegetative and that she responded to touch and food. Nurses were of the opinion that Ms. Virani, who had not taken care of Shanbaug through the 37 years of being comatose had no right to ask for the withdrawal of life support systems.

“India is not mature enough to handle euthanasia,” senior Bangalore-based cardiologist Devi Prasad Shetty said while expressing his happiness over the verdict on a mercy killing plea on behalf of 60-year-old Aruna Shanbaug. Dr. Shetty’s view was shared by Chief Cardiologist of Bombay Hospital B.K. Goyal, who said euthanasia is an emotional issue which can be “misused.”

There was joy among Aruna’s former colleagues and nurses in local KEM hospital who have been tending to her. Nurses distributed sweets at the hospital after the Supreme Court ruling.

While comparing euthanasia with MTP, senior doctor Goyal said that in such a case they should ensure the safety of people at large because when in India, MTP is allowed, it was misused right and left. In the same way, he feels euthanasia can be misused too.

Dr. Shetty said that financial constraints and inability to look after cannot be the reason to ask someone to terminate life. This is unacceptable.

He believes that this country is not mature enough to handle this major legal issue. It is not possible.

March 9th 2011

No parent would like to see their children killed, even if disabled, but watching the nightmarish existence of their physically challenged sons has prompted a couple from Bihar to seek euthanasia from them. Mukesh Kumar, a marginal farmer from Ratwada village of Muzaffarpur district filed a mercy death plea for his sons, Nitin, 15, and Anshu, 13, both living with muscular dystrophy (MD), a terminal and degenerative condition that has crippled the two brothers.

Muscular dystrophy is not just a disability, but a genetic and inherited disorder that gradually deteriorates killing muscle cells and tissues until the patient finally dies.

According to the parents, the boys were born healthy and were like normal children till age two when they got the muscular disorder. The boys cannot talk or stand on their feet and are completely dependent on their parents. They are also paralysed below their chests and are unable to move or eat without assistance.

Although, MD has no cure, some treatments are available in US. However, these are expensive, something to the tune of over Rs. 30 lakhs which are far beyond the poor farmer means.

The financial resources of the couple have been exhausted completely. They have sold off their few valuables and ancestral land to meet the expenses for their sons’ medical treatment.

Mukesh stated that they have been pleading for their mercy killing because we cannot continue costly medical treatment, which anyway will not cure them, only prolong their unhappy lives. He believes that the state government should either grant permission or provide us help for treatment.

Watching the discomfort, torturous pain, indignity and utter helplessness of the two sons virtually turn into vegetables over the last 10 years is distressing for the parents.

With doctors giving up hope, the parents feel death is the only solution that can put an end to the tyranny of their fate.

The dignity of life and the right to live without pain and discomfort are the major issues in the limelight. If active euthanasia is implemented in India, there is a considerable chance that it could be misused, especially in areas that are rural and withdrawn from the mainstream. The Supreme Court seems to have made a sensible decision on the issue. May be, India will have to wait a few more years until the nation is ready for legal active euthanasia.

Dream Dare Win

www.jeywin.com

*****

NY becomes 6th U.S. state to legalize Gay Marriage

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

New York becomes the sixth state where gay couples can wed, doubling the number of Americans living in a state with legal gay marriage.

After days of contentious negotiations and last-minute reversals by two Republican senators, New York became the sixth and largest state in the U.S. to legalize gay marriage, breathing life into the national gay rights movement that had stalled over a nearly identical bill two years ago.

Pending any court challenges, legal gay marriages can begin in New York by late July, 2011 after Gov. Andrew Cuomo signed his bill into law just before midnight on 24.06.2011.

At New York City’s Stonewall Inn, the Greenwich Village pub that spawned the gay rights movement on a June night in 1969, Scott Redstone watched New York sign the historic same-sex marriage law with his partner of 29 years, and popped the question.

“I said, ‘Will you marry me?’ And he said, ‘Of course!’” Redstone said he and Steven Knittweis walked home to pop open a bottle of champagne.

New York becomes the sixth state where gay couples can wed, doubling the number of Americans living in a state with legal gay marriage.

“That’s certainly going to have a ripple effect across the nation,” said Ross Levi, executive director of the Empire State Pride Agenda. “It’s truly a historic night for love, our families, and democracy won.”

“We made a powerful statement,” Mr. Cuomo said. “This state is at its finest when it is a beacon of social justice.”

The leading opponent, Democratic Sen. Ruben Diaz, was given only a few minutes to state his case during the Senate debate.

“God, not Albany, settled the issue of marriage a long time ago,” said Diaz, a Bronx minister. “I’m sorry you are trying to take away my right to speak,” he said. “Why are you ashamed of what I have to say?”

The Catholic Bishops of New York said the law alters “radically and forever humanity’s historic understanding of marriage.”

“We always treat our homosexual brothers and sisters with respect, dignity and love,” the bishops stated Friday, “We worry that both marriage and the family will be undermined by this tragic presumption of government in passing this legislation that attempts to redefine these cornerstones of civilization.”

Legal challenges of the law and political challenges aimed at the four Republicans who supported gay marriage in the 33-29 vote are expected. Republican senators endured several marathon sessions, combing through several standard but complex bills this week, before taking up the same-sex marriage bill 24.06.2011.

The bill came to the floor for a vote after an agreement was reached on more protections for religious groups that oppose gay marriage and feared discrimination lawsuits.

“State legislators should not decide society-shaping issues,” said the Rev. Jason McGuire of New Yorkers for Constitutional Freedoms. He said his organization would work in next year’s elections to defeat lawmakers who voted for the measure.

The big win for gay rights advocates is expected to galvanize the movement around the country after an almost identical bill was defeated here in 2009 and similar measures failed in 2010 in New Jersey and this year in Maryland and Rhode Island.

Jerry Nathan of Albany, who married his partner in Massachusetts, called the vote “an incredible culmination of so much that’s been going on for so many years it doesn’t seem real yet.”

Ultimately, gay couples will be able to marry because of two previously undecided Republicans from upstate regions far more conservative than the New York City base of the gay rights movement.

Sen. Stephen Saland, 67, voted against a similar bill in 2009, helping kill the measure and dealing a blow to the national gay rights movement. On Friday night, gay marriage supporters wept in the Senate gallery as Mr. Saland explained how his strong, traditionally family upbringing led him to embrace legalizing gay marriage.

“While I understand that my vote will disappoint many, I also know my vote is a vote of conscience,” Mr. Saland, of Poughkeepsie, said in a statement to The Associated Press before the vote. “I am doing the right thing in voting to support marriage equality.”

Also voting for the bill was freshman Sen. Mark Grisanti, a Buffalo Republican who also had been undecided. Mr. Grisanti said he could not deny anyone what he called basic rights.

“I apologize to those I offend,” said Mr. Grisanti, a Roman Catholic. “But I believe you can be wiser today than yesterday. I believe this state needs to provide equal rights and protections for all its residents,” he said.

A huge street party erupted outside the Stonewall Inn Friday night, with celebrants waving rainbow flags and dancing after the historic vote.

Watching the festivities from across the street was Sarah Ellis, who has been in a six-year relationship with her partner, Kristen Henderson. Ellis said the measure would enable them to get married in the fall. They have twin toddlers and live in Sea Cliff on Long Island.

UP has lowest rape rate among all states- NCRB

Saturday, December 3rd, 2011

The noise being generated about recent incidents of rape in Uttar Pradesh might make it seem like the state is particularly bad when it comes to this most heinous of crimes against women, but official data suggests quite the contrary. In fact, UP has among the lowest rates of rape among all major states in India.
The National Crime Records Bureau’s publication Crime in India 2009 — the latest edition of that annual report — shows that with 1,759 rape victims in 2009, UP had 0.9 rape victims per lakh population. Compare that with the 1,631 victims in a much smaller state like Assam, which means a rate of 5.3 rape victims per lakh population, almost six times the rate in UP.
The five best states or UTs in 2009, among those with a population of 100 lakh or more, were Gujarat, Karnataka, Tamil Nadu, UP and Bihar in that order, all of them having less than one rape victim per lakh population.
At the other end of the scale, the five worst were Assam, Madhya Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Delhi and West Bengal, in descending order of the rate. Even the best among this lot, West Bengal had a rate of 2.6 rape victims per lakh population, that is about thrice as bad as in UP. The Congress raising the issue of lawlessness in UP in this context seems particularly ironic given the fact that not one of the five best states or UTs had a Congress government in 2009, although Tamil Nadu had one run by an ally. he truth is that the political colour of the government has little co-relation with rape statistics.
It is likely that social factors lead to greater under-reporting of crimes against women in a state like UP or Bihar than in, say, Delhi. However, that still does not explain why MP, Chhattisgarh, Rajasthan (2.3 victims per lakh population) or Haryana (2.5 per lakh) do not have lower figures than UP or Bihar. After all, there is no reason to believe that there is any less of a stigma attached to rape victims in these states than in UP or Bihar.
Even a single case of a woman getting raped anywhere is one rape too many and deserves to be condemned. However, when crimes like these are sought to be used for political ends, those raising the bogey also deserve condemnation. If those protesting against the recent rapes in UP are seriously concerned about crimes against women in India, they would be better advised to spend their time and energy on figuring out how rapes and other such crimes can be minimised if not eliminated. That would involve, among other things, changing the gender profile of the police force as well as sensitising male policemen to the heinousness of the crime and the trauma of the victims. It is a harder job than agitating with a political motive, but a job that needs to be done.